JP2018143456A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of improving an interest in a game of a player.SOLUTION: A game machine comprises: privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game in which variable ball entry means is varied from a regulation state to an open state until a prescribed condition is established; establishment signal output means for outputting an establishment signal on the basis of establishment of the prescribed condition; ball entry signal output means for outputting a ball entry signal on the basis of entry of a game ball to the variable ball entry means; and privilege application means for applying a privilege which is advantageous to a player on the basis of entry of the game ball to the variable ball entry means. Subordinate control means comprises: performance mode determination means for determining a performance mode on the basis of performance information which is determined by performance information determination means; performance execution means for executing a performance mode determined by the performance mode determination means; and specific performance execution means for executing a specific performance when receiving the ball entry signal in a period until the prescribed condition is established after receiving the establishment signal.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 1

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a game machine that shifts to a winning state when a specific lottery result is obtained in a lottery executed on the basis of a starting ball. In such a gaming machine, when a winning state is reached, the large opening provided in the board surface is set to an open state. By winning the game ball to the large opening, a prize ball is awarded to the player, so that it becomes advantageous to the player by entering the winning state. The large opening is set in a closed state in which it is difficult for a game ball to enter when a predetermined number of game balls are won after being set in the open state. Further, in such conventional gaming machines, a special effect (over winning effect) is executed when a winning of more than a specified number of game balls is detected in a single open state with respect to the large opening. There are some that are aimed at improving the interest of players.

JP 2015-112239 A

  In such a conventional gaming machine, it is necessary to count the number of game balls won in the large opening in order to determine whether or not the over winning effect is executed. The number of balls entered until the mouth was closed was generally different. Therefore, because it is necessary to reset the conditions for whether or not to execute the over-winning effect according to the model, there is a case where the program adopted for one model cannot be transferred to another gaming machine as it is. It was. That is, there is a problem that the workload of the developer increases.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine that can reduce a developer's work load.

  In order to achieve this object, a gaming machine according to claim 1 includes a main control means for executing game control, a slave control means for executing game control based on a control signal from the main control means, and a game Variable entry means that can be varied between an open state in which a ball can enter and a restricted state in which entry of a game ball is restricted, and the main control means makes a determination based on the establishment of a determination condition. Based on the determination means for executing, the effect information determining means for determining the effect information for executing the effect based on the determination result by the determination means, and the determination result by the determination means being a specific determination result, Special game execution means for executing a special game for varying the variable entry means from the restricted state to the open state until a predetermined condition is satisfied, and a establishment signal output means for outputting a establishment signal based on the establishment of the predetermined condition And said Based on the fact that a game ball has entered the variable ball entry means, the ball input signal output means for outputting a ball input signal and the game ball entering the variable ball entry means are advantageous to the player. A privilege granting unit for granting a special privilege, and the slave control unit determines a production mode based on the production information determined by the production information determination unit, and the production mode An effect executing means for executing the effect mode determined by the determining means, and a specification for executing a specific effect when the entrance signal is received in a period until a predetermined condition is satisfied after receiving the establishment signal Production execution means.

  The gaming machine according to claim 2 is the gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the predetermined condition is that a predetermined number of gaming balls enter the variable ball entry means or a predetermined period of time elapses. This is true.

  According to a third aspect of the present invention, in the gaming machine according to the first or second aspect, the sub control means is configured to output the establishment signal output means based on a predetermined period of time having elapsed as the predetermined condition. When the establishment signal output by is received, avoidance means for avoiding execution of the specific effect is provided.

  According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, the main control means for executing the control of the game, the slave control means for executing the control of the game based on the control signal from the main control means, and the game ball can enter And a variable entry means that can be varied between an open state and a restricted state in which entry of game balls is restricted, and the main control means comprises: a determination means that executes determination based on the establishment of a determination condition; The effect information determining means for determining the effect information for executing the effect based on the determination result by the determining means, and the variable entry means based on the determination result by the determining means being a specific determination result. A bonus game executing means for executing a bonus game to vary the predetermined condition from the restricted state to the released state until a predetermined condition is satisfied, a formation signal output means for outputting a formation signal based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, and the variable input Game on ball means A bonus signal output means for outputting a pitch signal based on the player's entry, and a privilege grant for giving a privilege advantageous to the player based on the game ball entering the variable pitch means And the sub control means determines an effect mode based on the effect information determined by the effect information determination means, and the effect mode determination means determines the effect mode determination means. And an effect execution means for executing an effect mode, and a specific effect execution means for executing a specific effect when the entrance signal is received in a period until a predetermined condition is satisfied after receiving the establishment signal. .

  As a result, the developer's workload can be reduced.

  According to the gaming machine according to claim 2, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine according to claim 1, the predetermined condition is determined in advance whether a predetermined number of gaming balls enter the variable pitching means. It is established when a predetermined period has elapsed.

  As a result, when the specific effect is executed, after the predetermined number of game balls have entered the variable entry means, or after a predetermined time has elapsed, the variable entry means is further provided to the player. It can be recognized that a game ball has entered. Therefore, there is an effect that the player who has confirmed the specific performance can be pleased.

  According to the gaming machine of the third aspect, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine according to the first or second aspect, the slave control means is based on the fact that a predetermined period has been set as the predetermined condition. When the establishment signal output by the establishment signal output unit is received, avoidance means for avoiding execution of the specific effect is provided.

  Thereby, it is possible to notify the player that the number of game balls exceeding the predetermined number has entered the variable ball entry means by executing the specific effect. Therefore, there is an effect that the player who has confirmed the specific performance can be more pleased.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of an operation unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a game board and an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a back case and a slide unit. It is an exploded back perspective view of a back case and a slide unit. It is a front view of a back case and a base member. It is a front view of a back case and a base member. It is a front view of a back case and a base member. (A) is sectional drawing of the 1st wheel member in the XXa-XXa line | wire of FIG. 17, (b) is sectional drawing of the 2nd wheel member in the XXb-XXb line | wire of FIG. It is a front view of a back case and a slide unit. It is a front view of a back case and a slide unit. It is a front view of a back case and a slide unit. It is a front perspective view of a slide unit in the state where a liquid crystal display device is arranged in the proximity position. It is a front view of a slide unit in the state where a liquid crystal display device is arranged in a proximity position. It is a front perspective view of a slide unit in the state where a liquid crystal display device is arranged in a separation position. It is a front view of a slide unit in the state where a liquid crystal display device is arranged in a separation position. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a slide unit. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a slide unit. It is a front view of a cover member and a slide drive mechanism. It is a rear view of a cover member and a slide drive mechanism. It is a front view of a cover member and a slide drive mechanism. It is a rear view of a cover member and a slide drive mechanism. It is a front view of a cover member and a slide drive mechanism. It is a rear view of a cover member and a slide drive mechanism. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a slide rail and a slide member. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a slide rail and a slide member. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a slide rail and a slide member. (A) is a front view of a slide member, (b) is a rear view of a slide member. (A) is a front view of a slide member, (b) is a rear view of a slide member. (A) is a front view of a slide member, (b) is a rear view of a slide member. (A) is a reference figure, (b) is the front schematic diagram which illustrated the slide mechanism typically. (A) is a schematic front view schematically showing a slide mechanism in a state in which the liquid crystal display device is disposed at a separated position, and (b) is a slide mechanism in a state in which the liquid crystal display device is disposed at a close position. It is the front schematic diagram which illustrated schematically. It is the front schematic diagram which illustrated the slide mechanism in 2nd Embodiment typically. It is the front schematic diagram which illustrated the slide mechanism typically. It is a reference figure. It is the front schematic diagram which illustrated the slide mechanism typically. It is the front schematic diagram which illustrated the slide mechanism in 3rd Embodiment typically. It is the front schematic diagram which illustrated the slide mechanism typically. It is the front schematic diagram which illustrated the slide mechanism typically. It is an exploded back perspective view of a slide rail and a slide member in a 4th embodiment. (A) is the front schematic diagram which illustrated typically the slide mechanism in the state which orient | assigned the liquid crystal surface to the front side, (b) is typically the slide mechanism in the state which orient | assigned the decoration surface to the front side. It is the front schematic diagram shown in figure. (A) And (b) is a front schematic diagram of the slide mechanism which shows the transition state at the time of a base member rotating from a 1st rotation position to a 2nd rotation position. (A) And (b) is a front schematic diagram of the slide mechanism which shows the transition state at the time of a base member rotating from a 2nd rotation position to a 1st rotation position. (A) is the partial expansion front perspective view of the game board in 5th Embodiment, (b) is the partial expansion front view of a game board. It is the elements on larger scale of the game board in the LVI-LVI line of FIG.55 (b). It is a partial expanded sectional view of the game board in the LVII-LVII line of FIG.56 (b). It is a partial expanded sectional view of the channel member in a 6th embodiment. (A) is the elements on larger scale of the channel member in a 7th embodiment, and (b) is a sectional view of the channel member in the LIXb-LIXb line of Drawing 59 (a). It is a partial expanded sectional view of the channel member in an 8th embodiment. (A) is the figure which showed typically the area division setting and effective line setting of the display screen in a 1st control example, (b) is the figure which illustrated the actual display screen in a 1st control example. . (A) is a figure which shows the control of the display area in a 1st control example, (b) is a figure which shows the effect in a 1st control example. (A) And (b) is a figure which shows the display content in a 1st control example. (A) And (b) is a figure which shows the display content in a 1st control example. (A) And (b) is a figure which shows the display content in a 1st control example. (A) And (b) is a figure which shows the display content in a 1st control example. (A) And (b) is a figure which shows the inversion operation | movement of the slide member in the 1st control example. (A) And (b) is a figure which shows the decorative surface of the slide member in a 1st control example. (A) And (b) is a figure which shows the display content in a 1st control example. (A) And (b) is a figure which shows an example of the display control in a 1st control example. It is a figure which shows the outline | summary of various counters. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of ROM in a main controller, (b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of RAM in a main controller. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the first per-random number counter C1 and the jackpot determination value in the special symbol, and (b) is a jackpot type in the first per-spec counter C2 and the special symbol. (C) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the second random number counter C4 and the hit in the normal symbol. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of the fluctuation pattern selection table, (b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the fluctuation pattern table for jackpots, (c), It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the deviation (normal) fluctuation pattern table, (d) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the fluctuation pattern table for deviation (probability change). (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of ROM of an audio lamp control apparatus, (b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of RAM of an audio lamp control apparatus. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the over-winning table, (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the winning-over winning table, and (c) is a sign over It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the winning table, (d) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the off-over winning table. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ending table, (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the winning ending table, and (c) is a diagram of the predictive ending table. It is the schematic diagram which showed the content typically, (d) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the outlier ending table. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of the sub liquid crystal drive scenario, (b) is the schematic diagram which showed the content of the slide drive scenario typically, (c) is rotational drive. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the scenario, (d) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the inversion drive scenario. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a display control apparatus. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of the drive data storage area. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the display data table typically. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the transfer data table typically. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the drawing list typically. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the special symbol change start process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the prefetch process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the through gate passage process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interruption process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot operation | movement setting process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the ending process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the alerting | reporting process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the winning process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the abnormality process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot related process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the over winning process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the ending setting process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation | variation display setting process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the lamp edit process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the sub liquid crystal drive process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the boot process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is a flowchart which shows the command interruption process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is a flowchart which shows the V interruption process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation pattern command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is a flowchart which shows the stop type command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the display jackpot related command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is a flowchart which shows the opening command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is a flowchart which shows the round number command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is a flowchart which shows the ending command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is a flowchart which shows the normal winning effect command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is a flowchart which shows the over winning effect command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is a flowchart which shows the V effect command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. . (A) is a flowchart which shows the back image change command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is a flowchart which shows the error command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the display setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the warning image setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the pointer update process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the sub symbol setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is a flowchart which shows the transfer setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is a flowchart which shows the resident image transfer setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the normal image transfer setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the drawing correction process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the drawing process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the 2nd control example. (A) And (b) is a figure which shows the internal structure of the 1st variable prize-winning apparatus in the 2nd control example. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in the 2nd control example. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of RAM in the main control apparatus in a 2nd control example, (b) is a schematic structure of RAM in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example. It is the schematic diagram shown. (A) And (b) is a figure which shows the display content in a 2nd control example. (A) And (b) is a figure which shows the decorative surface of the slide member in a 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the distribution motor setting process performed by MPU in the main controller in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the main process 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot related process 2 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the ending setting process 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the game method alerting | reporting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example. (A) And (b) is a figure which shows the display apparatus of the pachinko machine in the 3rd control example. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in the 3rd control example. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of the sub liquid-crystal drive scenario in a 3rd control example, (b) is the model which showed typically the content of the mirror effect drive scenario in a 3rd control example. FIG. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of RAM in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the main process 3 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the mirror effect setting process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in the 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation | variation display setting process 3 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 3rd control example. (A) And (b) is a figure which shows the modification of the display apparatus in a 3rd control example. (A) And (b) is a figure which shows the modification of the display content of a 1st control example. (A) And (b) is a figure which shows the modification of the display content of a 1st control example. (A) And (b) is a figure which shows the modification of the display content of a 1st control example. (A) And (b) is a figure which shows the modification of the display content of a 1st control example. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of RAM in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 4th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot operation | movement setting process 4 performed by MPU in the main controller in the 4th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the ending process 4 performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in the 4th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the main process 4 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 4th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot related process 4 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in the 4th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot game timing process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 4th control example. It is a figure which shows an example of effect display. It is a figure which shows an example of effect display.

  Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIG. 1 to FIG. 60, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described as a first embodiment. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer shape that is substantially the same as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball ball game is played when a ball (game ball) flows down the front of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 has a ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower dish unit 15 that covers the lower side of the front frame 14 are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower dish unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. 14 and the lower pan unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and a window part 14c that is formed in an approximately elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central part thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be seen on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 that stores balls is formed in a substantially box shape that protrudes forward and the upper surface is opened, and prize balls and rental balls are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the sphere thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4). A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the contents of the effect of super reach. The

  The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around it (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means play a role of enhancing the effect of the game during the game by changing or controlling the light emission mode by turning on or blinking according to the change of the gaming state at the time of big hit or predetermined reach. On the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c, there are provided electric decoration portions 29 to 33 incorporating light emitting means such as LEDs. In the pachinko machine 10, these lighting parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and the lighting parts 29 to 33 are turned on by lighting or blinking of the built-in LEDs at the time of jackpot or reach effects. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is being hit or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left part of the front frame 14 as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has built-in light emitting means such as LEDs and can display the payout of a prize ball and when an error occurs.

  In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, on the lower side of the right illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 (see FIG. 2) can be visually recognized from the front surface of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin that is chrome-plated is attached to an area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state where a bill or a card is inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, Loans are made. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is lit to display the remaining amount as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as there is a remaining amount on the card or the like. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. In addition, in a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of the parts so that the component configuration is common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed on the left side of the lower plate unit 15 in a substantially box shape with the upper surface opened. . On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 that is operated by a player to drive a ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is disposed.

  Inside the operation handle 51, a touch sensor 51a for permitting driving of the ball launch unit 112a, a launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation, and a rotation of the operation handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of movement (rotation position) based on a change in electrical resistance is incorporated. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of rotation operation. The resistance value of the variable resistor A ball is fired with a strength corresponding to (shooting strength), and the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

  In the lower part of the front of the lower plate 50, a ball removal lever 52 is provided for operating when the balls stored in the lower plate 50 are discharged downward. The ball removal lever 52 is always urged in the front direction, and by sliding it in the back direction against the urging, the bottom opening formed in the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened, A ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball pulling lever 54b is normally performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as “a thousand box”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a large number of nails (not shown) for ball guidance, windmills, rails 61 and 62, and general prizes. The opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the variable winning device 65, the through gate 67, the variable display device unit 80 and the like are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is the back surface of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1). Attached to the side. The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmitting resin material and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures disposed on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side. The general winning port 63, the first winning port 64, the second winning port 640, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are disposed in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. It is fixed from the front side with a tapping screw or the like.

  The front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and the strip-shaped metal plate is located on the inner side of the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and rear. A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is an area formed on the front surface of the game board 13 and defined by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 that connects the rails (a winning opening is provided and fired). Area where the falling sphere flows).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the front end portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide path again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the sphere, and the ball launched at a predetermined momentum or more hits the return rubber 69 and gains momentum. Is bounced back to the center while being attenuated.

  First symbol display devices 37A and 37B each having a plurality of LEDs and a 7-segment display as light emitting means are disposed in the lower left portion of the game area when viewed from the front (lower left portion in FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37 </ b> A and 37 </ b> B are configured to be selectively used depending on whether the ball has won the first prize opening 64 or the second prize opening 640. Specifically, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball wins the second winning opening 640, the first symbol display device 37A operates. The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

  In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B indicate, by means of LEDs, whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the process of changing the probability, in the short time, or in the normal state by a lighting state, or whether the pachinko machine 10 is changing or not by a lighting state. , Indicating whether the stop symbol is a symbol corresponding to a probable jackpot, a symbol corresponding to a normal jackpot or a symbol that is out of place, by a lighting state, indicating the number of held balls by a lighting state, and a 7-segment display device, Displays numbers and errors. The plurality of LEDs are configured to have different emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of each LED, and the combination of the emission colors may suggest various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. it can.

  In the present pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed in response to winning of the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and also determines the type of the big hit if it is determined to be a big hit. As the jackpot type determined here, 15R probability variation jackpot, 4R probability variation jackpot, and 15R normal jackpot are prepared. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the lottery result is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the end of the variation, but if it is a jackpot, a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is displayed. .

  Here, the “15R probability variation jackpot” is a probability variation jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after a jackpot of 15 rounds, and “4R probability variation jackpot” is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of four. It is a probabilistic jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after. In addition, “15R normal jackpot” is a jackpot that shifts to a low probability state after the maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds and hits a short time during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). is there.

  In addition, the “high probability state” means a state in which the jackpot probability thereafter increases as an added value after the jackpot ends, that is, when the probability change is in progress (probability change), in other words, a game that easily shifts to the special game state. It is a state of. The high probability state (during probability change) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the hit probability of the second symbol, which will be described later, is increased and the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 640. The “low probability state” refers to a time when the probability of jackpot change is not occurring, and a state where the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state where the jackpot probability is lower than that at the time of probability change. The short time state (short time medium) of the “low probability state” means that the jackpot probability is a normal state, and the jackpot probability remains as it is, and only the hit probability of the second symbol is increased, and the second prize opening 640 is obtained. It means the state of the game where the ball is easy to win. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state is a game state (a state where neither the big hit probability nor the second symbol hit probability is increased) which is neither probabilistic nor short in time.

  During probability change and time reduction, not only does the probability of winning the second symbol increase, but also the time for opening the electric accessory 640a associated with the second prize opening 640 is changed, and the time is longer than normal. Is set. When the electric accessory 640a is in the opened state (open state), the ball wins the second winning opening 640 as compared to the case where the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state (closed state). Easy state. Therefore, during the probability change or the short time, it becomes easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 640, and the number of jackpot lotteries can be increased.

  In addition, during the probability change or during the short time, it is not necessary to change the opening time of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second prize opening 640, or in addition to changing the opening time, It is good also as what changes the frequency | count that the accessory 640a opens more than usual. In addition, the probability of winning the second symbol is not changed during the probability change or in the short time, and the electric accessory 640a is released at the time when the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is opened and once. It is good also as what changes at least one of the frequency | counts. In addition, during the probability change or in the short time, the time of opening the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 or the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a per time is not counted, and the second symbol hit Only the probability may be changed so as to increase compared to the normal rate.

  The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning ports 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. In addition, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is synchronized with the variable display on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B by using a winning (start winning) at the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640 as a trigger. It is composed of a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as “display device”) that performs variable display, and an LED that displays the second symbol in a variable manner with the passage of a sphere of the through gate 67 as a trigger. A second symbol display device (not shown) is provided.

  The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a center frame 86 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol display device 81 is visible through an opening opened in the center of the center frame 86.

  The third symbol display device 81 is constituted by a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4). One symbol row is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol). These third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol column, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It is like that. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B in accordance with the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4). The decorative display according to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B is performed. Instead of the display device, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel.

  Each time the sphere passes through the through gate 67, the second symbol display device alternately turns on the symbol “◯” and the symbol “X” as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) for a predetermined time. A variable display is performed. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if the winning symbol is a winning symbol, the symbol “◯” is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation of the second symbol is displayed. Further, if the winning lottery results, the symbol of “x” is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation of the third symbol is displayed.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device stops at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol “◯”), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is displayed for a predetermined time. It is configured to be in an activated state (opened) only.

  The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the probability change or during the shorter time than when the game state is normal. As a result, during the probability change and during the time reduction, since the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, the winning lottery can be performed more than during normal. Therefore, since the chance of winning in the winning lottery increases, it is possible to give the player a lot of opportunities for the electric winning component 640a of the second winning opening 640 to be in an open state. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the ball to win the second winning opening 640 during the probability change and during the short time.

  It is to be noted that the probability of winning is increased during probability change or time reduction, and other methods such as increasing the opening time and the number of times of opening of the electric accessory 640a per hit are also used to reach the second prize opening 640 during probability change or time reduction. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to win, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time required for displaying the variation of the second symbol is set shorter than normal during probability change or short time, the winning probability may be constant regardless of the gaming state, The opening time and the number of opening times of the electric accessory 640a may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

  The through gate 67 is assembled to the game board on the right side in the lower area of the variable display device unit 80, and a part of the ball flowing down to the right side of the game board can pass through the balls launched to the game board. It is configured. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery of the second symbol is performed. After winning the lottery, the 2nd symbol display device displays a variation, and if the winning lottery results, the symbol “○” is displayed as the variable display stop symbol, and the winning lottery result may be off For example, the symbol “x” is displayed as the stop symbol of the variable display.

  The total number of passes through the through-gate 67 of the sphere is held up to a maximum of 4 times, and the number of held balls is displayed by the above-described first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and at the second symbol hold lamp (not shown). Is also displayed. Four second symbol holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  Note that the variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third symbol. A part of the symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of balls held for passing through the ball of the through gate 67 is not limited to four times, and may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (for example, eight times). Further, the number of through gates 67 to be assembled is not limited to one, and may be plural (for example, two). Further, the assembly position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the right side of the variable display device unit 80, and may be the left side of the variable display device unit 80, for example. In addition, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol hold lamp may not perform lighting display.

  Below the variable display unit 80, a first winning port 64 through which a ball can win is disposed. When a ball wins the first winning port 64, a first winning port switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused by the first winning port switch being turned on. A jackpot lottery is made (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

  On the other hand, a second winning port 640 through which a ball can win is disposed on the right side of the first winning port 64 in front view. When a ball wins the second prize opening 640, a second prize opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused by the second prize opening switch being turned on. A jackpot lottery is performed (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

  Each of the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640 is also one of winning ports from which five balls are paid out as winning balls when a ball is won. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins the first prize opening 64 and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins the second prize slot 640 are configured to be the same. The number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins the first prize opening 64 is different from the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins to the second prize opening 640, for example, the ball to the first prize opening 64 The number of prize balls to be paid out when a prize is won may be three, and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins the second prize opening 640 may be five.

  The second winning opening 640 is accompanied by an electric accessory 640a. The electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable. Normally, the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), and it is difficult for the ball to win the second winning opening 640. On the other hand, when the symbol “◯” is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variation display of the second symbol that is triggered by the passage of the ball to the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a is in an open state (enlarged) State), and the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 640.

  As described above, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than that during normal change during the probability change and the short time, and the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is short. "Is easily displayed, and the number of times that the electric accessory 640a is opened (retracted) increases. Further, during the probability change and the time reduction, the time for opening the electric accessory 640a also becomes longer than during the normal time. Therefore, it is possible to create a state where the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 640 during the probability change and during the short time compared to the normal time.

  Here, the probability of winning a big hit is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state when the ball wins the first winning port 64 and when the ball wins the second winning port 640. However, the probability that a 15R probability variation jackpot is selected as the jackpot type selected when the jackpot is won is higher when the ball wins the second winning slot 640 than when the ball wins the first winning slot 64. Is set. On the other hand, the first winning port 64 does not have an electric accessory as in the second winning port 640, and is in a state where the ball can always win.

  Therefore, during normal times, the electric winnings associated with the second winning opening 640 are often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win the second winning opening 640. Then, the ball is fired so that the ball passes to the left of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called “left-handed”), and a lot of opportunities for lottery wins are obtained by winning at the first winning opening 64, and the jackpot It is advantageous for the player to aim for this.

  On the other hand, during the probability change or during the short time, passing the ball through the through gate 67 makes it easy for the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 to be in an open state and to easily win the second winning opening 640. Therefore, the ball is fired toward the second prize opening 640 so that the ball passes the right side of the variable display device 80 (so-called “right-handed”), and is passed through the through gate 67 to open the electric accessory. In addition, it is more advantageous for the player to aim for a 15R probability variation jackpot by winning the second winning opening 640.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment launches a ball to the player in accordance with the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is probable, short, or normal). Can be changed between “left-handed” and “right-handed”. Thus, the player can be changed in the way the ball is hit, so that the game can be enjoyed.

  A variable winning device 65 is disposed on the right side of the first winning port 64, and a horizontally-long rectangular specific winning port (large opening) 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning at the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640 becomes a jackpot, after a predetermined time (variable time) has passed, The first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on, and a stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. In this special gaming state, the special winning opening 65a that is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or ten balls have been won).

  The specific winning opening 65a is closed when a predetermined time elapses, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which the opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state advantageous to the player, and the player is given out a larger amount of prize balls than usual in order to give a gaming value (game value). Is done.

  Specifically, the variable winning device 65 is a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate covering the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening opening solenoid (not shown) for driving to open / close forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. And. The special winning opening 65a is normally closed so that the ball cannot win or is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large opening opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball is likely to win the specific winning opening 65a. It operates to repeat the state and the state alternately.

  A second variable winning device 82a is disposed at the upper left of the first winning port 64, and a second specific winning port 82 is provided in the vicinity thereof. Normally, the second variable winning device 82a is in a closed state (reduced state) so that the ball cannot enter the second specific winning port 82. On the other hand, when the second variable winning device is opened (in an expanded state) at the time of a specific jackpot (for example, 15R probability variable jackpot), the special gaming state where the ball is likely to win the second specific winning slot 82 is made. Can do.

  Note that the special gaming state is not limited to the above-described form. When the game area is provided with a large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a, and the LED corresponding to the jackpot is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, A special game in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning port 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when the ball wins into the specific winning port 65a while the specific winning port 65a is opened. You may make it form as a state. Further, the number of the specific winning opening 65a is not limited to one, and one or a plurality of (for example, three) may be arranged, and the arrangement position is not limited to the upper right side of the first winning opening 64. The variable display device unit 80 may be on the left side.

  A sticking space K1 for sticking a certificate paper, an identification label or the like is provided at the lower right corner of the game board 13, and the certificate paper or the like attached to the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front frame 14. 35 (see FIG. 1).

  The game board 13 is provided with a first out port 71. Balls that flow down the game area and have not won any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 640 are guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the first out opening 71. The first out port 71 is disposed below the first winning port 64.

  A number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (acts) such as a windmill are arranged.

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control apparatus 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 113), and a display control board (display control apparatus 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control apparatus 111), a firing control board (launching control apparatus 112), a power supply board (power supply apparatus 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

  The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 and a dispensing unit 93 that form a protective cover. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as necessary.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are accommodated.

  Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and launch control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover so that they cannot be opened by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). Consolidated). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover so as to cover the box base and the box cover. This seal seal is made of a brittle material. If the seal is to be peeled off in order to open the substrate boxes 100, 102, or if the substrate boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are removed. Cut to the side. Therefore, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal.

  The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 that is located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, a tank rail 131 that is connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and is gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out a ball by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and a required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated, for example, to eliminate ball clogging (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as ball clogging in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. In the main control device 110, the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as jackpot lottery, display setting in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device are performed by the MPU 201. Execute.

  Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller only in one direction.

  The RAM 203 stores various areas, counters, flags, a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and a return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201, various flags, counters, I / O, and the like. And a work area (work area) in which values are stored. Note that the RAM 203 is configured so that the backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and the data can be retained (backed up) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is shut off (including when the power failure occurs, the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of power-on (including power-on due to power failure cancellation, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before power-off based on information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by a main process (not shown), and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in a start-up process (not shown) when the power is turned on. Note that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Is input immediately, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 has a payout control device 111, an audio lamp control device 113, first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, a second symbol display device, a second symbol holding lamp, and a lower side of the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 made up of a large opening solenoid for opening and closing the front side and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the MPU 201 via the input / output port 205. Send.

  The input / output port 205 includes a switch group (not shown), various switches 208 including a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115. Are connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, includes a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. And a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the power failure signal SG1 is also input to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball that has been paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball according to the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch a ball. . The ball launch unit 112a includes a launch solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on the condition that the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited corresponding to the amount of rotation (rotation position) of the handle 51, and a ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (lighting units 29 to 33, display lamp 34, etc.) 227, and fluctuating effects (fluctuation). Display) and setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as a notice effect. The MPU 221 that is an arithmetic unit includes a ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 including an address bus and a data bus. Main controller 110, display controller 114, audio output device 226, lamp display device 227, other device 228, frame button 22 and the like are connected to input / output port 225, respectively.

  The sound lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and uses the determined display mode as a command. The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). The sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the player operates the frame button 22, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, or the super reach is performed. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the production contents at the time. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the rear image corresponding to the changed stage is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113.

  Further, the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice corresponding to the display content from the voice output device 226 in accordance with the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display command received from the display control device 114, The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the display contents.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the third symbol display device 81 has a variation effect of the third symbol, etc. The display is controlled. In addition, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the sound lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice from the voice output device 226 in accordance with the display content indicated by the display command, thereby matching the display of the third symbol display device 81 with the voice output from the voice output device 226. be able to.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM deletion switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in the voltage of AC 24 volts supplied from the outside, and drives various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and the 12 volt voltage, the 5 volt voltage, and the backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 as necessary voltages.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) occurs when this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is a drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to device 111.

  Next, a schematic configuration of the operation unit 200 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 5 is a front perspective view of the operation unit 200, and FIG. 6 is an exploded front perspective view of the game board 13 and the operation unit 200. 7 to 14 are front views of the operation unit 200. FIG. 5 to 14, the illustration of the third symbol display device 81 disposed on the back surface of the back case 300 is omitted.

  Here, FIGS. 7 to 10 show a state where the base member 400 is rotated to the first rotation position, and FIGS. 11 to 14 show a state where the base member 400 is rotated to the second rotation position. The

  In this case, in FIGS. 7 and 11, the state in which the liquid crystal display device 523 is disposed in the proximity position with the display surface 523 a facing the front is the posture with the display surface 523 a facing the front in FIGS. 8 and 12. The state in which the liquid crystal display device 523 is arranged at the separated position is illustrated. 9 and 13, the liquid crystal display device 523 is disposed at a close position with the decoration surface 523 b facing forward, and in FIGS. 10 and 14, the decoration surface 523 b is facing forward. A state in which the liquid crystal display device 523 is disposed at the separated position is illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 5 and 6, the operation unit 200 includes a back case 300 formed in a box shape, and the slide unit SL is rotatably accommodated in an internal space of the back case 300.

  The back case 300 includes a bottom wall 301 having a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and an outer wall 302 standing from the outer edges of the four sides of the bottom wall 301 toward the front. It is formed in a box shape with one side (front side) open. An opening 301a is formed at the center of the bottom wall portion 301, and the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) disposed on the back surface of the bottom wall portion 301 is visible through the opening 301a. .

  The slide unit SL includes a base member 400 that is rotatably supported by the bottom wall portion 301 of the back case 300 and a slide mechanism 500 that is disposed on the front side of the base member 400. The slide mechanism 500 includes a pair of liquid crystal display devices 523 formed so as to be slidable in the direction of approaching or separating from each other. It should be noted that the pair of liquid crystal display devices 523 has the speed of the displacement (the rotation about the rotation shaft 523c and the slide displacement accompanying expansion / contraction of the slide rail 510) and the timing of the displacement (start of displacement or stop of displacement). ) Are set (controlled) to be the same.

  The base member 400 is formed to be rotatable between a first rotation position and a second rotation position having a phase difference of approximately 90 ° from the first rotation position. At the first rotational position, the direction of slide displacement of the liquid crystal display device 523 is the vertical direction (vertical direction) (see FIGS. 7 to 10), and at the second rotational position, the direction of slide displacement of the liquid crystal display device 523. Is the left-right direction (horizontal direction) (see FIGS. 11 to 14).

  The liquid crystal display device 523 is formed as a liquid crystal display for displaying symbols and the like, and is rotatably supported, and has a posture in which the display surface 523a faces the front (see FIGS. 7, 8, 11, and 12). ) And a posture (see FIGS. 9, 10, 13, and 14) in which the decorative surface 523 b that is the back side of the display surface 523 a faces the front.

  When the pair of liquid crystal display devices 523 are slid and displaced in the directions approaching each other and arranged at the close positions, the pair of liquid crystal display devices 523 are arranged in front of the third symbol display device 81, so that the third symbol is displayed. While the display device 81 is shielded invisible (see FIGS. 7, 9, 11, and 13), when the pair of liquid crystal display devices 523 is slid and displaced in a direction away from each other, and disposed in the separated position, The pair of liquid crystal display devices 523 is retracted vertically or horizontally from the front of the third symbol display device 81 so that the third symbol display device 81 can be visually recognized (FIGS. 8, 10, 12, and FIG. 14).

  Next, the detailed configuration of the slide unit SL will be described with reference to FIGS. 15 to 43. First, a configuration for rotatably supporting the base member 400 of the slide unit SL with respect to the rear case 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 15 to 23.

  FIG. 15 is an exploded front perspective view of the back case 300 and the slide unit SL, and FIG. 16 is an exploded back perspective view of the back case 300 and the slide unit SL. 17 to 19 are front views of the back case 300 and the base member 400. FIG.

  In FIG. 17, the base member 400 is rotated to the first rotation position, and in FIG. 19, the base member 400 is rotated to the second rotation position. In FIG. 18, the base member 400 is moved to the first rotation position. The transition state when rotating from one rotation position to the second rotation position or vice versa is illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 15 to 19, the rear case 300 includes a rotation driving mechanism for applying a rotation driving force to the base member 400, a first wheel member 321 for rotatably supporting the base member 400, and A second wheel member 322 and covering members 331 to 334 for holding the wheel members 321 and 322 are disposed.

  The rotation drive mechanism includes a drive motor 311, a pinion gear 312 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 311, and a leading gear (first transmission gear 313 a) meshed with the pinion gear 312 and a trailing gear (first gear). 3 transmission gear 313 c) and a transmission gear train meshed with the gear portion 403 of the base member 400, and is disposed on the bottom wall portion 301 of the rear case 300 at the upper right side in front view. A second transmission gear 313b is interposed between the first transmission gear 313a and the third transmission gear 313c.

  The first wheel member 321 and the second wheel member 322 are disk-like members that are rotatably supported on a shaft 303 that is erected from the bottom wall portion 301 of the back case 300, and the outer peripheral edge of the base member 400 A plurality are arranged at predetermined intervals along the. In the front view shown in FIG. 17, the first wheel member 321 is located at two locations below the base member 400, and the second wheel member 322 is located at two locations above the base member 400 and two locations on the left and right. Each is arranged. Here, with reference to FIG. 20, the detailed structure of each wheel member 321,322 is demonstrated.

  20A is a cross-sectional view of the first wheel member 321 taken along the line XXa-XXa of FIG. 17, and FIG. 20B is a cross-sectional view of the second wheel member 322 taken along the line XXb-XXb of FIG. is there.

  As shown in FIGS. 20A and 20B, a brass shaft 303 is fastened and fixed to the bottom wall portion 301 of the back case 300 in a posture protruding toward the front side, and the shaft A first concave portion 301 b 1 and a second concave portion 301 b 2 that are concentric with the shaft 303 and have a circular shape when viewed from the front are provided in the bottom wall portion 301 around the shaft 303.

  The first recess 301b1 and the second recess 301b2 are recesses for receiving and accommodating the first wheel member 321 and the second wheel member 322 rotatably supported by the shaft 303, and the inner diameter of the second recess 301b2 is The outer diameter of the first wheel member 321 is set smaller than the outer diameter of the second wheel member 322. Thereby, the assembly | attachment mistake of the 1st wheel member 321 to the 2nd recessed part 301b2 can be suppressed.

  The first wheel member 321 and the second wheel member 322 are formed as H-shaped members having U-shaped grooves 321a and 322a that are continuous in the circumferential direction, and are formed on the outer surfaces of the grooves 321a and 322a. The outer edge (flange portion 402) of the member 400 is inserted. Accordingly, the base member 400 is rotatably supported by the back surface base 300 while restricting the displacement of the base member 300 in the radial direction (downward direction in FIG. 20A) and in the front-rear direction (in FIG. 20A horizontal direction). it can.

  The first wheel member 321 is formed as a ball bearing in which a plurality of spherical bodies are disposed between an inner ring portion held by the shaft 303 and an outer ring in which the groove 321a is recessed. Thereby, the durability of the first wheel member 321 that supports the load of the base member 400 can be secured, and the output required for the drive motor 311 can be suppressed.

  Further, the second wheel member 322 has an outer diameter of the wall portion located on the front side (left side in FIG. 20B) of the pair of wall portions facing each other across the groove 322a larger than the inner diameter of the recess 301b2. Is done. That is, the outer diameter of the second wheel member 322 is larger in the front wall than in the rear wall. Thereby, the rigidity of the second wheel member 322 can be secured and durability can be improved while suppressing an error in the assembly direction of the second wheel member 322 to the shaft 303.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, a slide mechanism 500 that is relatively heavy is disposed on the front side of the base member 400, and the upper side of the base member 400 that has received the weight of the slide mechanism 500 is tilted forward so that the front side is tilted. Since the second wheel member 322 is disposed above and to the left and right of the base member 400 (see FIG. 17), the outer diameter of the front wall portion of the second wheel member 322 is large as described above. This configuration is particularly effective for suppressing the forward tilt posture of the base member 400 and improving the durability of the second wheel member 322.

  Returning to FIG. 15 to FIG. The covering members 331 to 334 are formed into a shape obtained by dividing a rectangular plate-like body having a circular opening at the center into four parts vertically and horizontally, and are disposed in front of the bottom wall portion 301 of the back case 300. . Thereby, the covering members 331 to 334 are covered on the front side of the first wheel member 321 and the second wheel member 322, and the wheel members 321 and 322 are restricted from coming off the shaft 303.

  The base member 400 is a member formed in a disc shape having an opening 401 having a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front at the center. The base member 400 is formed in a flange shape along the outer edge, and the first wheel member 321 and the second wheel member 321 described above. The flange portion 402 inserted into the grooves 321a and 322a of the wheel member 322, and the last gear (third transmission) cut in the front side and curved in an arc shape along the circumferential direction in the transmission gear train of the rotary drive mechanism A gear portion 403 with which the gear 313c is engaged.

  Therefore, for example, when the drive motor 311 is rotated in the forward direction from the state where the base member 400 is disposed at the first rotation position shown in FIG. 17, and the rotation is transmitted to the transmission gear train via the pinion gear 312. Then, the rotation of the gear (third transmission gear 313c) at the end of the transmission gear train is transmitted to the gear portion 403, and the base member 400 is rotated clockwise when viewed from the front (right rotation direction in FIG. 17). When the drive motor 311 is further rotated in the forward direction, the base member 400 is disposed at the second rotation position shown in FIG. 19 through the state shown in FIG.

  On the other hand, when the drive motor 311 is rotated in the reverse direction from the state where the base member 400 is disposed at the second rotation position shown in FIG. 19, the rotation of the last gear (third transmission gear 313c) of the transmission gear train is caused. By transmitting to the gear part 403, the base member 400 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front (left rotation direction in FIG. 19), and after the state shown in FIG. 18, is arranged at the first rotation position shown in FIG. The

  In this case, the weight of the base member 400 is supported by the outer peripheral surface of the flange portion 402 mainly contacting the groove bottom of the groove 321a of the first wheel member 321. That is, since it is supported by the rolling contact between the circumferential surfaces of the outer peripheral surface of the flange portion 402 and the outer peripheral surface of the groove bottom of the groove 321a, the contact surface is minimized and is supported in a state with little friction. Thereby, the output of the drive motor 311 required in order to rotationally drive the base member 400 can be suppressed.

  Further, since the slide mechanism 500 is disposed (fixed) on the front side of the base member 400, the base member 400 has a first rotational position and a second rotational position with respect to the rear case 300 as described above. As shown in FIGS. 21 to 23, the slide mechanism 500 is rotated along with this rotation. 21 to 23 are front views of the rear case 300 and the slide unit SL. FIG. 21 corresponds to FIG. 17, FIG. 22 corresponds to FIG. 18, and FIG.

  Next, a detailed configuration of the slide mechanism 500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 24 to 43. 24 and 25 are a front perspective view and a front view of the slide unit SL in a state in which the liquid crystal display device 523 is disposed in the proximity position, and FIGS. 26 and 27 are diagrams in which the liquid crystal display device 523 is disposed in the separated position. It is the front perspective view and front view of slide unit SL in the state which was in the state. FIG. 28 is an exploded front perspective view of the slide unit SL, and FIG. 29 is an exploded rear perspective view of the slide unit SL.

  As shown in FIGS. 24 to 29, the slide unit SL includes a base member 400, a cover member 420 disposed on the front side of the base member 400, and a slide rail disposed on the front side of the cover member 420. 510, a slide member 520 disposed on the slide rail 510, and a slide drive mechanism for applying a driving force to the slide member 520 to cause the slide displacement.

  The cover member 420 is a member formed in a disk shape having an opening 421 having a substantially rectangular shape in front view. The opening 421 of the cover member 420 is formed in substantially the same shape as the opening 401 of the base member 400, and the cover member 420 is arranged on the front side of the base member 400 in a phase (rotational position) where the shapes of the openings 401 and 421 overlap. Is disposed (fixed).

  Note that the space formed by the openings 401 and 421 of the base member 400 and the cover member 420 is also used as a space for rotating the liquid crystal display device 523 of the slide member 520. In other words, when the liquid crystal display device 523 of the slide member 520 is disposed at the close position, the liquid crystal display device 523 is disposed at a position overlapping the openings 401 and 421 in front view, and can rotate without interfering with the cover member 420.

  Here, the detailed configuration of the slide drive mechanism will be described with reference to FIGS. 30 to 35 in addition to FIGS. 30, FIG. 32, and FIG. 34 are front views of the cover member 420 and the slide drive mechanism, and FIGS. 31, 33, and 35 are rear views of the cover member 420 and the slide drive mechanism.

  30 and 31, the state where the transmission arm 437 is disposed at the inward projecting position, which is a position for disposing the slide member 520 at the close position, is illustrated in FIGS. 34 and 35, in which the slide member 520 is separated. In FIG. 32 and FIG. 32, the state where the transmission arm 437 is disposed at the outward inversion position, which is a position for disposing at the position, is rotated from the inward protruding position to the outward inversion position or vice versa. The transition states when being performed are respectively illustrated. 30 to 35 schematically show the connection frame 524 of the slide member 520 using a two-dot chain line in order to show the positional relationship with the transmission arm 437 and facilitate understanding.

  In the slide mechanism 500 of the present embodiment, a pair of slide members 520 and a pair of slide drive mechanisms for slidingly driving the slide members 520 are disposed. Therefore, the same reference numerals are given to both, and only one of them will be described, and the description of the other will be omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 28 to 35, the slide drive mechanism includes a drive motor 431 disposed on the front side of the cover member 420, a pinion gear 432 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 431, and the pinion gear 432. A transmission gear 433 to be engaged, a rack gear 434 a to which the transmission gear 433 is engaged are engraved on the outer peripheral side and formed into a curved plate shape, and an inner peripheral side of the rack member 434 A transmission gear 435 meshed with a rack gear 434b carved in the base, a pair of arm drive gears 436 rotated in opposite directions by the transmission gear 435, and a base end side fixed to the pair of arm drive gears 436. A pair of transmission arms 437.

  Therefore, for example, the drive motor 431 rotates in the forward direction from the state in which the transmission arm 437 is disposed at the inwardly protruding position shown in FIGS. 30 and 31 (the position where the tip end is directed to the opening 421 side of the cover member 420). When the rotation is transmitted to the rack gear 434 a of the rack member 434 via the pinion gear 432 and the transmission gear 433, the rack member 434 is displaced along the circumferential direction of the cover member 420.

  When the rack member 434 is displaced in the circumferential direction, the displacement of the rack member 434 is transmitted to the transmission gear 435 via the rack gear 434b, and the pair of arm drive gears 436 are respectively rotated, whereby a pair of transmissions are transmitted. The arms 437 are rotated in opposite directions around the base end side.

  When the drive motor 431 is further rotated in the forward direction, the pair of transmission arms 437 pass through the state shown in FIGS. 32 and 33, and the outward inversion position shown in FIGS. 34 and 35 (approximately 180 from the inward inversion position). And the tip end side of the cover member 420 is disposed on the opposite side of the opening 421).

  On the other hand, the drive motor 431 is rotated in the reverse direction from the state in which the transmission arm 437 is disposed at the outward reversal position shown in FIGS. 34 and 35, and the rotation of the rack 434 via the pinion gear 432 and the transmission gear 433. When transmitted to the rack gear 434 a, the rack member 434 is displaced along the circumferential direction of the cover member 420.

  When the rack member 434 is displaced in the circumferential direction, the displacement of the rack member 434 is transmitted to the transmission gear 435 via the rack gear 434b, and the pair of arm drive gears 436 are respectively rotated, whereby a pair of transmissions are transmitted. The arms 437 are rotated in opposite directions around the base end side. When the drive motor 431 is further rotated in the reverse direction, the pair of transmission arms 437 are arranged at the inwardly inverted positions shown in FIGS. 30 and 31 through the state shown in FIGS.

  As will be described later, the distal end side of the transmission arm 437 is slidably coupled to the sliding groove 524a in the coupling frame 524 of the slide member 520, and the transmission arm 437 is rotated around the proximal end side. The inner surface of the slide groove 524a in the connecting frame 524 of the slide member 520 is pushed and pulled by the distal end side of the transmission arm 437, and the slide member 520 is slid and displaced (see FIGS. 39 to 41).

  In this case, in the configuration in which the rotational drive force of the drive motor 431 is converted into the slide displacement of the slide member 520 using a linear rack member extending along the slide direction of the slide member 520, If the sliding displacement amount is secured, the linear rack member does not fit within the circular outer shape of the base member 400 and the cover member 420 and interferes with the rear case 300 (outer wall 302). In contrast, it cannot be rotated.

  In order to allow the base member 400 to rotate with respect to the back case 300, when the linear rack member is housed within the circular outer shape of the base member 400 and the cover member 420, the slide displacement amount of the slide member 520 is shortened. In addition, the linear rack member is exposed so as to be visible from the player through the opening 421, and the appearance is impaired.

  On the other hand, a structure in which the arm drive gear 436 is directly driven by the pinion gear 432 of the drive motor 431 is also conceivable. However, in this case, the arrangement position of the drive motor 431 overlaps the movement locus of the slide displacement of the slide member 520, so that the slide The slide displacement amount of the member 520 is shortened.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, the rack member 434 curved in an arc shape is disposed along the circumferential direction on the outer edge side of the cover member 420 (outside the opening 421), and the rotation of the drive motor 431 is performed. The displacement is converted into the rotation of the arm drive gear 436 and the transmission arm 437 is rotated, so that the base member 400 is moved relative to the rear case 300 while ensuring the slide displacement amount of the slide member 520. The appearance of the rack member 434 from the opening 421 can be avoided and the appearance can be improved. In addition, since the drive motor 431 can be disposed outside (on both sides) the locus of the slide displacement of the slide member 520, the slide displacement amount of the slide member 520 can be secured from this point.

  Returning to FIG. The slide rail 510 is an extendable linear guide mechanism interposed between the cover member 420 and the slide member 520, and the slide member 520 is expanded and contracted with respect to the cover member 420. The slide is displaced. In the present embodiment, the slide rail 510 has a pair of pairs that respectively support both ends of the slide member 520 as a pair, and the two sets have different postures of expansion and contraction (that is, the phases are different from each other by 180 °). Opposed.

  Here, the detailed configuration of the slide rail 510 and the slide member 520 will be described with reference to FIGS. 36 is an exploded front perspective view of the slide rail 510 and the slide member 520, and FIGS. 37 and 38 are exploded rear perspective views of the slide rail 510 and the slide member 520. 36 to 38, the transmission arm 437 is shown for easy understanding.

  In the present embodiment, two sets of the slide rail 510 and the slide member 520 are arranged, and the two sets have a pair of slides in the other set such that an opposing interval of the pair of slide rails 510 in one set is different. Since the configuration is substantially the same except that the interval between the rails 510 is smaller than the facing interval, both are denoted by the same reference numerals and only one of them will be described, and the description of the other will be omitted. In addition, by providing a difference in the above-described facing distance, one set of slide rails 510 can be disposed between the facing of the other set of slide rails 510.

  As shown in FIGS. 36 to 38, the slide rail 510 is connected to a base end rail 511 disposed on the front surface of the cover member 420 so that relative displacement in the longitudinal direction is possible on the front side of the base end rail 511. An intermediate rail 512 and a front end rail 513 connected to the front side of the intermediate rail 512 so as to be capable of relative displacement in the longitudinal direction. That is, the proximal rail 511 and the distal rail 513 can be displaced relative to each other in the longitudinal direction via the intermediate rail 512.

  The slide member 520 includes a one-side guided member 521 and another-side guided member 522 in which the front end rails 512 of the pair of slide rails 510 are respectively disposed on the back side, and the one-side guided member 521 and the other-side guided member. A liquid crystal display device 523 rotatably supported between the members 522, a connection frame 524 that connects the one-side guided member 521 and the other-side guided member 522, and a liquid crystal display device 523 that is disposed on the connection frame 524. And a facing member 525 disposed to face each other.

  The one-side guided member 521 is divided into a rail-side member 521a in which the front end rail 513 of the slide rail 510 is disposed and a liquid crystal side member 521b that rotatably supports the liquid crystal display device 523, and these rail side members 521a and the liquid crystal side member 521b are connected so that relative displacement is possible.

  Specifically, the insertion holes 521a1 having a circular cross section are formed at two positions on the rail side member 521a, and a pair of columnar insertion pins 521b1 that are respectively inserted into the two insertion holes 521a1 from the liquid crystal side member 521b. Projected. The inter-axis distance between the insertion holes 521a1 is the same as the inter-axis distance between the insertion pins 521b1, and the inner diameter of the insertion hole 521a1 is larger than the outer diameter of the insertion pin 521b1.

  In this case, the axial directions of the insertion hole 521a1 and the insertion pin 521b1 are orthogonal to the sliding direction of the slide rail 510 and parallel to the slide plane of the slide rail 510. Therefore, a predetermined gap is formed over the entire circumference between the insertion hole 521a1 and the insertion pin 521b1, and the both can be displaced relative to each other in any direction (the direction perpendicular to both axes). it can.

  A washer W having a diameter larger than the inner diameter of the insertion hole 521a1 is fastened and fixed to the tip of the insertion pin 521b1, and the insertion pin 521b1 is prevented from coming off from the insertion hole 521a1.

  In this case, the thickness dimension of the plate-like portion where the insertion hole 521a1 of the rail side member 521a is drilled is set to be smaller than the projecting dimension of the insertion pin 521b1. Thereby, the rail side member 521a can be relatively displaced with respect to the direction along the axial direction of the insertion hole 521a1 and the insertion pin 521b1 with respect to the liquid crystal side member 521b.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, the liquid crystal side member 521b and the liquid crystal display device 523 can be inclined with respect to the rail side member 521a with the other guided member 522 side serving as a fulcrum. For example, the liquid crystal side member 521b precedes the rail-side member 521a in the direction of slide displacement, and the interval between them increases on the front side in the slide displacement direction (smaller on the rear side in the slide displacement direction). Relative displacement in form can be tolerated. As a result, as will be described later, it is possible to easily suppress the liquid crystal display device 523 from being slid and displaced by an inertial force when the liquid crystal display device 523 is rotationally driven.

  The liquid crystal display device 523 is a rectangular plate-like body when viewed from the front. As described above, the liquid crystal display device 523 is formed as a liquid crystal display, and one side is a display surface 523a capable of displaying a design and the like, and the opposite side to the one side. The other side is a decorative surface 523b with decoration.

  In this case, the liquid crystal display device 523 is provided with columnar rotation shafts 523c protruding from both ends in the longitudinal direction, and each rotation shaft 523c is provided with one side guided member 521 (liquid crystal side member 521b) and the other side guided member. It is rotatably supported by shaft support holes 521b2 and 522c of 522, respectively. That is, the liquid crystal display device 523 is rotatably supported by the one-side guided member 521 and the other-side guided member 522 through the rotation shaft 523c and the shaft support holes 521b2 and 522c, and the display surface 523a is rotated by the rotation. It is possible to form a posture with the face facing the front side (player side) and a posture with the decorative surface 523b facing the front side.

  Note that the axis of the rotation shaft 523c is arranged at the center in the width direction and the center in the thickness direction of the liquid crystal display device 523. In this case, since the liquid crystal display device 523 is provided with a liquid crystal display, the display surface 523a side is made heavier than the decorative surface 523b side. Further, due to the components of the liquid crystal display and the asymmetric shape of the decorative surface 523b, the position of the center of gravity of the liquid crystal display device 523 is decentered from the axis of the rotation shaft 523c at least toward the display surface 523a. Therefore, an inertial force accompanying the start or stop of the rotation of the liquid crystal display device 523 is likely to occur.

  Further, the liquid crystal display device 523 is rotationally driven by a rotational driving mechanism disposed on the liquid crystal side member 521b of the one side guided member 521. The rotational drive mechanism includes a drive motor 531, a pinion gear 532 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 531, a first gear 533 meshed with the pinion gear 532, and meshed with the first gear 533. A second gear 534 fixed to the liquid crystal display device 523, and the rotational driving force of the drive motor 531 is transmitted to the liquid crystal display device 523 through the gears 532 to 534 to rotate the liquid crystal display device 523. .

  The rotation drive mechanism sets (controls) the pair of liquid crystal display devices 523 so that their displacement (rotation) speed and displacement (rotation) timing (start of rotation or stop of rotation) are the same. Is done.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the rotation axis of the liquid crystal display device 523 is set to the center in the width direction and the center in the thickness direction of the liquid crystal display device 523. Therefore, the facing distance between the liquid crystal display device 523 and the facing member 525 is constant even when the liquid crystal display device 523 is in a posture in which either the display surface 523a or the decorative surface 523b faces the front.

  The connecting frame 524 is provided with a sliding groove 524a extending linearly along a direction orthogonal to the sliding direction of the slide rail 510, and the distal end side of the transmission arm 437 slides in the sliding groove 524a. Inserted as possible. Since the connection frame 524 is disposed on the one-side guided member 521 (liquid crystal side member 521b) and the other-side guided member 522, the transmission arm 437 is rotated by the above-described slide drive mechanism, and the tip side thereof is a sliding groove. When slid along 524a, the entire slide member 520 is slid.

  The connection frame 524 connects the one-side guided member 521 (the liquid crystal side member 521b) and the other side guided member 522, so that the entire liquid crystal side member 521b, the liquid crystal display device 523, and the other side member 522 are connected. As the rigidity can be increased. Thereby, the facing distance between the liquid crystal side member 521b and the other side member 522 can be easily maintained, and the liquid crystal display device 523 can be easily rotated. Further, as will be described later, it is possible to easily suppress the liquid crystal display device 523 from being slid and displaced by an inertial force when the liquid crystal display device 523 is rotationally driven.

  The facing member 525 is a plate-like member erected from the front surface of the connection frame, and has a predetermined distance (a surface connecting the display surface 523a and the decorative surface 523b) to the liquid crystal display device 523 (the surface of the liquid crystal display device 523). (The interval allowing rotation). In addition, the opposing member 525 is provided with a plurality of LEDs (production means) and is formed so as to be able to emit light toward the side surface of the liquid crystal display device 523. Therefore, it is possible to produce an effect in which the player can visually recognize the light emitted from the LED and reflected by the side surface of the liquid crystal display device 523 from between the facing member 525 and the liquid crystal display device 523.

  A structure in which the slide member 520 configured as described above is slid by the slide drive mechanism (transmission arm 437) will be described. 39 (a), 40 (a), and 41 (a) are front views of the slide member 520, and FIGS. 39 (b), 40 (b), and 41 (b) are slide members 520. FIG.

  39, the state in which the liquid crystal display device 523 is disposed at the proximity position is illustrated in FIG. 41, the state in which the liquid crystal display device 523 is disposed at the separation position in FIG. 41, and the liquid crystal display device 523 is illustrated in FIG. The transition states when slidingly displaced to the separated position or vice versa are respectively illustrated. 39 corresponds to the state illustrated in FIGS. 30 and 31, FIG. 40 corresponds to the state illustrated in FIGS. 32 and 33, and FIG. 41 corresponds to the state illustrated in FIGS.

  Here, as described above, the pair of liquid crystal display devices 523 have the same speed of displacement (slide displacement accompanying expansion and contraction of the slide rail 510) and timing of displacement (start of displacement or stop of displacement). Is set (controlled) as follows. Therefore, only one liquid crystal display device 523 will be described, and the description of the other liquid crystal display device 523 will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 39, in a state where the pair of transmission arms 437 are arranged at the inwardly projecting positions (see FIGS. 30 and 31), the slide rail 510 is shortened, and the liquid crystal display device 523 is in the proximity position. Placed in. In this state, when the pair of transmission arms 437 are rotated in opposite directions around the base end side, the distal end side of the transmission arm 437 slides along the sliding groove 524a of the connection frame 524, so that the liquid crystal display The device 523 is slid and displaced in the direction in which the slide rail 510 is extended.

  When the pair of transmission arms 437 is further rotated and the pair of transmission arms 437 are disposed at the outward inversion position as shown in FIG. 41 through the state shown in FIG. 40 (see FIGS. 34 and 35). The slide rail 510 is in an extended state, and the liquid crystal display device 523 is disposed at the separated position.

  On the other hand, from the state shown in FIG. 41, when the pair of transmission arms 437 is rotated in the opposite direction to that described above, the distal end side of the transmission arms 437 slides along the sliding groove 524a of the connecting frame 524. The liquid crystal display device 523 is slid and displaced in the direction of shortening the slide rail 510. When the pair of transmission arms 437 are further rotated and the pair of transmission arms 437 are disposed at the inwardly protruding positions as shown in FIG. 39 through the state shown in FIG. 40, the slide rail 510 is shortened. The liquid crystal display device 523 is placed in the proximity position.

  FIG. 42A is a reference diagram, and FIG. 42B is a schematic front view schematically showing the slide mechanism 500.

  In this embodiment, the one-side guided member 521 is composed of two parts, a rail-side member 521a and a liquid crystal-side member 521b, which are connected so as to be relatively displaceable. FIG. 42 (a) is a reference diagram. 1 (hereinafter referred to as “reference structure”), the one-side guided member X is formed as an integral part (one part). Other configurations of the reference structure are the same as in the case of the present embodiment, so the same reference numerals are given and description thereof is omitted.

  In this embodiment, the slide member 520 is formed to be slidable by expansion and contraction of the slide rail 510, and the slide member 520 rotates between the one side guided member 521 and the other side guided member 522 and between them. The liquid crystal display device 523 is pivotally supported. Therefore, the liquid crystal display device 523 can be rotated as well as slidable, and the variation of the rendering operation can be increased. That is, not only the display surface 523a of the liquid crystal display device 523 but also the decorative surface 523b can be visually recognized by the player.

  However, in this case, in the reference structure shown in FIG. 42A, when the liquid crystal display device 523 is rotated with respect to the one-side guided member X and the other-side guided member 522, the rotation is started or stopped. The accompanying inertial force is parallel to the direction of the slide displacement, and the slide members (the one-side guided member X, the other-side guided member 522, and the liquid crystal display device 523) on which the inertial force is applied cause the slide rail 510 to expand and contract. The slide will be displaced. That is, it is difficult to rotate the liquid crystal display device 523 while stopping at a predetermined position in the slide displacement direction (vertical direction in FIG. 42A).

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the one-side guided member 521 is formed of two parts, that is, the rail-side member 521a and the liquid crystal-side member 521b, and both the members 521a and 521b are connected so as to be relatively displaceable. The allowable amount of relative displacement of the liquid crystal display device 523 with respect to the slide rail 510 on the side (FIG. 42 (b) right side) disposed on the side guided member 521 and the side disposed on the other side guided member 522 (FIG. The allowable amount of relative displacement of the liquid crystal display device 523 with respect to the slide rail 510 on the left side 42 (b) can be made different.

  Thereby, when the inertial force accompanying the start or stop of the rotation of the liquid crystal display device 523 is applied, the one side guided member 521 (liquid crystal side member 521b) side of the liquid crystal display device 523 is moved to the other side displaced member. The liquid crystal display device 523 can have a displacement component in a direction (left direction in FIG. 42B) orthogonal to the direction of slide displacement (FIG. 42B vertical direction). . Therefore, the displacement component in the direction orthogonal to the direction of the slide displacement can be used as a force (braking force) that presses against the slide rail 510 (that is, the slide rail 510 is restricted from expanding and contracting), so the slide member The slide displacement of 520 can be suppressed. That is, the liquid crystal display device 523 can be easily rotated only while stopped at a predetermined position in the slide displacement direction (vertical direction in FIG. 42B).

  In this case, in this embodiment, the relative displacement of the liquid crystal display device 523 with respect to the slide rail 510 on the side (right side in FIG. 42B) disposed on the one-side guided member 521 is arranged on the other-side guided member 522. A configuration in which the relative displacement of the liquid crystal display device 523 with respect to the slide rail 510 on the installed side (left side in FIG. 42B) is more easily allowed, and the one-side guided member 521 in a form in which such relative displacement is easily allowed. The liquid crystal side member 521b is provided with a rotation drive means (drive motor 531 and gears 532 to 534) (see FIG. 38). That is, the one side guided member 521 (liquid crystal side member 521b) side of the liquid crystal display device 523 can be made heavier than the other side guided member 522 side.

  Therefore, as described above, when the displacement component in the direction orthogonal to the direction of the slide displacement is the force (braking force) that presses against the slide rail 510, the rotational drive mechanism (the drive motor 531 and the gears 532 to 534). The pressing force can be increased by utilizing the rotational inertia (weight) of. As a result, the liquid crystal display device 523 can be easily rotated only while being stopped at a predetermined position in the slide displacement direction.

  In the present embodiment, the drive motor 531 of the rotation drive mechanism is disposed in such a posture that the drive shaft is directed toward the liquid crystal display device 523 and the main body is directed away from the liquid crystal display device 523. The gravity center position of the drive motor 531 can be arranged at a position farther from the other-side guided member 522. That is, the center of gravity of the drive motor 531 can be displaced along a locus farther from the other-side displaced member 522.

  Thereby, when the displacement component in the direction orthogonal to the direction of the slide displacement is a force (braking force) that presses against the slide rail 510, the rotational inertia (weight) of the drive motor 531 can be more easily used, The pressing force can be increased. As a result, the liquid crystal display device 523 can be easily rotated only while being stopped at a predetermined position in the slide displacement direction.

  FIG. 43A is a schematic front view schematically showing the slide mechanism 500 in a state in which the liquid crystal display device 523 is arranged at the separated position, and FIG. 43B is a diagram showing the liquid crystal display device 523 at the close position. It is the front schematic diagram which illustrated typically the slide mechanism 500 in the arrange | positioned state.

  Here, in the above-described reference structure (see FIG. 42 (a)), when the liquid crystal display devices 523 are slid and displaced in the direction in which they are close to each other and are placed in the close positions, the two come into contact with each other without any gaps in the close positions. Then, the load of the slide drive mechanism (the drive motor 431 and the gears 432 and 433, etc., see FIG. 31) for slidably moving the liquid crystal display device 523 increases, resulting in damage to them.

  On the other hand, in order to avoid such damage, allowance is provided at a position where the slide displacement of the liquid crystal display device 523 is stopped in consideration of a dimensional tolerance, an assembly tolerance, or a control tolerance (the liquid crystal display devices 523 are adjacent to each other in the proximity position). If a sufficient gap is set between the two so that the two do not come into contact with each other), the gap becomes larger (the display of the third symbol display device 81 on the back side is visually recognized by the player from the gap), and the appearance (effect effect) Invite the deterioration.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, as described above, the one-side guided member 521 is formed from the two parts of the rail-side member 521a and the liquid crystal-side member 521b, and the two members 521a and 521b are relatively displaced. The slide members 520 formed in this way are arranged to face each other in a staggered posture. That is, the one side guided member 521 in one slide member 520 is the other side guided member 522 in the other slide member 520, and the other side guided member 522 in one slide member 520 is the one side in the other slide member 520. The guided members 521 are arranged to face each other.

  As a result, as shown in FIG. 43 (b), when the liquid crystal display device 523 is brought into contact with each other in the proximity position, the one and other slide members 520 have one When the side guided member 521 is relatively displaced (the liquid crystal side member 521b is retracted with respect to the rail side member 521a), the other side guided member 522 in the other (one and the other) slide member 520 can be received. (One and the other liquid crystal display device 523 can be inclined with respect to the direction of slide displacement, respectively).

  Therefore, even if the liquid crystal display devices 523 come into contact with each other at close positions, damage to the slide drive mechanism (the drive motor 431, the gears 432, 433, etc.) can be suppressed, so the position where the liquid crystal display device 523 is stopped is closer. Can be set to position. As a result, at the proximity position, the liquid crystal display devices 523 can be brought close to each other with a smaller gap therebetween, and the appearance (effect) can be improved accordingly.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the other-side guided member 522 is provided with a detected portion, and a detection sensor for detecting the detected portion is provided in the cover member 420, and the detected portion Is detected by the detection sensor, it is detected that the slide member 520 has been slid to a predetermined position. Therefore, even when the attitude of the liquid crystal display device 523 changes, it is possible to suppress the displacement of the detected member with respect to the cover member 420 (detection sensor). As a result, the position of the slide displacement of the slide member 520 can be detected more accurately.

  Next, a second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 44 to 47. In the first embodiment, the slide mechanism 500 includes two sets of a slide rail 510 and a slide member 520 supported by the slide rail 510 (that is, the two sets have substantially the same configuration as each other). Although the case where the two sets are opposed to each other in a posture facing each other (that is, the phases are different from each other by 180 °) has been described, the slide mechanism 2500 according to the second embodiment has the slide member 520 and the slide member having different configurations. 2520, and the slide members 520 and 2520 are arranged to face each other in a facing posture. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  44 and 45 are schematic front views schematically showing the slide mechanism 2500 according to the second embodiment. FIG. 46 is a reference diagram, and is a schematic front view schematically showing the slide mechanism 500 in the first embodiment. In FIG. 44, the base member 400 is disposed at the first rotation position and the liquid crystal display device 523 is disposed at the separated position. In FIG. 45, the base member 400 is disposed at the first rotation position. In addition, a state where the liquid crystal display device 523 is disposed in the proximity position is illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 44 and 45, on the front side of the cover member 420, as in the case of the first embodiment, two sets of slide rails 510 have different expansion / contraction directions (that is, the phase is 180). ° Different positions).

  In this case, in the slide mechanism 2500 according to the second embodiment, the slide member 510 is disposed on the slide rail 510 of one set (upper side in FIGS. 44 and 45), as in the first embodiment. The slide member 2520 is disposed on the slide rail 510 of the other group (the lower side of FIGS. 44 and 45).

  In the slide member 2520, the arrangement positions of the one-side guided member 521 and the other-side guided member 522 with respect to the liquid crystal display device 523 are reversed with respect to the slide member 520. Therefore, the one-side guided member 521 in one set of slide members 520 is the one-side guided member 521 in the other set of slide members 2520 and the other-side guided member 522 in one set of slide members 520 is: The other set of slide members 2520 are opposed to the other-side guided members 522, respectively.

  That is, in the slide mechanism 2500 according to the second embodiment, one set of slide members 520 and the other set of slide members 2520 have a slide displacement of both the members 520 and 2520 in the plan view shown in FIGS. It is arranged in a posture that is line-symmetric with respect to an imaginary line that is located in the center in the direction of and is perpendicular to the direction of slide displacement.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 46, in the slide mechanism 500 in the first embodiment, as described above, two sets having substantially the same configuration face each other (that is, the phases are different by 180 °). Since one side guided member 521 in one set of slide members 520 is opposed to each other in the posture, the other side guided member 522 in the other set of slide members 2520 and the other side in one set of slide members 520 are arranged. The guided member 522 is disposed opposite to the one-side guided member 521 in the other set of slide members 2520.

  That is, in the slide mechanism 500 according to the first embodiment, one set of slide members 520 and the other set of slide members 520 are in the center in the direction of slide displacement of both the members 520 in the plan view shown in FIG. In addition, it is arranged in a posture that is point-symmetric with respect to a virtual point (that is, the rotation center of the base member 400 and the cover member 420 with respect to the back case 300) located at the center in the direction orthogonal to the direction of the slide displacement. The

  Therefore, in the slide mechanism 500 according to the first embodiment, when an inertial force accompanying the start or stop of the rotation of the liquid crystal display device 523 is applied, the direction is perpendicular to the direction of the slide displacement generated in one set of slide members 520. And the displacement component in the direction perpendicular to the direction of the slide displacement generated in the other set of slide members 520 are in a staggered direction (point-symmetrical direction, and the base member 400 and the cover member 420). Therefore, the base member 400 and the cover member 420 are rotated in the direction of arrow R in FIG. That is, it is difficult to rotate the liquid crystal display device 523 while the base member 400 and the cover member 420 are stopped at a predetermined rotational position with respect to the back case 300.

  On the other hand, according to the slide mechanism 2500 in the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 45, when the inertial force accompanying the start or stop of the rotation of the liquid crystal display device 523 is applied, one set of slides The displacement component in the direction orthogonal to the direction of the slide displacement generated in the member 520 and the displacement component in the direction orthogonal to the direction of the slide displacement generated in the other set of slide members 2520 are in the same direction (a direction that is line-symmetric). ).

  Accordingly, the base member 400 and the cover member 420 do not generate rotational inertia depending on the displacement component, and thus the base member 400 and the cover member 420 can be prevented from rotating with respect to the back case 300. That is, the liquid crystal display device 523 can be rotated while the base member 400 and the cover member 420 are stopped at a predetermined rotational position with respect to the back case 300.

  FIG. 47 is a schematic front view schematically showing the slide mechanism 2500, and shows a state in which the base member 400 is disposed at the second rotation position and the liquid crystal display device 523 is disposed at the proximity position.

  As described above, in the second embodiment, when the base member 400 is disposed at the first rotation position (see FIG. 45), the one-side guided member 521 in one set of slide members 520 and the other set The one-side guided member 521 in the slide member 2520 is disposed on the right side as viewed from the front.

  In this case, the second rotation position of the base member 400 is a position rotated 90 ° clockwise from the first rotation position (clockwise as viewed from the front) (see FIGS. 17 to 19 and FIGS. 21 to 23). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 47, in a state where the base member 400 is disposed at the second rotation position (that is, a state in which the slide displacement direction of the slide members 520 and 2520 is the horizontal direction (left and right direction in FIG. 47)). The one-side guided member 521 in one set of slide members 520 and the one-side guided member 521 in the other set of slide members 2520 are respectively disposed on the lower side in the front view (down in the vertical direction). Can do.

  Thus, in the state where the base member 400 is disposed at the second rotational position shown in FIG. 47, when the inertial force accompanying the start or stop of the slide displacement of the liquid crystal display device 523 is applied, the slide displacement The displacement component in the direction orthogonal to the direction (the displacement component in the direction in which the slide members 520 and 2520 are pressed against the slide rail 510 (the expansion and contraction of the slide rail 510 is restricted)) is vertically upward (the direction opposite to the gravitational direction, FIG. 47 upward direction).

  As a result, when the slide member 520 (liquid crystal display device 523) is slid in the horizontal direction, the action of gravity is canceled or reduced by the displacement component in the above-described direction, and the sliding resistance of the slide rail 510 due to the action of gravity is reduced. As a result, the output of the drive motor 431 (see FIGS. 28 and 29) required for the slide displacement can be suppressed. Further, wear of the slide rail 510 due to the slide displacement can be suppressed.

  Next, a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 48 to 50. In the second embodiment, in a state where the base member 400 is disposed at the second rotation position (a state where the slide members 520 and 2520 are slid in the horizontal direction), the one-side guided member 521 is the other-side guided member 522. However, the one-side guided member 521 of the third embodiment is disposed on the upper side in the vertical direction than the other-side guided member 522. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  48 and 49 are schematic front views schematically showing a slide mechanism 3500 according to the third embodiment. In FIG. 48, the base member 400 is disposed at the first rotational position and the liquid crystal display device 523 is disposed at the separated position. In FIG. 49, the base member 400 is disposed at the first rotational position. In addition, a state where the liquid crystal display device 523 is disposed in the proximity position is illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 48 and 49, the slide mechanism 3500 in the third embodiment is formed by rotating the slide mechanism 2500 in the second embodiment by 180 °. That is, contrary to the second embodiment, the slide member 2520 is disposed on the slide rail 510 of one set (upper side of FIGS. 48 and 49), while the other set (FIGS. 48 and 49). A slide member 520 is disposed on the slide rail 510 on the lower side.

  That is, in the third embodiment, in a state where the base member 400 is disposed at the first rotational position, the one-side guided member 521 in one set of slide members 2520 and the one-side covered member in the other set of slide members 520 are used. A guide member 521 is disposed on the left side of the front view.

  Similarly to the second embodiment, the slide mechanism 3500 according to the third embodiment configured as described above is subjected to an inertial force that is applied when the rotation of the liquid crystal display device 523 starts or stops. The displacement component in the direction orthogonal to the direction of the slide displacement generated in the other set of slide members 2520 and the displacement component in the direction orthogonal to the direction of the slide displacement generated in the other set of slide members 520 are in the same direction (line Symmetric orientation).

  Accordingly, the base member 400 and the cover member 420 do not generate rotational inertia depending on the displacement component, and thus the base member 400 and the cover member 420 can be prevented from rotating with respect to the back case 300. That is, the liquid crystal display device 523 can be rotated while the base member 400 and the cover member 420 are stopped at a predetermined rotational position with respect to the back case 300.

  FIG. 50 is a schematic front view schematically showing the slide mechanism 3500, in which the base member 400 is arranged at the second rotation position and the liquid crystal display device 523 is arranged at the close position.

  As described above, in the third embodiment, when the base member 400 is disposed at the first rotation position (see FIG. 49), the one-side guided member 521 in one set of slide members 2520 and the other set. The one-side guided member 521 in the slide member 520 is disposed on the left side as viewed from the front.

  Therefore, as shown in FIG. 50, in a state in which the base member 400 is disposed at the second rotational position (that is, a state in which the slide displacement direction of the slide members 520 and 2520 is the horizontal direction (left and right direction in FIG. 50)). The one-side guided member 521 in one set of slide members 2520 and the one-side guided member 521 in the other set of slide members 520 can be arranged on the upper side in the front view (upward in the vertical direction), respectively. .

  As a result, in the state where the base member 400 is disposed at the first rotation position shown in FIG. 47, when the inertial force accompanying the start or stop of the rotation of the liquid crystal display device 523 is applied, the slide displacement is reduced. A displacement component in a direction orthogonal to the direction (a displacement component that generates a force (braking force) pressing the slide member 520 against the slide rail 510) can be set to be vertically downward (gravity direction, lower side in FIG. 50). Thereby, when rotating the liquid crystal display device 523, it can suppress that the slide member 520 floats, and the rotation can be stabilized. Moreover, it can suppress that a movable part and a sliding part are damaged by the rattling accompanying lifting.

  In this case, the liquid crystal side member 521b of the one side guided member 521 is provided with a rotation drive means (drive motor 531 and gears 532 to 534) (see FIG. 38). That is, the one side guided member 521 (liquid crystal side member 521b) side of the liquid crystal display device 523 can be made heavier than the other side guided member 522 side.

  Therefore, as described above, when the displacement component in the direction orthogonal to the direction of the slide displacement is the force (braking force) that presses against the slide rail 510, the rotational drive mechanism (the drive motor 531 and the gears 532 to 534). The pressing force can be increased by utilizing the rotational inertia (weight) of. As a result, when the liquid crystal display device 523 is rotated, the slide member 520 can be easily prevented from being lifted, and the rotation can be stabilized. Further, it is possible to easily prevent the movable part and the sliding part from being damaged due to the backlash associated with the lifting.

  Further, the drive motor 531 of the rotation drive mechanism is disposed in such a posture that the drive shaft is directed toward the liquid crystal display device 523 and the main body is directed away from the liquid crystal display device 523. Can be arranged at a position farther from the other-side guided member 522. That is, the center of gravity of the drive motor 531 can be displaced along a locus farther from the other-side displaced member 522.

  Thereby, when the displacement component in the direction orthogonal to the direction of the slide displacement is a force (braking force) that presses against the slide rail 510, the rotational inertia (weight) of the drive motor 531 can be more easily used, The pressing force can be increased. As a result, when the liquid crystal display device 523 is rotated, the slide member 520 can be easily prevented from being lifted, and the rotation can be stabilized. Further, it is possible to easily prevent the movable part and the sliding part from being damaged due to the backlash associated with the lifting.

  Next, a fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the first embodiment, the case where the rotation shaft 523c of the liquid crystal display device 523 is disposed in the center in the width direction has been described. However, the rotation shaft 4523c of the fourth embodiment is a position that is eccentric in the width direction of the liquid crystal display device 4523. It is arranged. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 51 is an exploded rear perspective view of the slide rail 510 and the slide member 4520 in the fourth embodiment. FIG. 52A is a schematic front view schematically showing the slide mechanism 4500 in a state where the liquid crystal surface 523a faces the front side, and FIG. 52B shows the decorative surface 523b facing the front side. It is the front schematic diagram which illustrated typically the slide mechanism 4500 in the state. 52A and 52B show a state in which the base member 400 is disposed at the first rotation position and the liquid crystal display device 4523 is disposed at the separation position.

  As shown in FIGS. 51 and 52, the slide mechanism 4500 in the fourth embodiment is provided with columnar rotation shafts 4523c protruding from both ends in the longitudinal direction of the liquid crystal display device 4523, as in the first embodiment. The rotation shaft 4523c is rotatably supported by the shaft support holes 4521b2 and 4522c of the one side guided member 4521 (liquid crystal side member 4521b) and the other side guided member 4522.

  That is, the liquid crystal display device 4523 is rotatably supported by the one side guided member 4521 and the other side guided member 4522 via the rotation shaft 4523c and the shaft support holes 4521b2 and 4522c, and the display surface 523a is rotated by the rotation. It is possible to form a posture with the face facing the front side (player side) and a posture with the decorative surface 523b facing the front side.

  In this case, the rotation shaft 4523c and the shaft support holes 4521b2 and 4522c are separated from the opposing member 525 in the slide displacement direction in comparison with the formation position in the case of the first embodiment (see FIG. 38). Set to position. That is, in the first embodiment, the rotation shaft 523c is arranged at the center in the width direction of the liquid crystal display device 523, whereas the rotation shaft 4523c of the fourth embodiment is arranged in the width direction of the liquid crystal display device 4523 (FIG. ) And FIG. 52 (b) up and down direction).

  In the rotation drive mechanism in the fourth embodiment, the pinion gear 532 and the first gear 533 are compared to the rotation drive mechanism in the first embodiment by the amount that the shaft support hole 4521b is formed away from the pinion gear 532 of the drive motor 531. A third gear 4535 is additionally disposed between the two.

  Here, as described above, the opposing member 525 is provided with a plurality of LEDs on the side surface facing the liquid crystal display device 4523, and the side surfaces (the display surface 523a and the decorative surface 523b) of the liquid crystal display device 4523 are arranged. Light that is emitted from the LED and reflected by the side surface of the liquid crystal display device 4523 from the space between the liquid crystal display device 4523 and the facing member 525 (gap). It is possible to perform an effect that is visually recognized by a person.

  Therefore, if the facing distance (gap) between the liquid crystal display device 4523 and the facing member 525 is narrow, a space (gap) for allowing the light reflected by the side surface of the liquid crystal display device 4523 to pass cannot be secured, and the light is effectively used for the player. Cannot be seen.

  In this case, the interval between the pair of liquid crystal display devices 4523 (FIG. 52 (a) vertical interval) is the third symbol display through the openings 401 and 421 of the base member 400 and the cover member 420 from the opposite interval. Since the player can visually recognize the device 81, it is preferable that the device 81 can be secured to the maximum. On the other hand, the interval between the pair of opposing members 525 (the vertical interval in FIG. 52 (a)) must be a size that can be accommodated between the opposing outer wall portions 302 of the rear case 300 (ie, the vertical space in FIG. 52A). It cannot be expanded.

  Therefore, when the interval between the pair of liquid crystal display devices 4523 is increased and an interval for visually recognizing the third symbol display device 81 is ensured between the opposing portions, the liquid crystal display device 4523 and the opposing member 525 (LED) are opposed to each other. Since the gap (gap) is reduced, it is difficult to secure a gap for irradiation, reflection, or passage of light from the LED. On the other hand, in order to secure such a gap, the gap between the pair of liquid crystal display devices 4523 is narrowed. Then, it becomes difficult to secure an interval for visually recognizing the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the formation positions of the rotation shaft 4523c and the shaft support holes 4521b2 and 4522c are eccentrically positioned on one side of the slide displacement direction, and accordingly, according to the rotation position of the liquid crystal display device 4523. The interval (gap) between the facing of the liquid crystal display device 4523 and the facing member 525 can be increased or decreased.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 52A, the distance between the liquid crystal display device 4523 and the facing member 525 can be reduced by rotating the liquid crystal display device 4523 so that the display surface 523a faces the front side. . Accordingly, the facing distance between the pair of liquid crystal display devices 4523 (that is, the amount of projection of the liquid crystal display device 4523 to the front of the third symbol display device 81) can be reduced, and as a result, the player can A viewable area for visually recognizing 81 can be secured.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 52B, by rotating the liquid crystal display device 4523 and setting the decorative surface 523b to the front side, the facing distance between the liquid crystal display device 4523 and the facing member 525 can be increased. . Therefore, a space (gap) through which light irradiated from the LED of the facing member 525 and reflected by the side surface of the liquid crystal display device 4523 can be secured. As a result, the space between the liquid crystal display device 4523 and the facing member 525 (gap). Therefore, it is possible to effectively produce an effect that is visually recognized by the player.

  Further, in order to increase the facing distance between the liquid crystal display device 4523 and the facing member 525, it is necessary to dispose the facing member 525 at a position away from the liquid crystal display device 4523 (that is, increase the distance between the pair of facing members 525). Therefore, the slide mechanism 4500 can be downsized. That is, the slide mechanism 4500 can be accommodated between the opposing outer wall portions 302 of the back case 300, and the visibility of the third symbol display device 81 and the effect produced by the light emitted from the LEDs are compatible. Can do.

  Next, a method for suppressing the driving force required for the rotation when the base member 400 is rotated from the first rotation position to the second rotation position or vice versa will be described.

  53 (a) and 53 (b) are schematic front views of the slide mechanism 4500 showing a transition state when the base member 400 is rotated from the first rotation position to the second rotation position.

  When the base member 400 is rotated from the first rotation position to the second rotation position, as shown in FIG. 53A, in order to avoid interference with the back case 300, the pair of liquid crystal display devices 4523 are moved to the proximity position. To place. In this case, the liquid crystal display device 4523 on one side (upper side, upper side in FIG. 53 (a)) has a posture in which the display surface 523a faces the front side, while the other (lower side, lower side in FIG. 53 (a)). The liquid crystal display device 4523 has a posture in which the decorative surface 523b is directed to the front side.

  As a result, the entire pair of liquid crystal display devices 4523 can be arranged at positions eccentric to the upper side of the center in the vertical direction, and accordingly, the position of the center of gravity G is positioned above the rotation center of the base member 400. Can be made.

  Therefore, the base member 400 is rotated 90 ° clockwise when viewed from the front (FIG. 53 (a) clockwise) from the first rotational position shown in FIG. 53 (a) to the second rotational position shown in FIG. 53 (b). When rotating to the center, the movement trajectory of the center of gravity G (illustrated by a broken arrow in FIG. 53B) can be used as a trajectory moving downward (in the direction of gravity).

  Therefore, when the rotation of the base member 400 from the first rotation position is started, the force in the gravity direction (downward) acting on the gravity center G can be applied as a force in the direction of rotating the base member 400, The base member 400 can be rotated by its own weight. As a result, the output of the drive motor 311 (see FIGS. 15 and 16) required for the rotation of the base member 400 from the first rotation position to the second rotation position can be suppressed.

  54 (a) and 54 (b) are schematic front views of the slide mechanism 4500 showing a transition state when the base member 400 is rotated from the second rotation position to the first rotation position.

  When the base member 400 is rotated from the second rotation position to the first rotation position, as shown in FIG. 54A, in order to avoid interference with the back case 300, the pair of liquid crystal display devices 4523 are moved to the proximity position. To place. In this case, the liquid crystal display device 4523 on one side (the side that moves in the direction of gravity with the rotation to the first rotation position, the left side in FIG. 54 (a)) has the display surface 523a facing the front side, The liquid crystal display device 4523 on the other side (the side that moves to the side opposite to the direction of gravity with the rotation to the first rotation position, the right side in FIG. 54A) assumes a posture with the decorative surface 523b facing the front side.

  As a result, the entire pair of liquid crystal display devices 4523 (that is, the position of the center of gravity G) is a position away from the center of rotation of the base member 400 and a position that is eccentric to the side that moves in the direction of gravity with the subsequent rotation ( It can arrange | position to Fig.54 (a) left side.

  Therefore, the base member 400 is rotated 90 ° counterclockwise (FIG. 54 (a) counterclockwise) when viewed from the front, and from the second rotation position shown in FIG. 54 (a), the first rotation shown in FIG. 54 (b). When rotating to a position, the movement trajectory of the center of gravity G (illustrated by a broken line arrow in FIG. 54B) can be used as a trajectory moving downward (gravity direction).

  Therefore, when the rotation of the base member 400 from the second rotation position is started, the force in the gravity direction (downward) acting on the gravity center G can be applied as a force in the direction of rotating the base member 400, The base member 400 can be rotated by its own weight. As a result, the output of the drive motor 311 (see FIGS. 15 and 16) required for the rotation of the base member 400 from the second rotation position to the first rotation position can be suppressed.

  Next, a fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 55 to 57. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 55A is a partially enlarged front perspective view of the game board 13 in the fifth embodiment, and FIG. 55B is a partially enlarged front view of the game board 13. 56 is a partial enlarged cross-sectional view of the game board 13 taken along the line LVI-LVI in FIG. 55 (b), and FIG. 57 is a partial enlarged cross-sectional view of the game board 13 taken along the line LVII-LVII in FIG. 56 (b). FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 55 to 57, the game board 13 is provided with a passage member 5600 that is formed of a resin material and forms a passage through which game balls flow down. The passage member 5600 has a rolling plate 5610 extending in the width direction of the game board 13 (FIG. 55 (b) left-right direction), and the front side of the rolling plate 5610 (55 (b) on the front side of the page). The front wall portion 5620 to be disposed, the back wall portion 5630 disposed on the back side of the rolling plate 5610 (FIG. 55 (b) the back side of the paper surface), and a part of the back wall portion 5630 on the back side. It mainly includes an overhanging wall portion 5640 formed by overhanging.

  The rolling plate 5610 is a member whose upper surface serves as a rolling surface of the game ball, and includes a first part formed by being inclined downward from an end in the width direction of the game board 13, and the first part of the rolling part 5610. A rolling surface having a W-shape when viewed from the front is formed from the second portion that is inclined upward from the end on the downward inclination side toward the center in the width direction of the game board 13.

  The upper surface (rolling surface) of the rolling plate 5610 is recessed in the connecting portion between the first portion and the second portion, and descends toward the front side (Fig. 55 (b) the front side of the paper surface). A recessed portion 5611 which is inclined and a recessed portion 5612 which is recessed at the uppermost portion of the second portion and which is inclined downward toward the back surface side (FIG. 55B, the back side of the paper surface) are disposed.

  The front wall portion 5620 is erected above the upper surface (rolling surface) of the rolling plate 5610, and prevents the game ball from dropping from the upper surface of the rolling plate 5610. However, the front wall portion 5620 is notched at a portion corresponding to the concave portion 5611 of the rolling plate 5610, and the game ball received in the concave portion 5611 can be dropped.

  The overhanging wall portion 5640 is a member for forming a passage for allowing a game ball rolling on the upper surface side of the rolling plate 5610 to flow out from the lower surface side of the rolling plate 5610 to the game area. A game ball that rolls on the plate 5610 and is received in the recess 5612 is received in the overhanging wall portion 5640.

  Here, the operation unit 200 is disposed on the back side of the game board 13. Therefore, when the overhanging wall portion 5640 is projected from the back side of the game board 13 as in the present embodiment, the operation unit 200 (slide unit SL) is used in order to avoid interference with the overhanging wall portion 5640. ) Is limited, and its effect is hindered.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, the overhanging wall portion 5640 is formed in a U-shaped cross section (see FIG. 57), and the width dimension between the inner wall surfaces (the dimension in the left-right direction in FIG. 57) is larger than the diameter of the game ball. Is set to a slightly larger dimension, while the depth dimension (the vertical dimension in FIG. 57) from the front surface to the inner wall surface of the back wall portion 5630 is made smaller than the diameter of the game ball.

  In this case, the overhanging wall portion 5640 is chamfered (cut) by a virtual plane parallel to the back wall portion 5630 in the arcuate cross section in the overhanging direction (right side of FIG. 56, upper side of FIG. 57), In the chamfered portion, an opening portion 5641 whose opening size is set to a size smaller than the diameter of the game ball is formed.

  In other words, the game ball can pass (flow down) through the passage formed by the overhanging wall portion 5640 in a state where a part of the game ball protrudes from the opening 5541 to the outside, so that the entire game ball can be Compared with the case where the overhanging wall portion 640 is formed in a size surrounding the side, the overhanging dimension L1 of the overhanging wall portion 5640 to the back side can be suppressed. Accordingly, it is possible to secure the space for disposing the operation unit 200 and the movable range of the slide unit SL accordingly.

  Next, a sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 58 is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the passage member 6600 in the sixth embodiment, and corresponds to FIG. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 58, the overhanging wall portion 6640 in the sixth embodiment includes a pair of wall portions erected from the back wall portion 5630, and a wall portion that connects the erected tips of the pair of wall portions. The opening 6641 is formed in the wall on the protruding tip side (upper side in FIG. 58) in the U-shaped cross section.

  The opening 6641 is formed in such a form that its width dimension (dimension in the left-right direction in FIG. 58) decreases as it goes from the inner wall surface side to the outer wall surface side of the overhanging wall portion 6640. That is, the overhanging wall portion 6640 has an inner peripheral surface formed as an inclined surface. Thereby, the protrusionable amount by which a part of the game ball protrudes from the opening 6641 to the outside is enlarged, and the overhang dimension L2 of the overhanging wall portion 5640 can be suppressed. The rigidity of the overhanging wall portion 6640 can be secured by maximizing the thickness dimension at the portion to be formed.

  In this case, in this embodiment, the width dimension W of the opening 6641 in the inner wall surface of the overhanging wall portion 6640 is set to be smaller than the diameter of the game ball, and the inner wall surface and the opening of the overhanging wall portion 5640 are opened. The angle of the inclined surface (the inner peripheral surface of the opening 6641) is set so that the ridge line portion S with the inner peripheral surface of the portion 5641 comes into contact with the game ball. This prevents the object from being received on the tip side of the inclined surface (inner peripheral surface of the opening 6641) while securing a projectable amount that allows a part of the game ball to protrude from the opening 6641 to the outside ( That is, the game ball is received by the ridge line portion S having relatively high rigidity), and damage to the overhanging wall portion 6640 (periphery of the opening 6641) can be suppressed.

  Next, a seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 59A is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of a passage member 7600 in the seventh embodiment, and FIG. 59B is a cross-sectional view of the passage member 7600 taken along the line LIXb-LIXb in FIG. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 59 (a) and 59 (b), the passage member 7600 in the seventh embodiment includes a front wall portion 7651, a rear wall portion 7852 arranged to face the front wall portion 7651, and the front surfaces thereof. And a side wall portion 7653 disposed on both sides of the wall portion 7651 and the back surface wall portion 7652, and a passage for allowing the game ball to flow down is formed by a space having a substantially rectangular cross section surrounded by the wall portions 7651 to 7653. .

  Here, the passage member 7600 projects a part of the front wall portion 7651 and the rear wall portion 7651 (the front inner peripheral wall portion 7651a and the rear outer peripheral wall portion 7652a) toward the rear wall portion, so that the front inner peripheral walls thereof. A bent passage is formed by the portion 7651a and the rear outer peripheral wall portion 7852a. That is, the inner peripheral side of the passage where the front inner peripheral wall portion 7651a is bent, and the outer peripheral side of the path where the rear outer peripheral wall portion 7652a is bent are formed.

  In this case, in this embodiment, an opening 7654 is formed in the front inner peripheral wall portion 7651a that is the inner peripheral side of the bent passage. That is, the opening 7654 is formed on the wall surface opposite to the direction of the centrifugal force acting on the game ball when passing through the bent passage (right direction in FIG. 59 (a)). Since the opening 7654 is formed substantially the same as the opening 6641 in the sixth embodiment, the description thereof is omitted.

  Therefore, according to the present embodiment, by projecting a part of the game ball to the outside from the opening 7654, not only can the overhang dimension L3 of the rear outer peripheral wall portion 7852a be suppressed, but also the damage and wear of the passage member 7600 can be suppressed. It can be done easily.

  That is, since the opening 7654 is formed on the wall surface opposite to the direction of the centrifugal force acting on the game ball when passing through the bent passage (right direction in FIG. 59 (a)), it is pressed by the centrifugal force. The game ball can be received by the rear outer peripheral wall portion 7852a which is not formed with the opening 7654 and has relatively high rigidity, and the game ball can be prevented from being pressed against the front inner peripheral wall portion 7651a by centrifugal force. . As a result, it is possible to suppress damage to the front inner peripheral wall portion 7651 and wear at the periphery of the opening portion 7654, which are relatively less rigid due to the opening formation of the opening portion 7654.

  Next, an eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In FIG. 60, the same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 60, the passage member 8600 in the eighth embodiment is similar to the seventh embodiment in that the front wall portion 7651 (front inner peripheral wall portion 7651a) and the rear wall portion 7652 (rear outer peripheral wall portion 7652a). In addition, a bent passage having a substantially rectangular cross section is formed from the side wall portion 7653. In the present embodiment, an opening 8654 is formed in the rear outer peripheral wall portion 7652a. The opening 8654 is formed substantially the same as the opening 6641 in the sixth embodiment, and a description thereof will be omitted.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, by projecting a part of the game ball from the opening 8654 to the outside, it is possible to suppress the overhanging dimension L4 of the rear outer peripheral wall portion 7652a. In this case, in this embodiment, the movable range of the slide unit SL is set to a position that overlaps the range Rg, which is a displacement locus of a part of the game ball protruding from the opening 8654. Accordingly, the movable range of the slide unit SL can be expanded by effectively utilizing the space (range Rg) formed by reducing the overhanging dimension L3 of the rear outer peripheral wall portion 7852a. As a result, it is possible to enhance the effect of the slide unit SL.

  In this case, the passage member 8600 is provided with a first switch 8655 and a second switch 8656 that detect the passage of the game ball on the upstream side and the downstream side of the opening 8654, respectively. Therefore, by monitoring the detection state by the first switch 8655 and the second switch 8656, there is at least no game ball in the passage of the passage member 8600, and thus a part of the game ball protrudes from the opening 8654. It can be grasped that it is not in a state.

  Therefore, based on the detection results of the first switch 8655 and the second switch 8656, the slide unit SL is set to the range Rg only while it is grasped that at least a part of the game ball is not projected from the opening 8654. By controlling so as to be displaced to a position that overlaps, the interference between the slide unit SL and the game ball can be avoided.

  The present invention has been described based on the above embodiment, but the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications can be easily made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be guessed.

  In each of the above embodiments, a gaming machine may be configured by replacing or combining part or all of one embodiment with part or all of another one or more embodiments.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the slide members 520, 2520, and 4520 are slid and displaced by the expansion and contraction of the slide rail 510 has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and a pair of rod-shaped bodies (one side member and the other side) Member) and the one side guided member 521 (rail side member 521a) and the other side guided member 522 are slid along the pair of rod-shaped bodies, so that the slide members 520, 2520, and 4520 are It may be slid.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, a case has been described in which the configuration that enables relative displacement between the rail-side member 521a and the liquid crystal-side member 521b in the one-side guided member 521 is formed from the insertion pin 521b1 and the insertion hole 521a1. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, an elastic body (for example, a flexible material such as rubber or urethane, a metal spring, etc.) is interposed between the rail side member 521a and the liquid crystal side member 521b. In addition, a configuration in which relative displacement is possible with the elastic deformation of the elastic body may be employed.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the position of the center of gravity of the liquid crystal display device 523 is eccentrically located at least on the display surface 523a side from the axis of the rotation shaft 523c has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the center of gravity of the liquid crystal display device 523 may be aligned with the axis of the rotation shaft 523c.

  Further, the position of the center of gravity in the direction along the axis of the rotation shaft 523c (longitudinal direction of the liquid crystal display device 523) may be located at the center in the longitudinal direction of the liquid crystal display device 523, or the longitudinal direction of the liquid crystal display device 523. It may be eccentrically positioned on one side or the other side in the direction. In this case, it is preferable that the position of the center of gravity in the direction along the axis of the rotation shaft 523c is eccentric to the side close to the drive motor 531 of the rotation drive mechanism. This is because the deviation of the center of gravity of the liquid crystal display device 523 can be used as in the case of the weight of the drive motor 531.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the slide members 520, 2520, and 4520 are disposed so as to be slidable via the slide rail 510 with respect to the cover member 420 has been described. Other displacement forms (displacement members) may be provided.

  For example, a pair of rotating bodies that are rotatably supported by the cover member 420 with a rotation axis in the same direction as the rotation direction of the base member 400 with respect to the back case 300 may be provided. In this case, the pair of rotating bodies are arranged point-symmetrically with the rotation axis of the base member 400 with respect to the back case 300 as a symmetry point, and the rotation directions of both are opposite directions. Thereby, the inertia force accompanying the start or stop of rotation of the pair of rotating bodies can be canceled out, and the base member 400 and the cover member 420 can be prevented from rotating with respect to the back case 300. That is, it is possible to make it easy to rotate only the pair of rotating bodies while the base member 400 and the cover member 420 are stopped at a predetermined rotational position with respect to the back case 300.

  In the second embodiment, the case where the rotation drive mechanism (the drive motor 531, the pinion gear 532, the first gear 533, and the second gear 534) is disposed on the liquid crystal side member 521 b of the one-side guided member 521 has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and such a rotational drive mechanism may be disposed on the other-side guided member 521.

  In this case, in a state where the base member 400 is disposed at the second rotation position, when an inertial force is applied as the slide displacement of the liquid crystal display device 523 starts or stops, the liquid crystal display device 523 is activated. It is possible to suppress the displacement component in the direction orthogonal to the direction of the slide displacement from becoming too large due to the rotational inertia. As a result, when the liquid crystal display device 523 is rotated, the slide member 520 (liquid crystal display device 523) is slid in the horizontal direction while suppressing the slide displacement of the liquid crystal display device 523 by the inertia force. In this case, the sliding resistance of the slide rail 510 due to the action of gravity can be reduced, and the output of the drive motor 431 required for slide displacement can be suppressed. Further, wear of the slide rail 510 due to the slide displacement can be suppressed.

  In the fifth to eighth embodiments, the case where the passage members 5600 to 8600 are formed as the passages of the game balls flowing down the game area has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and other members are objects. It is also good. For example, it may be a spherical member used for production outside the game area.

  In the eighth embodiment, the case where the slide unit SL as the displacement member is displaced while the rear surface of the rear outer peripheral wall 7552a is overlapped with the range Rg has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. A part thereof may be displaced to a position where it is inserted from the opening 8654 of the rear outer peripheral wall portion 7652a into the passage member 8600. In this case, the displacement area of the slide unit SL can be expanded to the maximum, and the effect of the effect due to the displacement can be further enhanced. That is, it is possible to displace the displacement member to the front side, and it is possible to give force by bringing it closer to the player.

  In the eighth embodiment, when the slide unit SL is displaced while the back surface of the rear outer peripheral wall 7602a is overlapped with the range Rg, the portion of the slide unit SL that overlaps the rear surface of the rear outer peripheral wall 7652a with the range Rg can be independently displaced. When the interference with the game ball is predicted as a variable structure, the interference with the game ball may be suppressed by displacing only the variable structure. As a result, when the interference with the game ball is predicted, it is not necessary to displace the entire slide unit SL, and it is possible to take measures to quickly suppress the interference with the game ball.

<First control example>
Next, a first control example of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. In the first control example, an over-winning effect is displayed when the game ball is over-winned into the specific winning port 65a. Thereby, the player can easily recognize that he has won an over-winning game during the jackpot game, so that it is possible to provide a game machine that is easy for the player to understand.

  Note that information indicating the number of game balls that have been over-winned may be displayed as an over-winning effect. Thereby, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that allows the player to easily grasp the number of game balls that have won over. Further, the production may be varied according to the number of game balls that have won over. Thereby, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the number of game balls over-winned, so that the interest of the player can be improved.

  In the first control example, as an over-winning effect, an over-winning effect indicating that the degree of expectation is high is easily displayed in accordance with the progress of the round in the jackpot game. That is, the selection ratio of the over-winning effect is different according to the number of rounds in the jackpot game. Thereby, even if the jackpot game becomes a long term, the interest of the player can be improved.

  In the first control example, a character string suggesting a right strike (right strike, right strike, right strike) is arranged and displayed in a circle. Thereby, even when the display screen (the sub liquid crystal display device 523 or the third symbol display device 81) rotates, it is possible to suitably suggest (notify) that the game state is a right-handed game.

  In addition, a display suggesting a right strike may be performed, and a voice suggesting a right strike (for example, a voice “Please make a right strike”) may be output. Thereby, even when the display screen is rotated, it is possible to suitably suggest (notify) that the game state is a right-handed game.

  In the first control example, the sub LED 290 is provided on the decorative surface 523b which is the back side of the display surface 523a of the sub liquid crystal display device 523, and the LED is blinked in synchronization with the blinking display of the sub symbol displayed on the display surface 523a. Configured.

  As a result, even when the sub liquid crystal display device 523 performs a reverse operation and the display surface 523a of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 becomes invisible, the blinking display state of the sub symbol can be grasped by visually recognizing the sub LED. It is possible to provide a game machine that is easy for a player to understand.

  In the first control example, the symbols are displayed across the upper display surface 523a, the lower display surface 523b, and the third symbol display device 81 of the sub liquid crystal display device 523, and the upper display surface 523a and the lower display surface 523b slide. The display position of the symbol can be changed according to the displacement. As a result, the display area of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 and the third symbol display device 81 can be effectively used to produce an effect, and the player's interest can be improved. In addition, even if a part or all of the third symbol display device 81 cannot be visually recognized by the sub liquid crystal display device 523, it is possible to suitably display the effect.

  In the first control example, the upper display surface 523a and the lower display surface 523b of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 are driven up and down (sliding) (that is, the display area is vertically long), and are driven left and right (sliding). ) (That is, when the display area is horizontally long), the display angle and display coordinates of the image data are corrected. As a result, the display area of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 and the third symbol display device 81 can be effectively used to produce an effect, and the player's interest can be improved.

  First, with reference to FIG. 62A, image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the sub liquid crystal display device 523 in this control example will be described.

  In this control example, the third symbol display device 81 and the sub liquid crystal display device 523 are configured to perform display based on one image data. Specifically, image data represented by coordinates (0, 0) to (X, Y3) is used, and image data in the region (0, 0) to (X, Y1) is stored in the sub liquid crystal display device 523. Displayed on the upper display surface 523a, the image data of the region from (0, Y1) to (X, Y2) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the image of the region from (0, Y2) to (X, Y3) The data is displayed on the lower display surface 523a2 of the sub liquid crystal display device 523.

  FIG. 62B is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the effect at the time when the push effect is started. In the push effect, as shown in FIG. 62 (b), the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are slid to the close positions, and a button with “PUSH” characters drawn on the lower display surface 523a2 is displayed. Is displayed. By pressing the frame button 22 while this button is displayed, the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are slid up and down, and the display position of the symbol is changed according to the sliding movement. Production is started (see FIGS. 63 to 65).

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 63 to 65, the effect display in this control example will be described. In this control example, the effect display using the sub liquid crystal display device 523 (upper display surface 523a1, lower display surface 523a2) and the third symbol display device 81 provided on the slide member 520 is executed. Specifically, with respect to the third symbol display device 81, the upper display surface 523a1 of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is directed upward (upward from the viewpoint of FIG. 63), and the lower display surface 523a2 of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is directed downward. By sliding and moving in the downward direction (from the viewpoint of FIG. 63), the display area used for the effect display is enlarged, and the figure (the figure simulating “fish” in FIG. 63) is enlarged using the enlarged display area. An effect display is performed such that the number of symbols is increased or the number of symbols is increased.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to display a variety of patterns in the display area, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game for the player.

  FIG. 63A shows a display area in a state where the sub liquid crystal display device 523 completely covers the third symbol display device 81. As shown in FIG. 63 (a), in this state, the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are slid and moved so that the upper display surface 523a1 has the upper half of the design and the lower half of the design has the lower half. Display control is performed so that the display surface 523a2 displays.

  Even in such a case, display data displayed on each display surface (upper display surface 523a1 and lower display surface 523a2) of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is diverted from display data displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, it is not necessary to separately provide display data for the sub liquid crystal display device, and the data amount can be reduced.

  In this control example, the configuration in which the third symbol display device 81 is completely covered by the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is used. However, other configurations may be used, for example, display on the third symbol display device. Even if the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is moved to any position, the display area in which the information related to the game to be played (for example, the display of the number of reserved memories or the display of abnormality) is displayed can be viewed. Good.

  When the sub liquid crystal display device 523 starts sliding from the state shown in FIG. 63A, the state shifts to the state shown in FIG. FIG. 63B is a diagram showing a state in which the slide movement of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is started from the state shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 63 (b), when the slide movement of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is started, the upper display surface 523a1 slides upward (upward from the viewpoint of FIG. 63 (b)) and moves downward. The display surface 523a2 slides downward (downward from the viewpoint of FIG. 63B). On the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 that have been slid, the same display objects (the upper half and the lower half of the symbol) as shown in FIG. 63A are displayed. This can be realized by moving the display position of the display object in accordance with the amount of movement of each display surface (upper display surface 523a1 and lower display surface 523a2).

  Then, as the sub liquid crystal display device 523 slides, the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 is exposed between the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2. In the third symbol display device 81, the upper half of the display object displayed on the lower display surface 523a2, the display of the symbol corresponding to the lower half of the display object displayed on the upper display surface 523a1, and the third symbol display The symbols displayed on the display surface of the device 81 are displayed. From the front side (viewable side), the lower display surface 523a2 (lower symbol), the upper display surface 523a1 (upper symbol), and the third symbol display device 81 are displayed. Are displayed in the order of the display surfaces (middle symbols).

  In the state shown in FIG. 63 (b), since most of the three symbols (upper symbol, middle symbol, lower symbol) are overlapped, it is clear which symbol is displayed to the player. It is difficult to let them know. In this state, since the symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (the middle symbol) are overlapped so that the symbols are the most difficult to see, what symbol is the last symbol that appears to the player? There is an effect that it is possible to execute the production while expecting, and to prevent the game from getting bored early.

  Next, a state where the slide movement of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 further proceeds from the state shown in FIG. 63B will be described with reference to FIGS. 64A and 64B. FIG. 64A is a diagram illustrating a state in which the slide movement of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 has progressed from the state illustrated in FIG. 63B, and FIG. 64B is illustrated from the state illustrated in FIG. It is a figure which shows the state which the slide movement of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 further advanced.

  64 (a) and 64 (b), as the slide movement of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 proceeds, the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are separated, and the display of the third symbol display device 81 is performed. As the surface is gradually exposed, the entire display area is gradually enlarged. Even in this state, the same display objects (the upper half and the lower half of the symbol) as shown in FIG. 63A are displayed on the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 that have been slid.

  On the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, each symbol is displayed so that the overlap of the upper symbol, the middle symbol, and the lower symbol is gradually reduced. With this configuration, for the display of the upper display 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2, display of display data corresponding to a specific display object (display object displayed from the state of FIG. 63A) is displayed. It is only necessary to execute the control for moving the position in accordance with the slide movement of each display surface, and there is an effect that the load of display control can be reduced.

  In addition, the effect display that gradually reduces the overlap of symbols is simply fixed by actually moving the display surface (upper display 523a1, lower display surface 523a2, display surface of the third symbol display device 81). There is an effect that it is possible to suppress a sense of incongruity given to the player as compared with the case of executing on the display screen.

  In this case, the timing of sliding movement of each display surface (upper display surface 523a1 and lower display surface 523a2) is changed, or the speed of sliding movement is changed. Display control may be executed. Thereby, there exists an effect that a production effect can be heightened more.

  Next, a state where the slide movement of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 further proceeds from the state shown in FIG. 64B will be described with reference to FIGS. 65A and 65B. FIG. 65 (a) is a diagram showing a state in which the slide movement of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 has progressed from the state shown in FIG. 64 (b), and FIG. 65 (b) is from the state shown in FIG. 65 (a). It is a figure which shows the state which the slide movement of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 further advanced.

  When the sub liquid crystal display device 523 slides to the position shown in FIG. 65 (a), a part of the mode showing the numbers attached to the middle symbols displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. start. Further, when the slide movement of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 proceeds and the state shown in FIG. 65B is reached, the upper symbol, the middle symbol, and the lower symbol are completely displayed (each display surface is spaced apart to the maximum). Slid to the position). In this state, when the player visually recognizes the mode indicating the number attached to the middle symbol, the lottery result of the special symbol corresponding to the current display effect can be grasped.

  In this control example, when a specific variation pattern is selected as the variation pattern of the third symbol corresponding to the variation of the special symbol, the effects shown in FIGS. 63 to 65 are executed. Other than that, it may be used. For example, after displaying that the special symbol wins the jackpot in the third symbol, it is used for the technology (so-called probabilistic promotion effect) that uses the effect display to inform whether the current jackpot is a normal jackpot or a promising jackpot May be.

  Next, display contents when the sub liquid crystal display device 523 rotates will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 66 (a) is a diagram showing an aspect when the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are in contact with each other in the vertical direction, and FIG. 66 (b) is a diagram where the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 It is a figure which shows the aspect in the case of contact | abutting to a direction.

  When the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is rotated from the state shown in FIG. 66 (a) to the state shown in FIG. 66 (b), the display position of the display data of the display object displayed on the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is changed to the sub position. By correcting according to the rotation angle of the liquid crystal display device 523, the same display mode as before rotation can be displayed. Even in this case, since the display data displayed on each display screen uses the display data displayed on the third symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to provide display data separately, and the data amount can be reduced. There is an effect that can be done.

  Next, the inversion operation of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 will be described with reference to FIG. In the present control example, the slide member 520 is configured to be reversible as described above, and the display surface (upper display surface 523a1, lower display surface 523a2) is provided on one surface side, and the other surface side is provided with the display surface. Are provided with decorative surfaces (upper decorative surface 523b1, lower decorative surface 523b2).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 67 to FIG. 68, a description will be given of an effect mode when the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is reversed at a position covering the front side of the third symbol display device 81. FIG. 67A is a diagram showing a state in which the display surface of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is reversed from the state facing the front side, and FIG. 67B is a diagram in which the display surface of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is the back surface. It is the figure which showed the state which started to face the side (state in which the decoration surface began to face the front side). The sub liquid crystal display device 523 is in a state of concealing most of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 on the back side. The main effect is switched to the sub liquid crystal display device 523 in place of the third symbol display device 81. Is displayed. On the lower part of the lower display surface 523a2, a decorative design Z indicating that the special design is being variably displayed is displayed. On the decorative surface 523b2 on the back side of the lower display surface 523a2, the decorative design Z on the front side is displayed. The sub LED 290 is disposed at the matching position. FIG. 68 is a diagram illustrating a state in which the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is inverted and the upper decorative surface 523b1 and the lower decorative surface 523b2 face the front side. By reversing, the upper decorative surface 523b1 and the lower decorative surface 523b2 are combined (connected in parallel (lined up in contact)) to form an apple pattern, so that the characters “CHANCE” are formed. It is configured. In addition, a corrugated decoration is applied to the lower surface of the apple, and four LEDs are arranged at the tip. Among them, the lowermost LED arranged on the lower decorative surface 523b2 is composed of a sub LED 290. FIG. 68A shows a state where the sub LED 290 is turned off, and FIG. 68B shows a state where the sub LED is turned on.

  With this configuration, even if the sub liquid crystal display device 520 is reversed and the display surface cannot be viewed, the player can be informed that the special symbol is changing, and the player is confused. Can be suppressed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 69, a right-handed notification mode, which is a suggestion mode of the launch position of the game ball during the jackpot game, will be described. FIG. 69A shows a right-handed notification mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or the upper display surface 523a1 during the jackpot game. Three characters “right-handed” are displayed in a curved shape (annular shape), and during the jackpot game, each character is displayed by rotating to the right. In this control example, the variable winning device 65 is configured such that the game ball that has flowed down the right side (right channel) of the 3rd symbol display device 81 has flowed down the left side (left channel) of the 3rd symbol display device 81. The game ball is arranged at a position where it is easier to win than the ball (the lower right portion of the game area). As a result, the player normally operates the handle so that the left-handed launch intensity is achieved so that the game ball passes through the left channel and is awarded to the first start port 64. Although the ball is fired, during the big hit game, the handle is operated to play the game so that the game ball has a launch strength that passes through the right channel.

  Here, when the right-handed notification mode is displayed, it is notified that the handle is operated with the firing strength that the game ball passes through the right channel, and the right-handed character is rotated to the right, The position (direction) and the rotation direction of the handle are simultaneously notified.

  As shown in FIG. 69 (b), when the sub liquid crystal display device 523 slides during the jackpot game and moves to the front side of the third symbol display device 81 to conceal the third symbol display device 81. The right-handed notification mode is displayed on the upper right of the upper display surface 523a1. FIG. 69C is a diagram showing a display mode when the sub liquid crystal display device 523 rotates in the right direction. In this case, it is displayed on the lower right side of the upper display surface 523a1 (the actual display position is not changed as shown in FIG. 69B). Also in this case, the right-handed operation can be correctly notified without changing the right-handed character display direction and the character rotation display direction.

  Thus, in this control example, the right-handed character display is rotated and displayed in a ring shape, so that even if the displayed display surface is rotated, the correct position is notified without changing the display mode. Can do. Therefore, the load of display control processing can be reduced. In addition, the amount of data can be reduced as compared to preparing various types of right-handed notification modes.

  In this control example, the right-handed display mode is displayed with characters, but an arrow symbol configured in a ring shape or a symbol imitating a game ball may be rotated. Further, a pattern imitating a handle for changing the firing strength of the game ball may be rotated and displayed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 147, a modified example of the right-handed notification mode in this control example will be described. FIG. 147 is a diagram illustrating a modification example of the right-handed notification mode. In this modification, it is changed in that three arrow symbols curved in the right direction are added in a ring shape on the back side of the right-handed character display.

  FIG. 147 (a) is a diagram showing a display area of a right-handed notification mode. The right-handed notification mode is displayed in a display area configured in a ring shape. This display area is divided into three areas every 120 degrees from the center, and is composed of a first area α, a second area β, and a third area γ. The first area α is an area in which an arrow symbol curved in the right direction is displayed by rotating to the right. In the second area β and the third area γ, the characters “right-handed” follow the ring shape. Is curved and displayed. The second area β and the third area γ are set in a layer above the arrow symbol to be rotated, and the arrow symbol to be rotated is displayed in the second area β and the third area γ. It is configured not to be. Also, three arrow symbols are set, and when one arrow symbol moves to the back of the second area β, the next arrow symbol moves to the first area α and is displayed. Yes. Note that the position of the layer in each area is configured to be changeable, and is variably set according to the rotation angle of the sub liquid crystal display device 523.

  FIG. 147 (a) is a display mode when a right-handed notification mode is displayed on the upper right of the upper display surface 523a1, and the right-handed character display layer in the layer of the first area α is below the arrow pattern. Is set. Therefore, an arrow symbol is displayed in the first area α, and a right-handed character is not displayed. FIG. 147 (b) is a diagram showing a display mode when the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is rotated 90 degrees in the right direction. In this case, the character display layer in the third area β is set below the arrow symbol layer, and the character display layer in the first area α is set above the arrow symbol layer.

  With this configuration, a right-pointing arrow symbol is always displayed in the upper direction of the gaming machine 10, and the player can be informed of the correct right channel position. In this modification, the position where the arrow is displayed is changed by changing the setting of the layer. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the rotation coordinate of the right-handed notification mode is changed and set (subjects the right-handed notification mode). The liquid crystal display device 523 may be configured to be variable by being rotated in accordance with the rotation amount of the liquid crystal display device 523.

  Next, details for setting the effects described in FIGS. 63 to 65 will be described with reference to FIG. In this control example, when the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is slid, an effect of correcting the display position of the symbol according to the amount of sliding movement is performed.

  Specifically, based on the amount by which the upper display surface 523a1 is slid in response to the upward movement of the upper display surface 523a1 from FIG. 70 (a) to FIG. 70 (b), the symbol 2 The display coordinates of (upper symbol) are corrected upward.

  Further, in response to the lower display surface 523a2 being changed downward, the display coordinates of the symbol 3 (lower symbol) are corrected downward based on the amount by which the lower display surface 523a2 is slid.

  In this way, by changing the display coordinates of each symbol in accordance with the amount of sliding movement of the sub liquid crystal display device 523, the symbols spread in accordance with the sliding movement of the sub liquid crystal display device 523. An effect can be displayed.

<Electric Configuration in First Control Example>
First, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller only in one direction.

  In main controller 110, special symbol lottery, normal symbol lottery, display setting on first symbol display device 37, display setting on second symbol display device 83, and display setting on third symbol display device 81 The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. These counters, etc., are a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a display setting on the first symbol display device 37, a display setting on the second symbol display device 83, and a display setting on the third symbol display device 81. For example, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is used.

  In order to select a special symbol lottery and the first symbol random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the special symbol lottery for setting the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 The first per-type counter C2 used for the selection, the stop-type selection counter C3 used for selecting the out-of-service stop type in the special symbol, and the first initial value random number used for setting the initial value of the first per-random number counter C1 A counter CINI1 and a variation type counter CS1 used for variation pattern selection are used. In addition, the second random number counter C4 is used for lottery of normal symbols, and the second initial random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value every time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at an interval of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 28), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 44). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. In the RAM 203, to the first special symbol execution area 203a and the second winning opening 640 corresponding to winning in the first winning opening 64 composed of one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas). The second special symbol execution area 203b corresponding to the first prize winning area 203b is provided, and in each of these areas, the first hit is made in accordance with the timing of entering the first winning opening 64a or the second winning prize opening 64b. Each value of the random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2 and the stop type selection counter C3 is stored. The RAM 203 is provided with a general execution area 203c including one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas). In each of these areas, a sphere is either left or right. The value of the second random number counter C4 is stored in accordance with the timing of passing through the normal starting port (through gate) 67.

  Next, each counter will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The first per-random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 299) and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 299 for a counter that can take a value of 0 to 299). It is the composition which returns to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

  The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 299, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 299. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once every execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 84), and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 93).

  The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated, for example, periodically (in this control example, once for each timer interrupt process), and the special symbol 1 holding ball in the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first winning port 64. It is stored in the storage area 203a. Then, the random number value that is a big hit of the special symbol is set by the first random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, and the value of the first random number counter C1 is the first random number table. When it matches the value of the random number that is the jackpot set by 202a, the jackpot of the special symbol is determined. The first random number table is used for a low probability of a special symbol (a period in which the special symbol is in a low probability state), and at a high probability (a special symbol) that has a higher probability of being a special symbol jackpot than the low probability. The period of a high probability state) is divided into two types, and the number of random numbers that are jackpots included in each is set differently. In this way, by changing the number of random numbers that are jackpots, the probability of jackpots is changed between when the special symbol has a low probability and when the special symbol has a high probability. Note that the first per random number table 202a for a special symbol with a high probability and the first per random number table 202a for a special symbol with a low probability are provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110.

  Here, the first random number table 202a will be described. The first winning random number table 202a is a table in which random numbers (determination values) determined to be winning in each gaming state in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol are set. Specifically, when the gaming state is a high-probability gaming state, in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the value of the obtained first random number counter C1 is any of “0-9” If it is determined that there is any of “0-9”, it is determined that it is a big hit. Further, when the gaming state is the normal gaming state, it is determined whether the acquired value of the first random number counter C1 is “9”, and if it is “9”, it is determined that it is a big hit.

  The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when the special symbol is a big hit, and increments one by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). Then, after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 99), it returns to 0. The value of the first hit type counter C2 is updated, for example, periodically (once every timer interrupt process in this control example), and the special symbol 1 in the RAM 203 is held at the timing when the ball wins the first winning port 64. It is stored in the sphere storage area 203a.

  Here, if the value of the first per-random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is not a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, that is, if it is a random number that is out of the special symbol, The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the one symbol display device 37 is the one when the special symbol is off.

  On the other hand, if the value of the first per random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a is a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, it corresponds to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37. The displayed mode is the one when the special symbol is a big hit. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a.

  The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. In the first per random number counter C1, there is one random value that is a big hit of the special symbol when the first special symbol and the second special symbol are low probability, and the random value “0” is for low probability Is stored in the first random number table. In this way, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 1 among the total number of random number values, and therefore, the probability that the special symbol is jackpot is “1/400”.

  On the other hand, when the special symbol has a high probability, there are ten random numbers that are jackpots of the special symbol, and the values “0 to 9” are stored in the first per-random number table for the high probability. Thus, when the special symbol has a high probability, the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 10 among the total number of random number values, so the probability that the special symbol is jackpot is “1/40”.

  A duplicate value between the random number value that is a big hit stored in the first random number table for the low probability time and the random number value that is the big hit stored in the first random number table for the high probability time In order to prevent this, a random value corresponding to each jackpot may be set. If there is a value that is always used as a jackpot random number regardless of the situation of the pachinko machine 10, the random number value may be input from the outside, and the jackpot may be easily illegally assigned. On the other hand, depending on the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state of a special symbol or a low probability state of a special symbol), by changing the random number value that is a big jackpot, Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to predict random numbers, so that fraud can be suppressed.

  Further, the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0-99. In the first hit type counter C2, the big hit type when the random value is any one of “0 to 29” is “big hit A”. The jackpot type when the random value is any one of “30 to 99” is “jackpot B”. In this control example, the number of types of jackpots is two. However, the present invention is not limited to this. One type may be used, or two or more types may be provided. Also, different jackpot types may be selected for the first special symbol and the second special symbol even if they are the same value of the first hit type counter C2. By configuring in this way, for example, by setting a jackpot type that is executed with a larger number of rounds when a big hit is made with the second special symbol, the player with the second special symbol can be more successful It can be expected. Therefore, hitting in the high-probability gaming state can be made more advantageous to the player, and the game preference in the high-probability state can be improved. Therefore, it is possible to make the player strongly think that the player wants to shift to the high probability state, and the game can be performed for a longer time.

  For example, the stop type selection counter C3 is incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 99, for example, and reaches a maximum value (that is, 99) and then returns to 0. In this control example, the stop type at the time of release displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 is selected by the stop type selection counter C3, and after the reach occurs, the final stop symbol stops other than the reach symbol. ”(For example, in the range of 90 to 99) and“ stop completely ”(for example, in the range of 0 to 89) that does not generate reach are selected. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is updated, for example, periodically (once every timer interrupt process in this control example), and the special symbol 1 holding ball stored in the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first winning port 64. Stored in area 203a. The ball is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the second winning port 64.

  The random value for determining the stop type of the special symbol from the value (random number value) of the stop type selection counter C3 is set by a stop type selection table (not shown). It is provided in the ROM 202 of the device 110. In this control example, this table is divided into a special symbol for high probability and a special symbol for low probability, and the range of random values set for each outage stop type according to the table. Is changing. This is because the selection ratio of the stop type is changed depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol high probability state or a special symbol low probability state.

  For example, in a high-probability state, a table for a high-probability time with a wide range of random values from 0 to 89 corresponding to the stop type “completely off” is selected so that a reach effect is not selected more than necessary because a big hit is likely to occur. Is selected, and “completely off” is easily selected. In the low probability state, the random value range corresponding to the stop type “completely out” is 0 to 79 and the probability range is low, in order to secure the time for the ball to enter the first winning opening 64. Table is selected, and “completely out” is difficult to select.

  The variation type counter CS1 is, for example, incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 198, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). A rough display mode such as so-called short-time deviation, long-term deviation, normal reach, and super reach is determined by the variation type counter CS1. Specifically, the display mode is determined by determining the variation time of the symbol variation. Based on the fluctuation time determined by the fluctuation type counter CS1, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 determine the reach type of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the detailed symbol variation mode. The The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once every time a main process (see FIG. 93) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. Note that a variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 72 (a)) that stores a random value that determines one variation time of symbol variation from the value (random number value) of the variation type counter CS1 is the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. Is provided inside.

  In the variation pattern selection table 202d, for example, “out (for long time)”, “out (for short time)”, “out normal reach”, and “out super reach” are defined as variation patterns for out. As a variation pattern of jackpot A, various types of “normal reach” and “super reach” are defined. Then, a variation pattern is selected from the various variation patterns defined in the variation pattern selection table 202d according to the predicted lottery result or the predicted stop type (a jackpot type in the case of a jackpot). Although illustration is omitted, the variation pattern selection table 222a is also set in the audio lamp control device 113, and more detailed variation corresponding to the type of variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command output from the main control device 110 is provided. The pattern content is selected from the variation pattern selection table 222a.

  The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented one by one within a range of, for example, 0 to 239 and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). Further, when the second random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In the present control example, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 is updated periodically, for example, every timer interruption process, and is acquired when it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal starting port (through gate) 67, It is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203.

  The value of the random number that becomes the normal symbol is set by a random number table (not shown) per normal symbol stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller, and the value of the second random number counter C4 is the normal symbol value. When the winning random number value set by the winning random number table coincides with the winning random number table, it is determined that the normal symbol is hit. In addition, this random number table per normal symbol is used for low probability of a normal symbol (period in which the normal symbol is in a normal state), and at a high probability that the normal symbol is more likely to hit than the low probability (normal symbol of the normal symbol) The number of random numbers that are jackpots included in each is set differently. In this way, by changing the number of random numbers to be won, the probability of winning is changed between the low probability of the normal symbol and the high probability of the normal symbol.

  As shown in FIG. 73 (c), there are 24 random numbers that are hit by the normal symbol when the normal symbol has a low probability, and the range is “5-28”. These random values are stored in a random table per normal symbol for low probability. Thus, when the probability of a normal symbol is low, the total number of random numbers that are big hits is 24 among the total number of random number values, so the probability of hitting a normal symbol is “1/10”.

  When the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, when the ball passes through the normal starting port 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired and the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device. Is executed for 30 seconds. And if the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 28”, it is determined to be winning, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device is finished, the stop symbol (second symbol). As a result, the symbol “◯” is lit and displayed, and the electric accessory 640a associated with the second prize opening 640 is opened “for 0.2 seconds × 1 time”. In this control example, when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning port 640 is “0.2 seconds × 1 time when the normal symbol is hit. ”Is opened, but the opening time and number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, “0.5 seconds × 2 times” may be opened.

  On the other hand, when the normal symbol has a high probability, there are 200 random values that are hit by the normal symbol, and the range is “5 to 204”. These random number values are stored in a random table per symbol for high probability. As described above, when the normal symbol has a low probability, the total number of random numbers to be won is 200 among the total number of random numbers 240, so the probability of being a normal symbol is “1 / 1.2”.

  When the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, when the ball passes the normal starting port 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired and the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device. Is executed for 3 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 204”, it is determined that the winning is selected, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device is finished, the stop symbol (second symbol) is displayed. As a result, the symbol “◯” is lit and displayed, and the electric accessory 640a attached to the second prize opening 640 is opened “twice × 1 second”. As described above, when the normal symbol has a high probability, the variation display time becomes “30 seconds → 3 seconds” much shorter than that when the normal symbol has a low probability, and is further attached to the second prize opening 640. Since the release period of the electric accessory 640a becomes very long as “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, it becomes easy for the ball to enter the second winning opening 640. Note that a table (not shown) storing random number values for determining whether or not a normal symbol is hit from the value (random number value) of the second hit random number counter C4 is provided in the ROM 202. In this control example, when the pachinko machine 10 is at a high probability of a normal symbol, the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning port 640 is “only twice per second” when the normal symbol is hit. Although it is opened, the opening time and the number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, “3 seconds × 3 times” may be opened.

  The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 84). And repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 93).

  As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control device 110 performs the big win lottery and the display in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 according to the value of the counter and the like. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of display results in a second symbol display device (not shown) can be executed.

  Next, the contents of the ROM 202 in the main controller 110 and the contents of the RAM 203 in this control example will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 72A is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 provided in the main controller 110. As shown in FIG. 72 (a), the ROM 202 is provided with at least a first per-random number table 202a, a first per-type selection table 202b, a second per-random number table 202c, and a variation pattern selection table 202d. Yes.

  Here, the contents of the first random number table 202a will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 73 (a) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the first random number table 202a. As described above, the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 73A) is a table in which a random number value that is a big hit of a special symbol is defined. When the random number value specified in the first random number table 202a matches the value of the first random number counter C1, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit.

  The first per-random number table 202a includes a jackpot determination value (a jackpot determination value at a low probability) for determining whether or not a special symbol is a big hit at a low probability of the special symbol, and a special symbol at a high probability of the special symbol. Jackpot judgment value (a jackpot judgment value at a high probability) for determining whether or not the jackpot is a big hit, and the number of judgment values (random numbers) each of which is a big jackpot is different. In this way, by varying the number of determination values (random numbers) that are jackpots, the probability of jackpots is changed when the special symbol has a low probability and when the special symbol has a high probability.

  Next, the contents of the first hit type selection table 202b will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 73 (b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the first hit type selection table 202b. The first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 73 (b)) is set so that the big hit A and the big hit B can be selected. Specifically, the value “0 to 49” of the first hit type counter C2 is set as the determination value for the jackpot A, and “50 to 99” is set as the determination value for the jackpot B.

  Here, as described above, the “big hit A” is configured such that the game ball that has won the variable winning device 65 can pass through the probability changing switch 65a5 (that is, whether or not the probability changing state is entered). However, in “big hit B”, it is configured that it is impossible (or difficult) to pass through the probability change switch 65a5 (that is, the lottery of whether or not the probability change state is entered is not executed).

  Next, the contents of the second random number table 202c will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 73 (c) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the second random number table 202c. The second hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 73 (c)) is a data table in which a hit determination value for a normal symbol is stored. As shown in FIG. 73 (c), when the normal symbol has a low probability (during the normal state of the normal symbol), the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the second random number counter buffer is in the range of 5 to 28. In the case of, it is determined that the symbol is a normal symbol. As described above, when it is determined that the symbol is a normal symbol, after the variable display on the second symbol display device (not shown) is finished, the symbol “○” is turned on as the stop symbol (second symbol). In addition to being displayed, the electric accessory attached to the second prize opening 640 is opened for “0.2 seconds × 1 time”.

  Next, the contents of the variation pattern selection table 202d will be described with reference to FIG. The variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 74A) is a data table used to determine the variation pattern display mode, and the display mode is defined for each value of the variation type counter CS1.

  In the variation pattern selection table 202d, a plurality of different tables corresponding to the special symbol lottery results are defined. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 74 (a), the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 (see FIG. 74 (b)), the out (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 (see FIG. 74 (c)), A deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table 202d3 (see FIG. 74D) is defined at least. Although not shown in the drawing, a variation pattern table in the short-time gaming state is set in addition to this.

  With reference to FIG. 74 (b), the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 will be described. FIG. 74B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1. The jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 is a data table in which the type (variation time) of the variation pattern to be selected when the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot. As the jackpot variation pattern, various types of normal reach (30 seconds), various types of super reach (60 seconds), and special reach (90 seconds) are set. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is set as the determination value for each variation pattern.

  Specifically, “0-50” for the fluctuation patterns of various normal reach (30 seconds), “51-179” for the fluctuation patterns of various super reach (60 seconds), various special reach (90 seconds). ) Is set as a determination value of the variation type counter CS1. When the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 selects a variation pattern when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, the MPU 201 wins the variation pattern in which a determination value corresponding to the value of the obtained variation type counter CS1 is set. It selects from the fluctuation pattern table 202d1 for use.

  FIG. 74C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2. The deviation (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d2 is a data table in which the type (fluctuation time) of the fluctuation pattern to be selected when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of place is set. If the special symbol lottery result is out of place, as described above, whether the stop type is completely out of reach (non-reach) or out of reach (reach common) from the stop type selection table (not shown) It is determined by the value of the selection counter C3. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of “0 to 79”, complete outage is set, and if in the range of “80 to 99”, outlier reach is set.

  Here, when the variation pattern type is a complete deviation, a short deviation (7 seconds) with a relatively short fluctuation time and a long deviation (10 seconds) with a long fluctuation time are set. “0 to 98” is set as the judgment value for the short deviation (7 seconds), and “99 to 198” is set as the judgment value for the fluctuation type counter CS1 for the long deviation (10 seconds).

  For outreach, “0 to 149” for various types of normal reach (30 seconds) and “150 to 197” for various types of superreach (60 seconds). For various types (90 seconds), “198” is set as the determination value of the variation type counter CS1.

  As described above, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 determines the stop type when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of play in the normal gaming state, and obtains it from the out (normal) variation pattern selection table 202d2. Based on the value of the fluctuation type selection counter CS1, a fluctuation pattern is selected from the deviation (normal) fluctuation pattern selection table 202d2.

  FIG. 74C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation (probability variation) variation pattern selection table 202d3. This deviation (probability change) variation pattern selection table 202d3 is a data table for selecting a variation pattern of a special symbol to be removed when the game state is a probability variation game state. This deviation (probable variation) variation pattern selection table 202d3 is different in that the set value of the variation type selection counter CS1 is different from the aforementioned variation (normal) variation pattern selection table 202d2.

  As described above, when the gaming state is the probability variation gaming state, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of “0 to 89” based on the stop type selection table (not shown), complete losing is determined. , The outreach reach is determined in the range of “90 to 99”.

  In this way, when the probability variation gaming state is higher than the normal gaming state, the probability of reaching when the player is out of play is set lower. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the deviation fluctuation time from becoming longer at the time of probability change and the period until the big hit from being prolonged. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem that the game is bored during the probability-changing game state where it is easy to make a big hit and the player feels bored.

  Returning to FIG. 72, the description will be continued. FIG. 72B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203 in the main controller 110. As shown in FIG. 72 (b), the RAM 203 has a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d, and a special symbol. 2 retained ball number counter 203e, normal symbol retained ball number counter 203f, probability variation flag 203g, probability variation setting flag 203h, probability variation passing counter 203i, winning number counter 203j, operation counter 203k, notification counter 203m, remaining ball timer flag 203n, remaining ball It has at least a timer 203p, a probability variation valid flag 203q, a probability variation valid timer 203r, a discharge number counter 203s, a time reduction counter 203t, a predictive flag 203u, and other memory areas 203z.

  The special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), and in each of these areas, a first winning opening 64 is provided. Each value of the first per-random number counter C1 and the first per-type counter C2 acquired based on winning is stored.

  More specifically, each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 is acquired at the timing when the ball wins the first winning opening 64 (start winning prize), and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding first). Among the vacant areas (area to reserved fourth area), the areas are stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, as the area number is smaller, the data corresponding to the winning that is older in time is stored, and the data corresponding to the winning that is older in time is stored in the first reserved area. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, when the special controller lottery is performed in the main controller 110, the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a are transferred to the execution area. Based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 that are shifted (moved) and stored in the execution area, a determination such as lottery of a special symbol is performed.

  Note that when the data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process is performed in which winning data stored in other reserved areas (holding second area to holding fourth area) is packed into a holding area having a smaller area number (holding first area to holding third area). Done. In this control example, in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, data is shifted only for the reserved areas (second reserved area to fourth reserved area) in which winning data is stored.

  The special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b has four reserved areas (special symbol 2 reserved first area to fourth area), like the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. In each of these areas, the values of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 are stored. This is a storage area for the second winning port 640 (second special symbol), and the first winning port 64 (first special symbol) is the second winning port 640 (for the above-described special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. The only difference is that it is changed to the second special symbol), and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Similarly to the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c has one execution area and four reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). In each of these areas, a second random number counter C4 is stored.

  More specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes through the normal start port 67, and the acquired data is stored in four reservation areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). Among the vacant areas, the areas are stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, as with the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, data corresponding to winning is stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, when the main controller 110 performs a lottery for the normal symbol, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first reserved area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is shifted to the execution area ( Based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area, a determination such as lottery for a normal symbol is performed.

  Note that when the data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty, so that the winnings stored in the other reserved areas are the same as in the case of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. Is shifted to the reserved area with the area number 1 smaller. The data is also shifted only for the reserved area where the winning data is stored.

  The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is a variable display (third symbol) of the first special symbol (first symbol) which is performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the winning (start winning) at the first winning opening 64. It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (the number of waiting times) of the variable display performed by the symbol display device 81 up to four times. The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d has an initial value set to zero, and every time a ball enters the first winning port 64 and the number of held balls in variable display increases, the maximum value 4 is increased to 1. Addition is performed (see S404 in FIG. 87). On the other hand, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 every time a special symbol variation display is newly executed (see S210 in FIG. 85).

  The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is a variable display (third symbol) of the second special symbol (second symbol) which is performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the winning (start winning) to the second winning opening 640. It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (the number of waiting times) of the variable display performed by the symbol display device 81 up to four times. The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is set to an initial value of zero. Every time a ball enters the second winning opening 640 and the number of held balls in the variable display increases, the maximum value 4 is increased to 1. Addition is performed (see S404 in FIG. 87). On the other hand, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 every time the special symbol variation display is newly executed (see S205 in FIG. 85).

  The value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the number N1 of the variable display hold in the first special symbol) or the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (the number N2 of the variable display hold in the first special symbol) is Then, the voice lamp control device 113 is notified by the reserved ball number command (see S206 and S211 in FIG. 85, and S405 and S411 in FIG. 87). The reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp controller 113 every time the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is changed. is there.

  The sound lamp control device 113 uses the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 every time the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is changed. The value of the number of held balls of the variable display held at 110 can be acquired. As a result, the number of held balls in the variable display managed by the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 is reserved in the main controller 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if there is a deviation from the actual number of held balls in the fluctuation display, the deviation can be corrected by the next received number of held balls command.

  The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of held balls based on the number of held balls command, and each time the number of held balls changes, the display hold for notifying the display control device 114 of the number of held balls. Send the ball number command. The display control device 114 displays the number of reserved balls (holding symbol) of the third symbol display device 81 based on the number of reserved balls notified by the display reserved ball number command.

  The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is the number of held balls (the number of waiting times) of the normal symbol (second symbol) displayed on the second symbol display device (not shown) based on the passage of the ball at the normal start port 67. ) Is counted up to 4 times. The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f has an initial value set to zero, and is incremented by 1 to a maximum value of 4 each time the ball passes through the normal starting port 67 and the number of held balls for variable display increases. (See S704 in FIG. 90). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 every time a variation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see S605 in FIG. 89).

  When the ball passes through the normal starting port 67, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is less than 4, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired. The acquired data is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c (see S705 in FIG. 90). On the other hand, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 4 when the ball passes through the normal start port 67, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c (S703 in FIG. 90). : No).

  The probability change flag 203g is a flag indicating whether or not the current game state is a probability change game state (probability change game state). When the probability change flag 203g is set to ON, it indicates that the game state is a probability change game state, and when it is OFF, it indicates that the game state is a low probability game state (including a short-time game state). In this control example, the probability variation flag 203g is set to ON when a probability variation setting flag 203h, which will be described later, is set to ON at the end of the big hit game (see S1303 in FIG. 96). On the other hand, when the jackpot game is started, it is set to off. In the initialized state, it is set to OFF, and when a normal power failure occurs, the state immediately before the power failure is backed up.

  The probability change setting flag 203h is a flag indicating whether or not to shift the game state to the probability change game state after the big hit game. In the pachinko machine 10, whether or not the game state is set to the probability change game state is determined by whether or not the game ball has passed through the probability change switch 65a5 in the variable winning device 65 during the big hit game. Here, when the game ball passes through the probability variation switch 65a5, the probability variation setting flag 203h is set to ON (see S1512 in FIG. 98). On the other hand, the probability variation flag 203g is set to OFF based on being set to ON. The probability variation setting flag 203h is backed up when the power is turned off, and is set to the state immediately before the power is turned off when the power is restored (when the power is turned on). In the initialized state, it is set to off.

  If the probability variation setting flag 203h is set to ON when the power is turned on, it is determined whether or not the probability variation switch 65a5 has passed before the power supply is cut off. It is also possible to configure such that 203h is officially set to ON and returned. In this case, it can be determined whether or not the probability variation switch 65a5 has passed before the power is turned off, depending on whether or not a probability variation passage counter 203i described later is a value greater than zero. By configuring in this way, it is possible to discriminate fraud such as rewriting only the probability change setting flag 203h and turning on the power again in a state where the power is turned off, and reducing damage on the amusement store side. it can.

  The probability variation passing counter 203i is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have passed the probability variation switch 65a5 in one round during the jackpot game (13 rounds in the jackpot A in this control example). Note that it is possible to determine whether or not all the game balls won in the first variable winning opening 65 have been discharged by the sum of the probability variation passing counter 203i and a discharge number counter 203s described later. The probability variation passing counter 203i is updated by incrementing by one when the probability variation switch 65a5 is passed (see S1511 in FIG. 98). Further, after executing the process of determining whether the number of game balls won in the variable winning device 65 matches the number of discharged balls, the initial value is reset to “0” (see S1611 in FIG. 99). The probability variation passage counter 203i is backed up when the power is turned off. In the initialized state, it is set to 0.

  The winning number counter 203j is a counter for counting the number of game balls won in the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 in one round in the jackpot game. Specifically, one is added and updated based on the detection that the game ball has passed through the detection switch 65a1 (see FIG. 128) provided in the variable winning device 65 (see S1503 in FIG. 98). ). On the other hand, when one round is completed, the number of winning prizes in the variable winning device 65 (value of the winning number counter 203j) and the number of discharged prizes (the total value of the discharging number counter 203s and the probability variation passing counter 203i) are equal. After it is determined whether it is correct, the initial value is reset to “0”. The value of the winning number counter 203j is backed up when the power is turned off. In the initialized state, it is set to 0.

  The operation counter 203k is a counter for counting (counting) the time for which the flow path solenoid (probability changing solenoid) 65k is set to ON (excitation). In the pachinko machine 10, in the big hit A, the flow passage solenoid 65k is set on for 5 seconds based on the start of the 13th round, and in the big hit B, the flow passage solenoid 65k is turned on for 0.5 seconds based on the start of the 13th round. Is set. In the big hit A, a counter value corresponding to 5 seconds is set as start data for 13 rounds in the jackpot A, and a counter value corresponding to 0.5 seconds is set in the big hit B (see S1202 in FIG. 95). . On the other hand, 1 is subtracted and updated in S1509 of the winning process (see FIG. 98) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. Further, based on the fact that the value of the operation counter 203k is determined to be 0, the flow path solenoid 65k is set to OFF. The operation counter 203k is backed up when the power is turned off, and is set to an initial value of 0 in the initialized state. In this way, by setting the operation counter 203k and controlling the flow path solenoid 65k, the winning to the probability variation switch 65a5 can be controlled according to the jackpot type.

  The notification counter 203m is a counter for discriminating the timing of outputting a notification effect for attracting the player's attention (in the present control example, a voice “watch the liquid crystal”). In the present control example, the notification counter 203m corresponding to 1 second is set at the end timing of the 12th round (10 ball winnings in the variable winning device 65 or 30 seconds have passed). This notification counter 203m is updated by being subtracted by 1 by the processing of S1402 of the notification processing (see FIG. 97) of the main controller 110. A notification command that is output to the sound lamp control device 113 is set based on the notification counter 203m becoming zero. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives this command, the above-described processing for outputting the voice is executed.

  With this configuration, since the sound “Look at the liquid crystal” is output before the 13th round when the flow path solenoid 65k is operated, the player can display the third symbol display device corresponding to the liquid crystal. Look at 81. Although details will be described later, in the 12th round of the jackpot game, for example, a girl character is displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 to prompt the player to view the 3rd symbol display device 81. A character of “attention” which is a notification is displayed. In the thirteenth round, the flow path solenoid 65k is operated, and if the operation is watched by the player, the type of jackpot being executed is determined by the operation period of the flow path solenoid 65k. Therefore, in order to keep the player having an expectation that the probable game state will be given until the end of the jackpot game, the player moves the switching member 65h (flow path solenoid 65k) in the variable winning device 65. A notification effect that makes it difficult to see is performed. However, when the twelfth round is over, the player may watch the switching member 65h during the interval display, so that the third symbol display device 81 is informed by voice during the interval period. The notification effect is performed. Thereby, after an interval effect is performed, a player's attention can be attracted to the displayed display content, and a player's attention can be diverted from operation | movement of the switching member 65h.

  In this control example, it is configured to distract the player's attention from the switching member 65h by informing the player to show the 3rd symbol display device 81. However, the present invention is not limited to this. You may alert | report so that the movement of the switching member 65h may be hidden by a player's hand by alert | reporting so that a player's hand may be held over the apparatus 65. FIG. Moreover, not only the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 but you may comprise so that a player may be distracted by alert | reporting so that a decoration lamp 34 etc. may be seen to a player. Furthermore, it may be configured to distract the player's attention by displaying a three-dimensional code or the like during 12 rounds and informing the user to read it with a mobile phone. In this control example, the effect that distracts attention is set to the longest time (5 seconds from the start of the 13th round) until the operation of the switching member 65h ends. Thereby, the malfunction which discriminate | determines whether it is jackpot A or jackpot B by alerting | reporting time can be suppressed.

  The remaining ball timer flag 203n is a flag indicating that the open / close door 65f1 of the variable winning device 65 is closed in one round. When the remaining ball timer flag 203n is set to ON, it indicates that the open / close door 65f1 of the variable prize device 65 is set from the open state to the closed state in one round. When the remaining ball timer flag 203n is set to ON, a remaining ball timer 203p, which will be described later, is incremented by one and updated (see S1605 in FIG. 99). The remaining ball timer 203p is a counter for determining the time since the opening / closing door 65f1 is closed, and for determining whether the time required for the game ball in the variable winning device 65 to be discharged has elapsed. Counter.

  The remaining ball timer 203p is the time required for the game ball won in the variable winning device 65 to be discharged when the preset round 1 ends and the open / close door 65f1 of the variable winning device 65 is closed. It is a counter for determining whether or not elapses. In this control example, the time required until the game ball won in the variable winning device 65 is discharged is 2 seconds. In this control example, the counter value corresponding to 3 seconds is the upper limit value of the remaining ball timer 203p in advance. Is set as Based on the fact that the remaining ball timer 203p has reached the upper limit value (3 seconds in this control example), it is determined whether or not the number of winnings to the variable winning device 65 matches the number of dischargings (see FIG. S1607 in FIG. 99). If they do not match, an error command is set and a notification to that effect is given. Therefore, it can be notified at an early stage that the game balls are jammed in the variable winning device 65. Therefore, the game ball is illegally left in the variable winning device 65, the impact is given at the start timing of the 13th round, and the game ball is reached to the switching member 65h earlier than the actual, and the big hit B is In addition, it is possible to suppress fraud in which the game ball passes through the probability change switch 65a5.

  If the number of winning and the number of discharging does not match, a dedicated flag is set to ON. If the flag is ON, the probability change setting flag 203h is set even if the game ball passes the probability change switch 65a5. You may make it the structure which is not set to ON. By comprising in this way, it can suppress that a probability variation | change game state is provided illegally.

  The probability variation valid flag 203q is a flag for determining whether or not the passage is valid when the game ball passes through the probability variation switch 65a5 after the passage solenoid 65k is set to OFF. When the probability variation valid flag 203q is set to ON, it is necessary for the game ball that has finally won the specific winning opening 65a to pass the probability variation switch 65a5 based on the fact that the flow path solenoid 65k is ON. Indicates that the time has not passed. That is, it is a period during which a game ball can pass through the probability change switch 65a5.

  The probability variation valid timer 203r is a counter for counting the time since the probability variation valid flag 203q described above is set to ON. After the flow rate solenoid 65k is turned off by the probability variation valid timer 203r, it is possible to determine a period necessary for normally passing the probability variation switch 65a5. In this control example, the time required for the game ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a to pass through the probability change switch 65a5 is 1 second. The upper limit value of the probability variation valid timer 203r is set to a counter value corresponding to 1.2 seconds, and even if it passes the probability variation switch 65a5 thereafter, it is determined to be illegal and not determined to be passed.

  Thereby, the switching member 65h is illegally changed to allow the game ball to pass through the probability variation switch 65a5, or the game ball is pushed up by a piano wire or the like from below the probability variation switch 65a5 to pass the game ball to the probability variation switch 65a5. It is possible to suppress damage caused by fraud in which a magnetic sensor is erroneously detected as passing by radio waves or the like.

  The discharge number counter 203s is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have passed through the discharge confirmation switch 65e4 (not shown) in one round. The number-of-discharge counter 203s is reset to 0, which is an initial value, after the number of game balls that have won the variable winning device 65 and the number of discharged balls are determined (S1611 in FIG. 99).

  The short / medium counter 203t is a counter for counting the number of times the remaining special symbols fluctuate in the short / short game state. At this time, the short / medium counter 203t is set to 100 when the probability variation setting flag is OFF at the end of the big hit game. In other words, in this control example, when the probability variation gaming state is not set after the big hit game, the state is shifted to the short-time gaming state 100 times.

  In the predictive flag 203u, winning information that is a big hit when the game is shifted to the probability variation gaming state is acquired, and the winning information that has already been put on hold (in the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b). This is a flag indicating that winning information that is a jackpot A (that is, a possibility of shifting to a probable gaming state) is stored in the (information). This predictor flag 203u is changed based on the winning information when winning information is acquired in the pre-reading process (see FIG. 88) when the winning game information is acquired when the game state shifts to the probability change gaming state (S507 in FIG. 88: Yes). When it is determined that there is a possibility that the game state is likely to change (that is, there is winning information that becomes a jackpot A until then) (S508 in FIG. 88: Yes), it is set to ON. The Then, a winning information command indicating that the predictor flag 203u is turned on is notified to the sound lamp control device 113 (see S511 in FIG. 88). Then, in the ending process (see FIG. 96) executed at the end of the jackpot game (see FIG. 96), when the probability change flag 203g is set to ON (that is, when the state changes to the probability change game state) (see S1304 in FIG. 96), Set to off. Although illustration is omitted, in the ending process (FIG. 96), when it is determined that the jackpot game based on the winning information with the predictive flag 203u turned on is finished (that is, the jackpot game of the jackpot A is executed). The predictive flag 203u is also set to OFF in the case where the game has not shifted to the probability change gaming state.

  In the other memory area 203z, other data necessary for the game, a counter, a flag, and the like are set (stored).

  Returning to FIG. 4, the description will be continued. An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 has a payout control device 111, an audio lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device 83, a second symbol hold lamp 84, and a lower side of the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 made up of a large opening solenoid for opening and closing the front side and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the MPU 201 via the input / output port 205. Send.

  The input / output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown) and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115, and the MPU 201 is output from the various switches 208. And various processes are executed based on the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, includes a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. And a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the power failure signal SG1 is also input to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 91) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball that has been paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball according to the rotational operation amount of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch a ball. The ball launch unit 112a includes a launch solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the operation handle 51 is detected on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping the ball firing is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation 51, and a ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (lighting units 29 to 33, display lamp 34, etc.) 227, and fluctuating effects (fluctuation). Display) and setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as a notice effect. The MPU 221 that is an arithmetic unit includes a ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 including an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 225 includes a main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, a frame button 22, and other devices 228 (slide motor 311, rotation motor 431, reversing motor 531). The sub LED 290, the clock generator (CLK) 900, and the like are connected to each other.

  The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the player operates the frame button 22, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, or the super-reach is performed. The audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the effect contents, and the display control device 114 is instructed. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the rear image corresponding to the changed stage is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The sound lamp control device 113 determines an error according to the command from the main control device 110 or the status of various devices connected to the sound lamp control device 113, and displays and controls the error command including the type of the error. To device 114. The display control device 114 performs control to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command on the third symbol display device 81 without delay.

  The slide motor 311 is a motor for moving the display surface 523a, which is the upper display surface 523a1, which is the sub liquid crystal display device 523, by sliding it in the parallel direction to the gaming machine, and is configured by a stepping motor. The rotation motor 431 is a motor for rotating the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 in parallel with the gaming machine 10, and is composed of a stepping motor. The reversing motor 531 is a stepping motor that is a motor for rotating (reversing) the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 about an axis parallel to the gaming machine 10. The inversion motor 531 is provided with a motor for rotating (reversing) the upper display surface 523a1 and a motor for rotating (reversing) the lower display surface 523a2, and the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface are provided. 523a2 can be rotated independently of each other. The reversing motor 531 is a motor for rotating (reversing) the upper display surface 521a1 and the lower display surface 531a2 independently such that the display area faces the front side and the display area faces the back side. It is.

  The sub LED 290 is disposed on a decorative surface 523b1 formed on the back side of the upper display surface 523a1, and when the upper display surface 523a1 is inverted, the decorative symbol Z (displayed on the third symbol display device 81) is displayed. Instead of the symbol for notifying the player that the special symbol is changing, the player is configured to flash and notify the player that the special symbol is changing.

  As shown in FIG. 75A, the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113 stores a variation pattern selection table 222a and other various data and programs necessary for game control.

  The clock generator 900 is a device that outputs a clock signal that changes every 100 ms period to the sound lamp controller 113 and the display controller 114. The clock generator 900 is a device for supplying a synchronization signal for controlling the blinking of the sub LED 290 and the decorative design Z at the same timing by the audio lamp controller 113 and the display controller 114. Accordingly, even when the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is inverted and moved to a position overlapping the display area of the third symbol display device 81, the sub LED 290 blinks 0 in synchronization with the displayed decorative symbol Z. Display, it is possible to notify the player that the special symbol is changing, and to prevent the player from being confused.

  Next, the contents of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  In the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113, as shown in FIG. 75 (a), a variation pattern selection table 222a, an over winning table 222b, an ending table 222c, a sub liquid crystal drive scenario 222d, and other various types necessary for game control. Data and programs are stored.

  In the variation pattern selection table 222a, variation patterns of variation pattern types (out of reach, out of reach, various types of reach, etc.) are set as counter values for variation pattern selection (not shown). The sound lamp control device 113 selects a detailed variation pattern based on the variation pattern type indicated by the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, the determination result, and the acquired counter value for selection. Thereby, the sound lamp control device 113 can select a wide variety of variation modes while strictly observing rough information such as variation time and variation pattern type. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the same variation display mode and the like from being frequently displayed, and to suppress a problem that the player gets bored early.

  The over-winning table 222b is a table for selecting an over-winning effect to be executed when a game ball is over-winning into the specific winning port 65a of the variable winning device 65.

  Here, the details of the over-winning table 222b will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 76A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the over-winning table 222b. The over winning table 222b is a table used for selecting an over winning effect in the jackpot game. As shown in FIG. 76 (a), the over winning table 222b includes a win over winning table 222b1 and a predictive over winning table. 222b2 and a miss-over winning table 222b3 are provided.

  The winning over winning table 222b1 is a table used when there is winning information that is a big hit in the pending winning information. As shown in FIG. 76 (b), in the winning over winning table 222b1, the contents of the effects selected as the over winning effects are defined in accordance with the value of the effect counter 223f, and the regulations differ according to the number of rounds. It has become.

  Specifically, when the number of rounds is 1 to 10 and the value of the production counter 223f is “0 to 149”, the production content of the over winning production is “None” (that is, not executed). If it is “150-198”, it will be “bubble”, and if it is “199”, it will be “fish school”.

  “Fish school” is selected as the production content of the over-winning effect only when the winning over-winning table 222b1 is used (that is, when there is winning information that is a big hit in the pending winning information). By displaying the “fish school” effect as the over-winning effect, it is possible to suggest (notify) that there is winning information that is a big hit in the winning information that is reserved for the player.

  On the other hand, in the case where the number of rounds is 11 to 15R, if the value of the effect counter 223f is “0 to 99”, the effect content of the over winning effect is “none” (that is, not executed) and “100 to 189”. If it is “bubbles”, “190-199” is “fish school”. In this way, in accordance with the progress of the round in the jackpot game, it is configured so that an over winning effect indicating that the degree of expectation that the winning information that is a jackpot is held is high is displayed, thereby allowing the jackpot game to be displayed. Even if it becomes a long time, the interest of the player can be improved.

  The predictive over winning table 222b2 includes winning information that becomes a big hit if it shifts to the probable gaming state in the pending winning information, and the probable gaming state until the change based on the winning winning information is started This table is used when there is a possibility of shifting to (i.e., when it is not determined that it will be a big hit after that, but is highly likely to be a big hit).

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 76 (c), when the number of rounds is 1 to 10 and the value of the production counter 223f is “0 to 149”, the production content of the over winning production is “None”. (That is, not executed), and “150 to 199” is “bubble”.

  On the other hand, in the case where the number of rounds is 11 to 15R, if the value of the effect counter 223f is “0 to 99”, the effect content of the over winning effect is “none” (that is, not executed), and “100 to 199”. If so, it becomes a “bubble”.

  The off-over winning table 222b3 is a table used when there is no winning information that is a big hit in the pending winning information.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 76 (d), when the number of rounds is 1 to 10 and the value of the production counter 223g is “0 to 179”, the production content of the over winning production is “None”. (That is, not executed), and if it is “180 to 199”, it becomes “bubble”.

  On the other hand, when the number of rounds is 11 to 15R, if the value of the effect counter 223f is “0 to 159”, the effect content of the over-winning effect is “no” (that is, not executed), and “160 to 199”. If so, it becomes a “bubble”.

  Thus, the over-winning table 222b3 is configured such that “bubbles” are less likely to be selected as the over-winning effect than the predictive over-winning table 222b2. As a result, when “bubble” is displayed as an over-winning effect, the player can be expected to subsequently win a big hit, and the player's interest can be improved.

  In this control example, one of the three types of “no”, “bubble”, or “fish school” is selected as the over-winning effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. You may comprise so that it may select from four types, and it may naturally be made to select from two types. Further, the content of the effect may be configured such that “None” (that is, not executed) is not selected, and the over-winning effect is displayed every time the over-winning is made. Thereby, it can be set as the game machine which a player can understand that it was over-winning.

  Furthermore, as an over-winning effect, information indicating the number of game balls over-winning may be displayed. Thereby, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that allows the player to easily grasp the number of game balls that have won over.

  Further, the production may be varied according to the number of game balls that have won over. Thereby, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the number of game balls over-winned, so that the interest of the player can be improved.

  Next, the details of the ending table 222c will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 77 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ending table 222c. The ending table 222c is a table used to select an ending effect at the end of the jackpot game. As shown in FIG. 77A, the ending table 222c includes a winning ending table 222c1 and a predictive ending table 222c2. An outlier ending table 222c3 is provided.

  The winning ending table 222c1 is a table that is used when there is winning information that is a big hit among the pending winning information. As shown in FIG. 77 (b), the value of the effect counter 223f and the content of the effect selected as the ending effect are defined in the hit ending table 222c1.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 77 (b), when the value of the effect counter 223g is “0 to 19”, “None” (that is, not executed) is selected as the effect content of the ending effect, In the case of “20 to 59”, “bubble” is selected, in the case of “60 to 99”, “special bubble” is selected, and in the case of “100 to 199”, “fish school” is selected.

  The predictive ending table 222c2 includes winning information that will be a big hit if it shifts to the probability-changing gaming state in the pending winning information, and it changes to the probability-changing gaming state before the change based on the pending winning information is started. This table is used when there is a possibility of migration.

  As shown in FIG. 77 (c), the sign ending table 222c2 defines the value of the effect counter 223f and the effect content selected as the ending effect, and “bubble” as an over-winning effect during the jackpot game Is different depending on the number of times selected (the value of the bubble number counter 223j).

  Specifically, when the value of the bubble counter 223j is “0 to 4” and the value of the effect counter 223g is “0 to 149”, the effect content of the ending effect is “none” (that is, not executed). ) Is selected, “Bubble” is selected if “150 to 179”, and “Special Bubble” is selected if “180 to 199”.

  If the value of the bubble counter 223j is “5 to 15” and the value of the effect counter 223g is “0 to 99”, the content of the effect of the ending effect is selected as “None” (that is, not executed). If “100 to 159”, “Bubble” is selected, and if “160 to 199”, “Special Bubble” is selected.

  If the value of the bubble count counter 223j is “16 or more” and the value of the effect counter 223g is “0 to 49”, “None” (that is, not executed) is selected as the effect content of the ending effect. If it is “50 to 99”, “bubble” is selected, and if it is “100 to 199”, “special bubble” is selected.

  As described above, when many “bubble” effects are displayed as over-winning effects, it is easy to select an ending effect of “bubbles” or “special bubbles”, which suggests that there is a high possibility that a big hit will occur afterwards. It is configured as follows. As a result, even though a large number of “bubbles” are selected (displayed) in the over winning effect, an effect with a low expectation (for example, “none”) is selected in the ending effect, so that the player's game It is possible to prevent (suppress) a decrease in motivation.

  Further, when the ending effect is selected using the predictive ending table 222c2, there is a high possibility that it will be a big hit thereafter. Therefore, if many “bubble” effects are displayed as over-winning effects, it is easy to select an effect that suggests that there is a high probability of a big win after that, that is, the reliability of the displayed effect is high. Will be. Thereby, as the number of over-winning game balls increases, a privilege that the reliability of the ending effect is improved can be given, and the interest of the player can be improved.

  The off-end ending table 222c3 is a table used when there is no winning information that becomes a big hit if the game proceeds to the probability-changing gaming state in the pending winning information. As shown in FIG. 77 (d), the outlier ending table 222c2 defines the value of the effect counter 223f and the effect content selected as the ending effect.

  Specifically, if the value of the effect counter 223g is “0 to 159”, “None” (that is, not executed) is selected as the effect content of the ending effect, and “bubble” if “160 to 189”. If “190-199” is selected, “special bubble” is selected.

  In the present control example, the definition of the value of the effect counter 223f and the content of the effect is changed only in the sign ending table 222c2 according to the value of the bubble count counter 223j, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the same may be applied to the winning ending table 222c1 and the offending ending table 222c3.

  Next, the sub liquid crystal driving scenario 222d will be described with reference to FIG. In the sub liquid crystal drive scenario 222d, various motors (slide motor 431, rotation motor 311 and reversing motor 531) for changing the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 of the sub liquid crystal device 523 are driven. Is stored.

  Specifically, the slide drive scenario 222d1 for driving the slide motor 431 that slides the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2, and the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 rotate in the circumferential direction. A rotation driving scenario 222d2 for driving the rotating motor 311 to be driven and an inversion driving scenario 222d3 for driving the inversion motor 531 for inverting the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are provided.

  First, the content of the slide drive scenario 222d1 will be described with reference to FIG. In the slide drive scenario 222d1, a set value (operation speed (pps), set to the motor control IC (motor driver) corresponding to the drive scenario counter 223m indicating the elapsed time since the start of the fluctuation display is displayed. The number of operation steps and the operation direction) are defined.

  As shown in FIG. 78 (b), in accordance with the value “1” of the drive scenario counter 223m, an operation for sliding the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 from the separated position to the adjacent position (outward path) Information related to the operation of () is stored. Specifically, 50 pps is defined as the operation speed, 100 is defined as the number of operation steps, and the positive direction is defined as the operation direction. This setting content is output (set) to the motor driver of the slide motor 431. Note that 100 steps means the number of steps from the separation position to the proximity position.

  Here, the operation speed of 50 pps means that 50 pulses (steps) are output to the motor driver per second, so that the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 operate 100 steps (moves from the separation position to the proximity position). The time required for the transmission is 100/50 seconds (2 seconds).

  Corresponding to the value “5001” of the drive scenario counter 223m, information related to an operation (return path operation) for sliding the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 from the proximity position to the separation position is stored. Yes. Specifically, 50 pps is defined as the operation speed, 100 is defined as the number of operation steps, and the negative direction is defined as the operation direction. This setting content is output (set) to the motor driver of the slide motor 431.

  Here, since the driving scenario counter 223m is a counter that is incremented by 1 every 1 ms, the value of the driving scenario counter 223m is “5001” because the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are moved from the proximity position. 5 seconds after the slide displacement is started to the separation position (that is, 3 seconds after the completion of the slide displacement for 2 seconds).

  Then, in correspondence with the value “7001” of the drive scenario counter 223m, “END” information indicating the end of the drive scenario is stored. The value of the drive scenario counter 223m becomes “7001” two seconds after the operation for sliding the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 from the close position to the separate position is started (that is, And when the slide displacement of the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 from the proximity position to the separation position is completed. By reading this “END” data, it is determined that all operations defined in the operation scenario have been executed.

  In this way, in the slide drive scenario 222d1, the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 slide from the separated position to the adjacent position over 2 seconds, and thereafter maintained at the separated position for 3 seconds. It slides from the proximity position to the separation position over a period of seconds.

  Next, the contents of the rotation drive scenario 222d2 will be described with reference to FIG. Similarly, in the rotational drive scenario 222d2, a set value (operation speed (pps)) set for the motor control IC (motor driver) corresponding to the drive scenario counter 223m indicating the elapsed time since the start of the fluctuation display. , The number of operation steps, and the operation direction) are defined.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 78 (c), the third symbol display device 81 and the sub liquid crystal display device 523 correspond to the first rotation position (upper display) corresponding to the value “1” of the drive scenario counter 223m. The upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 become the left and right at the second rotation position (position rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise from the first rotation position) from the surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2. Information related to the operation for rotating in the circumferential direction (outward operation) is stored. Specifically, 120 pps is defined as the operation speed, 360 is defined as the number of operation steps, and the positive direction is defined as the operation direction.

  Corresponding to the value “8001” of the drive scenario counter 223m, the third symbol display device 81, the sub liquid crystal display device 523, and the operation for rotating in the circumferential direction from the second rotation position to the first rotation position (return path operation) ) Is stored. Specifically, 120 pps is defined as the operation speed, 360 is defined as the number of operation steps, and the negative direction is defined as the operation direction.

  Then, in correspondence with the value “12001” of the drive scenario counter 223m, “END” information indicating the end of the drive scenario is stored.

  As described above, in the rotation drive scenario 222d2, the third symbol display device 81 and the sub liquid crystal display device 523 rotate from the first rotation position to the second rotation position over 3 seconds, and then the second rotation position for 5 seconds. Then, it rotates again from the second rotational position to the first position over 3 seconds.

  Next, the contents of the inversion driving scenario 222d3 will be described with reference to FIG. Similarly, in the reverse drive scenario 222d3, a setting value (operation speed (pps)) set for the motor control IC (motor driver) corresponding to the drive scenario counter 223m indicating the elapsed time since the start of the fluctuation display. , The number of operation steps, and the operation direction) are defined.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 78 (d), the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is in the normal position (the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are on the front side corresponding to the value “1” of the drive scenario counter 223m. Information related to the operation for reversing from the position to the reversal position (the position where the upper decorative surface 523b1 and the lower decorative surface 523b2 are on the front side) is stored. Specifically, 90 pps is defined as the operation speed, 180 is defined as the number of operation steps, and the positive direction is defined as the operation direction.

  Corresponding to the value “5001” of the drive scenario counter 223m, information related to the operation (return path operation) for the sub liquid crystal display device 523 to perform the reverse rotation again from the reverse position to the normal position is stored. Specifically, 90 pps is defined as the operation speed, 180 is defined as the number of operation steps, and the negative direction is defined as the operation direction.

  Then, in correspondence with the value “8001” of the drive scenario counter 223m, “END” information indicating the end of the drive scenario is stored.

  In this way, in the inversion driving scenario 222d3, the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is inverted from the normal position to the inversion position over 2 seconds, and then maintained at the inversion position for 3 seconds, and then again from the inversion position over 2 seconds. Flip to position.

  In this control example, the operation for one motor is defined in each drive scenario, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a driving scenario in which the reversing motor 531 is driven after the sliding motor 431 is driven may be defined. As a result, the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 can be slid to the close positions and then reversed. As a result, the variation of driving (displacement) of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 increases, so that the interest of the player can be improved.

  Returning to FIG. 75, the description will be continued. The RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 75 (b). As shown in FIG. 75 (b), in the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113, the winning information storage area 223a, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b, the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c, the fluctuation start flag 223d, and the stop Type selection flag 223e, effect counter 223f, round number counter 223g, sub-winning number counter 223h, fish school flag 223i, bubble count counter 223j, clock counter 223k, driving scenario counter 223m, driving scenario storage area 223n, other memory area 223z, Is provided at least.

  The winning information storage area 223a has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area), and winning information is stored in each of these areas. Based on the information stored in this winning information storage area 223a, the voice lamp control device 113 can discriminate the lottery result of the reserved ball before the start of the fluctuation.

  The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b, like the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110, is a variable effect (variable display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81). ), And a counter that counts up to four times the number of suspended balls (the number of standby times) of the fluctuating effects held in the main controller 110. That is, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the first special symbol is set based on the reserved ball number command output from the main controller 110.

  As described above, the sound lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to obtain the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of held balls based on the number of held balls command transmitted from the main control device 110, and manages the number of held balls by the special symbol 1 held ball number counter 223b. It has become.

  Specifically, in the main control device 110, when the number of held balls in the variable display is added by entering the first winning opening 64, or the main control device 110 executes the variable display in the special symbol and holds it. When the number of balls is subtracted, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

  When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 acquires the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 from the reserved ball number command, It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b (see S1907 in FIG. 102). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special symbol 1 retained ball number counter 223b in accordance with the retained ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, so that the special symbol 1 retained ball of the main controller 110 is updated. The value can be updated while synchronizing with the number counter 203d.

  The value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is used to display the reserved ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in response to receiving the reserved ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the reserved ball number indicated by the command in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and also stores the special symbol 1 held ball number after the storage. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the counter 223b, a display holding ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114.

  When the display control device 114 receives this display reserved ball number command, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the value of the reserved ball number indicated by the command, that is, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113. Image drawing is controlled so that several symbols are displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is changed in synchronization with the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110. Therefore, the number of reserved ball numbers displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed in synchronization with the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of held balls whose variation display is held.

  The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c is different from the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b only in that it is a counter corresponding to the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110. Detailed description is omitted.

  The variation start flag 223d is turned on when a variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1902 in FIG. 102), and is turned off when variation display is set in the third symbol display device 81. (Refer to S2302 in FIG. 106). When the fluctuation start flag 223d is turned on, the display fluctuation pattern command is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command.

  The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S1802) of the main process (see FIG. 101) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the display control device 114. The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. Display control of the variation effect is started.

  The stop type selection flag 223e is turned on when a stop type command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (see S1905 in FIG. 102), and is turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S2309 in FIG. 106). When the stop type selection flag 223e is turned on, the stop type is set as it is based on the stop type extracted from the received stop type command (a jackpot type in the case of a jackpot).

  The effect counter 223f is a counter that is repeatedly updated in the range of 0 to 198 used for the notice effect and various lotteries. Although not shown, the value is updated by one each time the main process (see FIG. 101) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is executed.

  The round number counter 223g is a counter for determining the number of rounds executed in the jackpot game. The round number counter 223g is incremented by 1 when a round number command is received from the main controller 110 (see S2004 in FIG. 103), and is initialized to 0 when an ending command is received (see S2013 in FIG. 103). ). The value of the round number counter 223g is used when an over winning effect is selected in the over winning process (see FIG. 104). By varying the selection ratio of the over winning effect according to the value of the round number counter 223g, it is possible to select (display) the over winning effect at a different ratio for each round.

  The sub-winning number counter 223h is a counter for determining the number of winnings to the specific winning port 65a in the round of the big hit game. The sub-winning number counter 223h is updated according to the winning-number command received from the main controller 110 (see S2007 in FIG. 103), and is a normal win or over-winning according to the value of the sub-winning number counter 223h. Is discriminated (see S2008 in FIG. 103). Although not shown, it is initialized to 0 when a new round number command is received.

  The fish school flag 223i is a flag for determining whether or not the “fish school” effect is selected (displayed) in the over winning effect. The fish school flag 223i is set on when the over-winning effect of “fish school” is selected in the over winning process (see FIG. 104) (see S2109 in FIG. 104), and is set off in the ending setting process (see FIG. 104). (See S2210 in FIG. 105). In the ending setting process (see FIG. 105), when the fish flag 223i is on (S2201: Yes in FIG. 105), the continuous ending effect is selected as the ending effect. As a result, it is possible to suppress (prevent) the problem that the effect suggesting that the probability variation gaming state is given is executed (displayed) in duplicate, and the player feels uncomfortable. Furthermore, it is possible to prevent the so-called downfall in which the “bubble” effect is displayed in the subsequent ending effect although the “fish school” effect is displayed as the over winning effect.

  The bubble number counter 223j is a counter for determining the number of times the “bubble” effect is selected as the over winning effect. The number-of-bubbles counter 223j is incremented by 1 when “over bubbles” over-winning effect is selected in the over-winning process (see FIG. 104), and is initialized to 0 in the ending setting process. (See S2211 in FIG. 105). The value of the bubble number counter 223j is used when an ending effect is selected in the ending setting process (see FIG. 105).

  The clock counter 223k is a 16-bit counter that is repeatedly updated between 0 and 65535, which is counted in accordance with a clock change input from the clock generator 900. The clock of the clock generation device 900 is also input to the display control device 114, and the effect can be synchronized with the display control device 114 by performing the effect based on the value of the clock counter 223k.

  Specifically, in the ramp editing process (see FIG. 107), when it is determined that the clock signal input from the clock generator 900 has changed, the value of the clock counter 223k is incremented by one. The production timing is determined based on the value of the clock counter 223k. For example, when the value of the clock counter 223k reaches 1000, the lighting of the sub LED 290 and the display of the sub symbol are started, and when the value reaches 1002, the sub LED 290 is turned off and the sub symbol is not displayed. It is determined.

  Note that the clock of the clock generator 900 changes at a period of once every 100 ms (that is, a clock with a frequency of 5 Hz), and the clock counter 223k is incremented by 1 every 100 ms. Therefore, when it is desired to start an effect such as turning on an LED after 2 seconds, it may be determined to start the effect from a value obtained by adding 20 to the current value of the clock counter 223k. Although not shown, the clock counter 223k is configured to return to 0 when 1 is added when the value is 65535.

  The clock of the clock generator 900 is not limited to a clock that changes at a cycle of 100 ms (that is, a clock with a frequency of 5 Hz). For example, it may be changed at a cycle of once every 50 ms (that is, a clock having a frequency of 10 Hz), or may be changed at a cycle of once every 500 ms (that is, a clock having a frequency of 1 Hz). When the clock frequency of the clock generator 900 becomes high (that is, the change interval becomes short), the update interval of the clock counter 223k may be made short. Thereby, even when the clock frequency of the clock generator 900 becomes high, the clock counter 223k can be updated without losing the change.

  The drive scenario counter 223m is a counter for determining the timing for executing control of various drive motors. The drive scenario counter 223m is set to 0 when a variation pattern in which a drive scenario is set is set in the variation display setting process (see FIG. 106) (S2305: Yes in FIG. 106). Then, in the sub liquid crystal driving process (FIG. 108) executed every 1 ms, one is added when a driving scenario is set in a driving scenario storage area 223n described later. Information for driving the motor set in the drive scenario storage area 223n is acquired according to the value of the drive scenario counter 223m, and various drive motors (slide motor 431, rotation motor 311, reversing motor 531) are acquired. ) Is controlled.

  The driving scenario storage area 223n is an area for storing the sub liquid crystal driving scenario 222d stored in the ROM 222 described above. The driving scenario storage area 223m stores the corresponding driving scenario 222d when a variation pattern in which the driving scenario is set is set in the variation display setting process (see FIG. 106) (S2305: Yes in FIG. 106). The Based on the drive scenario information stored in the drive scenario storage area 223m, various drive motors (slide motor 431, rotation motor 311 and reverse motor 531) are driven and controlled.

  In addition, the other memory area 223z includes a command storage area (not shown) that temporarily stores a command received from the main controller 110 until processing corresponding to the command is performed. Note that the command storage area includes a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 102) of the sound lamp processing device 113 is executed, the first stored command is read out of the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area. The command is analyzed and processing corresponding to the command is performed.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol display device 81, and the like. Based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol display device 81 displays the variation of the third symbol ( Fluctuation effect) and notice effect are controlled.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol display device 81, and the like. Based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol display device 81 displays the variation of the third symbol ( Fluctuation effect) and notice effect are controlled.

  FIG. 79 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

  The input side of the input port 238 is connected to the output side of the sound lamp controller 113 and the clock generator 900, and the MPU 231, work RAM 233, character ROM 234, and image controller 237 are connected to the output side of the input port 238 on the bus line. 240 is connected. A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected via a bus line 241. Further, a third symbol display device 81 and a sub liquid crystal display device (LCD) 523 are connected to the output side of the output port 239.

  It should be noted that the pachinko machine 10 is a symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if it is a different model that has different lottery probabilities for special symbol jackpots or different number of prize balls to be paid out for one special symbol jackpot. Since there are models having the same specifications, the display control device 114 is made a common part to reduce costs.

  In the following, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

  First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches the instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is configured to receive a system reset from the power supply device 115 immediately after power-on (including power recovery from a power failure; the same applies hereinafter). When the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a Is automatically set to “0000H” by the hardware of the MPU 231. Each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. When the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the pointer value designated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

  Although details will be described later, in this control example, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM like a conventional gaming machine. Is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As will be described in detail later, the character ROM 234 is configured by a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area. As a result, not only image data but also a control program or the like can be sufficiently stored. If a control program or the like is stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program or the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure occurrence rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the reading speed becomes slow particularly when random access is performed. For example, in the case of reading data continuously arranged on a plurality of pages, the data on the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed, but an address is specified for reading the data on the first page. It takes a long time for the data to be output. Further, when reading non-continuous data, a long time is required every time the data is read. As described above, since the NAND flash memory is slow in reading, if the MPU 231 directly reads out the control program from the character ROM 234 and executes various processes, it takes time to read out the instructions constituting the control program. May occur, and even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

  Therefore, in this control example, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. Store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. As will be described later, the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM), and data is read and written at high speed. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, it is possible to maintain high processing performance in the display control device 114, and it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects using the third symbol display device 81.

  The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores a control program executed in the MPU 231 and image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 via the bus line 240 after canceling the system reset, and transfers a control program stored in a second program storage area 234a1 (to be described later) of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 converts image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 (to be described later) of the character ROM 234 into a resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237, Transfer to normal video RAM 236.

  The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

  The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234. Most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81 are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 for storing, and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (such as a character) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained with a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thus, in this pachinko machine, for example, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated.

  In addition, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 in a state where a lot of image data is stored in the character storage area 234a2. Thus, the control program and fixed value data are provided for storing the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without storing the dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. Since it can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure occurrence rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like. Are output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  Here, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data has been written) are generated when data is written, or defective data blocks in which data cannot be written are generated. Or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and is known so that data is read from and written to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding a defective data block. Performs data address conversion.

  The ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit. Thus, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

  In addition, since the ROM controller 234b analyzes the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a and avoids access to the defective data block, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 have different defective data in each NAND flash memory 234a. The character ROM 234 can be easily accessed without considering the block address position. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the access control to the character ROM 234 from becoming complicated.

  The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address assigned to the character ROM 234 is designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b is for one page including data corresponding to the designated address (for example, 2 kilobytes). It is determined whether or not the data is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If not set, data for one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the designated address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. To do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction processing, and then outputs data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. Thereby, for example, the ROM controller 234b outputs the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or is designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the designated address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 is set to the other A process of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 can be performed in parallel. Therefore, the responsiveness in reading out the character ROM 234 can be improved.

  The NOR ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has an extremely small capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND flash memory 234a. ). In the NOR type ROM 234d, among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, a program that is not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, first after the system reset is released in the MPU 231. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

  The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. The MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. As a result, the display control device 114 can be in a state where various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after releasing the system reset within the capacity range of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in the boot program. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, instructions for 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes) are stored. The number of boot program instructions stored in the first program storage area 234d1 only needs to be less than or equal to the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

  When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to “0000H” by hardware and designates the address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a for the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address “0000H” is designated on the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d is transferred to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 231.

  When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds 1 to the instruction pointer 231a, and sends the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. Specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 reads from the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR ROM 234d while the address specified by the bus line 240 is an address indicating the program stored in the NOR ROM 234d. The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231.

  In this control example, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released in the boot program is read from the NOR ROM 234d. The reason for storing is in the following reason. In other words, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time for data to be output after the address is specified when reading the first page of data. There's a problem.

  When all the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. In this case, the character ROM 234 must read out data for one page including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address “0000H” from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a lot of time from reading to setting to the buffer RAM 234c. It takes a lot of waiting time to receive the code. Therefore, since the time required for starting the MPU 231 becomes longer, as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, since the NOR-type ROM is a memory that can read data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released is stored in the NOR-type ROM 234d in the boot program. Thus, when the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately loads the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d into the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after designating the address “0000H”, and can activate the MPU 231 in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  The boot program is a control program other than the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The program storage area of the work RAM 233 stores fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control program by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). It is programmed to transfer to 233a and data table storage area 233b. Then, the MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released, in the first program storage area 234d1. While using a bank different from the buffer RAM 234c, a predetermined amount is transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a.

  Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as “0000H”. In response to this, when the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c, the boot program is set only in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a in accordance with the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, it is not necessary to set the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 again in the buffer RAM 234c after the transfer process, so that the time related to the boot process can be shortened.

  When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a, the instruction pointer 231a is transferred to the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to set the first predetermined address. Thus, after the system reset is released, when the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, the instruction pointer 231a is transferred to the first predetermined storage area 233a. Set to the address.

  Therefore, when a predetermined amount of programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a, Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction instead of reading the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1. Then, various processes are executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at a high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  Here, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is the control program transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. It is programmed to be included, and programmed to set the instruction pointer 231a with the first address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

  Thereby, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. The remaining boot program included in the control program is executed.

  In this remaining boot program, the remaining control program that has not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table and a transfer data table described later) that are used in the control program are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. At the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, an initialization process (see S1802 in FIG. 34) executed after the end of the boot process (see S2601 in FIG. 109) by the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the second predetermined address. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

  By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address. Thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

  Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. Thus, the MPU 231 can read out the control program from the work RAM constituted by the DRAM having a high reading speed and perform various controls. Accordingly, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, as described above, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released without storing the entire boot program in the NOR-type ROM 234d. Even if the program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small-capacity NOR-type ROM 234d. Can do.

  The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a drawing list (see FIG. 83), which will be described later, transmitted from the MPU 231, and either one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, which will be described later. The image drawn in the buffer is developed, and the image information for one frame previously developed in the other frame buffer is output to the third symbol display device 81 to display the image on the third symbol display device 81. . The image controller 237 performs the image drawing process for one frame and the image display process for one frame on the image display time for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this control example). Parallel processing in

  The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as a “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when drawing processing of an image for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V-interrupt signal, it executes a V-interrupt process (see FIG. 111B) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next one frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process for the image for the next one frame, and also executes a process for causing the third symbol display device 81 to display the image previously developed by the drawing.

  As described above, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in accordance with the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and gives a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 performs the image drawing process and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 every processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image when the image drawing process or the display process is not finished, so that drawing of a new image is started in the middle of drawing the image, It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  The image controller 237 also executes a process of transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and the transfer data information included in the drawing list.

  The image drawing is performed using image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on an instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

  Here, the NAND flash memory facilitates an increase in the capacity of the ROM, while the reading speed is slower than other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to As will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled to be resident without being overwritten.

  Thus, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws an image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed during image drawing. The time required for the readout can be omitted, and the image drawn can be immediately displayed and the image drawn on the third symbol display device 81 can be displayed.

  In particular, the resident video RAM 235 resident image data of frequently displayed images or image data of images to be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 110 or the display control device 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness until a certain image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Further, when the image is drawn using the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 is necessary for drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for image drawing, but at the time of image drawing, the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used. Therefore, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured as described above, and it is possible to omit the time required for the reading. it can.

  Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, it is not necessary to prepare a large capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

  The image controller 237 includes a buffer RAM 237a configured by an SRAM of 132 kilobytes that is a capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

  In the image data transfer instruction that the MPU 231 performs to the image controller 237 according to the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list, the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 storing the image data to be transferred is used. Final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236), and start of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) An address is included. Note that the data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

  The image controller 237 reads out data for one block from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 according to the various information of the transfer instruction, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used, the buffer RAM 237a Is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. The process is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source end address indicated by the transfer instruction is transferred.

  Thus, the image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can do. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, the video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing process. It is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being in time.

  In addition, since the image controller 237 transfers image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and third symbol display. The period that is not used for the display process on the device 81 can be easily determined, and the process can be simplified.

  The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is maintained without being overwritten while the power is turned on. 235e and an error message image area 235f, at least a power-on variation image area 235b and a third symbol area 235d are provided.

  The power-on main image area 235a is a power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 from when the power is turned on until all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This area stores the corresponding data. In the power-on variation image area 235b, the game is started by the player while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640 is entered. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to a power-on variation image that displays a lottery result performed in the main control device 110 by a variation effect when a ball is detected.

  When the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started, the MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S4704 in FIG. 123).

  Returning to FIG. 79, the description will be continued. The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The back images prepared in the character ROM 234 (for example, the back A corresponding to the “city stage”, the back B corresponding to the “empty stage”, and the back C corresponding to the “island stage”) are all shown in the third symbol display device. 81. The image is longer in the horizontal direction than the display area displayed in 81, and the image controller 237 displays the rear image on the third symbol display device 81 while scrolling from left to right in the horizontal direction. Is drawn. As a result, the back image is scrolled and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in a smooth connection.

  The third symbol area 235d is an area for resident the third symbol used in the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-described ten types of main symbols (see FIG. 5) with the numbers “0” to “9” as the third symbols are resident. As a result, when changing effects are performed on the 3rd symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. Fluctuation production can be started quickly. Therefore, the first symbol display device 37 changes in the third symbol display device 81 in spite of the fact that the first symbol display device 37 has started changing after the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640 has entered the ball. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state where the production is not started immediately.

  In addition, in the third symbol area 235d, as a main symbol not numbered "0" to "9", a main symbol composed of a rear symbol such as a wooden box, a character such as a rear symbol and a planer, a furoshiki, a helmet, etc. The image data corresponding to the main symbol consisting of the attached symbol imitating the image is also resident. These image data are used for the demonstration effect displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start prize is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the one variation effect was stopped. It is done. Thus, when the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a main symbol without a number is displayed as the third symbol in the demonstration effect. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demo state by visually recognizing the main symbols without numerals from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

  The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In the pachinko machine 10, various characters such as “boy” are displayed in accordance with various effects, and data corresponding to these characters is displayed in the character design area 235e, so that display control is performed. When the device 114 changes the character design based on the content of the command received from the audio lamp control device 113, the device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but reads it into the character design area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. A predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237 by reading the image data resident in advance. Thereby, since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used for the character ROM 234, the character design can be changed immediately.

  The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when the sound lamp control device 113 detects vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the sound lamp control device 113 generates a vibration error. The display controller 114 is notified by an error command. Further, when the occurrence of other errors is detected by the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. When receiving an error command, the display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error from the viewpoint of preventing the player's fraud and protecting the player against the error. In the pachinko machine 10, since the image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in the error message image area 235f in advance, the display control device 114 performs the error message of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out image data resident in the image area 235f in advance, each error message image can be immediately drawn by the image controller 237. This eliminates the need to sequentially read out image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used as the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is received after the error command is received. It can be displayed immediately.

  The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated as needed, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

  The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of subareas, and the type of image data stored in each subarea is predetermined for each subarea.

  The MPU 231 transmits image data required for subsequent image drawing out of the image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the sub-areas provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 from the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a specified sub-area designated in the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

  The image data transfer instruction is performed by including transfer data information in a drawing list (to be described later) in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can perform an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction simply by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

  The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for expanding an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image for one frame drawn in accordance with an instruction from the MPU 231 into one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby storing one frame in the frame buffer. While the image is developed and the image is developed in one of the frame buffers, the image information of one frame previously developed from the other frame buffer is read, and the third symbol display device 81 is read together with the drive signal. By transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 executes a process for displaying the image for one frame.

  As described above, by providing the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c as the frame buffers, the image controller 237 simultaneously develops an image for one frame drawn in one of the frame buffers. The first frame image developed from the other frame buffer can be read out, and the read one frame image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  A frame buffer for developing an image for one frame and a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 include an image drawing process for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds to be completed, the MPU 231 designates one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c alternately.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame, and When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image for one frame after 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information is read out. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. The

  Further, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. Is done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. The Thereafter, a frame buffer that expands an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately alternating and designating, it is possible to continuously display an image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing an image for one frame.

  The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing a control program and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing work data and flags used when executing various control programs by the MPU 231. Composed. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a time counter 233h, and stored image data discrimination. It has at least a flag 233i, a drawing target buffer flag 233j, a display clock counter 233m, a lighting clock storage area 233n, a drive data storage area 233p, a demonstration display flag 233y, and a finalized display flag 223z.

  The program storage area 233a is an area for storing a control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in this program storage area 233a. When all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 executes various controls using the control program stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 Can be used to easily perform diversified and complicated effects.

  The data table storage area 233b includes a display data table describing display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 over time for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main controller 110, and display data. This is an area for storing transfer data information of image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and transfer data table that defines transfer timing among image data used in one effect displayed by the table.

  These data tables are normally stored as a kind of fixed value data in the second program storage area 434 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and are in accordance with a boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. When all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 thereafter controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device Using 81, it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

  Here, details of various data tables will be described. First, the display data table is prepared for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. Display data tables corresponding to the display related to the command, the round effect, and the demonstration effect are prepared.

  The variation effect is an effect that is started in the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command is received from the sound lamp control device 113. When a display variation pattern command is received, a display stop type command indicating a variation effect stop type is also received. For example, when a variation effect is started, if the stop type of the variation effect is out, the stop symbol indicating the outage is finally stopped and displayed, while the stop type of the variation effect is a jackpot A, a jackpot B If it is any of these, the stop symbol which shows each jackpot will be stop-displayed finally. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in this variation effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

  By notifying the short time period of the normal symbol in the ending effect, the player can easily recognize the short time period of the normal symbol. The longer the short time period of this normal symbol, the greater the chance that the ball will pass through the normal entrance 67, so there will be more opportunities for the normal symbol to be drawn, and there will also be more opportunities to hit the normal symbol. . Therefore, since there are many opportunities for the electric symbol to be released as a big bonus for the normal symbol, it becomes easier for the ball to enter the second winning opening 640 and the special symbol lottery is easily performed. Therefore, the longer the short time period of the displayed normal symbol, the stronger the expectation that a special symbol will be a big hit, and it can be given to the player, so the player's willingness to participate in the game can be increased it can. Therefore, the player can be continuously motivated to participate in the game.

  In addition, since the second winning opening 640 is a winning opening from which five balls are paid out as winning balls when a ball enters, the electric symbol is released as a big hit of a normal symbol, and the ball becomes the second winning opening. As it becomes easier to enter 640, the number of prize balls increases. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 is in a state where the number of possessed balls is difficult to decrease or the number of possessed balls is not decreased even when a game is performed. You can get a feeling of a period that you can get a big jackpot of special symbols in the absence. Therefore, since the player's willingness to participate in the game can be increased, the player can have the willingness to participate in the game continuously.

  In addition, in the ending effect, the player may make a special symbol in the lottery of the special symbol held by notifying that any lottery result of the special symbol lots on hold will be a big win of the special symbol. Therefore, the player can have a sense of expectation that a special symbol will be a big hit. Therefore, since the player's willingness to participate in the game can be increased, the player can be continuously given willingness to participate in the game.

  As described above, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect associated with the start winning is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the one variation effect was stopped. The third symbol composed of the main symbols not numbered “0” to “9” is stopped and displayed, and only the back image changes. If a demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a player or a hall-related person can recognize that no game is being played in the pachinko machine 10.

  In the data table storage area 233b, one display data table corresponding to the display related to the game information related command, the display related to the jackpot related command, the round effect, and the demonstration effect is stored. Further, the variation display data table, which is a display data table for variation effects, has 32 tables in total for one variation effect pattern, if there are 32 variable effect patterns to be set.

  Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 81 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the variable display data table in the display data table. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address in which the time for displaying an image for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this control example) is represented as one unit. The content (drawing content) of an image for one frame is defined in detail.

  The drawing content specifies the type of sprite for each sprite that is a display object constituting an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, and translucency according to the type of sprite. Drawing information for drawing the sprite on the third symbol display device 81 such as value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information is defined.

  The type of sprite is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 on which the sprite is to be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for designating an enlargement ratio with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite displayed according to the enlargement ratio is specified. If the enlargement ratio is larger than 100%, the sprite is displayed in an enlarged size than the standard size. If the enlargement ratio is less than 100%, the sprite is reduced in size than the standard size. Is displayed.

  The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite. The higher the translucency value, the more the image is displayed so that the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The α blending information is information for specifying a known α blending coefficient used when performing superimposition processing with other sprites. The color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. The filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when the designated sprite is drawn.

  In the variable display data table, as a drawing content for one frame defined corresponding to each address, one back image, nine third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Light in the image. Drawing information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of characters, characters used for various effects such as boy images and characters, is defined for each address. Note that one or more pieces of information regarding effects and characters are defined according to the contents to be displayed in the frame.

  Here, the display position of the back image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information Since it is constant, only the back surface type, which is information for specifying the back image type, is defined in the variable display data table. This back surface type indicates whether to display any of the back surfaces A to C corresponding to the stage selected by the player (any one of the “city stage”, “empty stage”, and “island stage”), or the back surface A to C. Information specifying whether to display a back image different from C is described. The back surface type also includes information specifying which back image to display when specifying that a back image different from the back surfaces A to C is displayed.

  When the MPU 231 specifies that any one of the back surfaces A to C is displayed according to the back surface type, the MPU 231 specifies the back image corresponding to the stage designated by the player among the back surfaces A to C as the drawing target. In addition, the range of the rear image to be displayed with respect to the frame is specified as time elapses. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a back image different from the back surfaces A to C, the back image to be displayed is specified from the back surface type.

  In this control example, the case where only the back surface type is specified as the rendering content of the back image in the display data table will be described. Instead, the back surface type and which range of the back image corresponding to the back surface type is described instead. Position information indicating whether or not should be displayed may be defined. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame based on the elapsed time after the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information is displayed.

  Further, the position information may be information indicating an elapsed time from the start of image drawing (or display on the third symbol display device 81) based on the display data table. In this case, the MPU 231 displayed the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when drawing of the image (or display on the third symbol display device 81) was started based on the display database. The position is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time since the drawing of the image indicated by the position information (or display on the third symbol display device 81) is started.

  Further, the position information includes information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed and the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81 according to the rear surface type). May indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time from the start of display, and the type information of the position information (for example, the range of the range corresponding to the initial position) This is information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image was displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or display on the third symbol display device 81) was started. May be defined as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating the elapsed time but may be information indicating an address in which the range of the back image to be displayed is stored.

  In the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Symbol type offset information is described as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers assigned to the third symbols. Instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before and the variation effect performed this time. This is because it changes depending on the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information from when the change is started until a predetermined time elapses, the offset information from the stop symbol of the change effect performed immediately before is described. Thereby, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

  On the other hand, after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the fluctuation, an offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the sound lamp control device 113. Enter information. Thereby, the variation effect can be stopped with the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main control device 110.

  In addition, since a unique number is attached to each 3rd symbol, the 3rd symbol is displayed as a variation symbol in the previous variation effect or a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main controller 110. It is possible to identify the third symbol to be displayed easily from the offset information by managing the offset information with the number attached to the symbol and expressing the offset information by the difference between the digits attached to each third symbol.

  Also, in the symbol offset information, the third symbol fluctuates at a high speed for a predetermined time during which the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is changed to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect currently performed. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third symbol is variably displayed at a high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player, and during that time, the symbol of the change effect that was performed immediately before the symbol offset information is displayed. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect currently being performed, even if the continuity of the number 3 symbol is interrupted, the player will not recognize the discontinuity of the number continuity be able to.

  “Start” information indicating the start of the data table is described in “0000H” which is the top address of the display data table, and the data table is stored in the last address of the display data table (“02F0H” in the example of FIG. 21). "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address “0000H” in which the “Start” information is described and the address in which the “End” information is described, the rendering contents corresponding to the rendering mode to be specified in the display data table Is described.

  The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, and the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Each time the drawing process for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by one, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the drawing contents specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, The image content to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 83) described later is created. By sending this drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is given. As a result, the drawing contents are specified in the order defined in the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233f, so that the image as defined in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, in the display control device 114, according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like, The effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by simply replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d as appropriate, instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231. .

  Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is activated each time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed as in the conventional pachinko machine, the effect image is diversified. Since a large load is required for starting up and executing a complicated and enormous program, the processing capability of the display control device 114 is limited, and there is a possibility that the diversification of controllable effect images may be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

  Also, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer corresponding to the effect mode to be displayed is set, and a drawing list is displayed frame by frame according to the set data table. The reason that the pachinko machine 10 can create is that an effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in advance is determined based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the effect mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. The configuration to be realized can be realized for the first time based on the fact that the pachinko machine 10 is a configuration that determines in advance the presentation mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning.

  Next, details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 82 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, among the sprite image data used in the effect specified in the display data table, Transfer data information and transfer timing for transferring image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 are defined.

  If all the sprite image data used in the production defined in the display data table is stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Thereby, an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.

  The transfer data table corresponds to an address specified in the display data table, and transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as “transfer target image data”) to be transferred at the time indicated by the address. (Addresses “0001H” and “0097H” in FIG. 82 correspond). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

  On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transfer corresponding to the address. Is defined (corresponding to the address “0002H” in FIG. 82).

  As the transfer data information, the start address (storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are stored. Is included.

  Note that “0000H”, which is the start address of the transfer data table, describes “Start” information indicating the start of the data table, as in the display data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 15, “02F0H”) describes “End” information indicating the end of the data table. For each address between the address “0000H” in which “Start” information is described and the address in which “End” information is described, transfer data information of transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table Is described.

  When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, the display data table is displayed. If there is a transfer data table corresponding to, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in a transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, every time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f are specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 83) described later is created. In addition, transfer data information of image data of a predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data information is created in the created drawing list. to add.

  For example, in the example of FIG. 82, when the pointer 233f becomes “0001H” or “0097H”, the MPU 231 creates transfer data information defined by the address of the transfer data table based on the display data table. In addition to the drawing list, the drawing list after the addition is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is “0002H”, Null data is defined in the address “0002H” of the transfer data table, so it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start transfer, and is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

  When the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process.

  Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. When a predetermined sprite is drawn according to the display data table, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Then, it is possible to draw a predetermined sprite based on the display data table using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 displays data according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. As the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, so that the sprite image data used in the display data table is The character ROM 234 can be reliably transferred to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

  In the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  The transfer data table has a data structure similar to that of the display data table, and transfers image data to be transferred that should start transfer at the time indicated by the address corresponding to the address defined in the display data table. Since the data information is defined, the image data is surely stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the image data of the predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, since the transfer start timing can be instructed, a variety of effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed. be able to.

  The simple image display flag 233c is a flag indicating whether or not to display the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on variation image) on the third symbol display device 81. This simple image display flag 233c is displayed after image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM. The main process (see FIG. 109) executed by the MPU 231 is set to ON (see S2605 in FIG. 109). Then, when all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, in order to display an image other than the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, It is set to off (see S4705 in FIG. 123 (b)).

  The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 every time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S2901 in FIG. 111B). When the image display flag 233c is on, the simple command determination process (see S2911 in FIG. 111 (b)) and the simple display setting process so that the image at power-on 8 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. (See S2912 in FIG. 111 (b)). On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is OFF, the command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 112 to 118) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 119 to 122) are executed.

  Further, the simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S4601 in FIG. 123A), and the simple image display flag 233c is on. Since there is resident target image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235, a resident image transfer setting process for transferring the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is executed (see FIG. 123B). If the simple image display flag 233c is off, a normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 124) for transferring image data necessary for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

  The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to a command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. It is a buffer to do. The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. After selecting, the selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f one by one, and the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. A drawing list (see FIG. 83), which describes the contents of the image drawing instruction for, is generated. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

  The MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f one by one, and based on the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image to the image controller 237 is displayed frame by frame. A later-described drawing list (see FIG. 83) describing the drawing instruction content is generated. Thereby, the 3rd symbol display device 81 displays the effect corresponding to the display data table.

  The transfer data table buffer 233e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in accordance with a command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. Is a buffer for storing. The MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b in accordance with storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfers the selected transfer data table. Store in the data table buffer 233e. When all the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing Null data indicating that there is no transfer target image data in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  Then, the MPU 231 defines transfer data information of image data to be transferred specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e while adding the pointer 233f one by one. If this is the case (that is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is stored in a drawing list (see FIG. 83) that describes the image drawing instruction contents for the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

  Thereby, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, when image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in this transfer data table, it is necessary to draw the sprite when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table. The image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The pointer 233f is an address at which the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the transfer target image data is to be acquired from the display data table and the transfer data table respectively stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. It is for designating. The MPU 231 once initializes the pointer 233f to 0 as the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V-interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V-interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds from the image controller 237 completing the image rendering process for one frame (FIG. 111 (b) ), The pointer update process (see S4205 in FIG. 119) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

  Each time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 specifies the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the drawing list to be described later (See FIG. 83) is created, transfer data information of image data of a predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data Add information to the created drawing list.

  Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, it is possible to easily change the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 simply by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, a variety of effects can be displayed regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 341.

  Further, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is displayed before drawing of a predetermined sprite is started by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table. The image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 that is used in the above drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The drawing list area 233g is an image controller for drawing an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a drawing list instructed to 237.

  Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 83 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame. As shown in FIG. 16, the back image used for the image of one frame, the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 1). Symbol (Effect 1, Effect 2,...), Character (Character 1, Character 2,..., Reserved ball number symbol 1, Reserved ball number symbol 2,..., Error For each sprite (design), detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described. In the drawing list, transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is also described.

  Detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, The image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. Further, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. The standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is subjected to enlargement / reduction processing according to the enlargement ratio, rotation processing according to the rotation angle, and translucency according to the translucency value According to the α blending information, synthesis processing with other sprites, color tone correction processing according to the color information, and filtering processing according to the method specified by the information according to the filter specification information. After that, an image obtained by performing various processes on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. The drawn image is developed by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

  In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 displays the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the contents of the other image to be drawn (for example, the holding ball number symbol for displaying the holding ball number symbol). Generate detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used to draw an image for one frame based on images and warning images that notify the occurrence of errors. Create a drawing list by rearranging.

  Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the data of the sprite (display object) are the sprite type specified in the display data table and the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. Is generated accordingly. That is, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed, so that the MPU 231 corresponds to the sprite type. Thus, it is possible to immediately specify the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored, and easily include such information in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  In addition, the MPU 231 defines other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite in the display data table. Copy the information as it is.

  Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the order of the sprites to be arranged on the back side from the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and displays detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, then the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Effect (effect 1, effect 2,...) Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of characters (character 1, character 2,..., Retained ball number design 1, retained ball number design 2,..., Error design).

  The image controller 237 executes drawing processing of each sprite according to the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprite in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the most back side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the most front side.

  In addition, when the transfer data information is described at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the MPU 231 transfers the transfer data information (the character storing the transfer target image data). The storage source head address and the storage source last address in the ROM 234, and the storage destination head address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a in which the transfer target image data is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the image controller 237 reads an image from a predetermined area (area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

  The time counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 sets time data indicating the production effect time displayed based on the display data table in accordance with storing one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the production time by the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (in this control example, 20 milliseconds).

  Then, based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process and display process for one frame are completed, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 (FIG. 111 (b ))), The time counter 233h is decremented by 1 (see S4208 in FIG. 119). As a result, when the value of the time counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is ended, and performs it in accordance with the end of the effect. Various processes to be performed are executed.

  The stored image data discrimination flag 233i is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for each sprite for which the corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, respectively. It is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether or not there is.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i is generated by an initial setting process (see S2602 in FIG. 109) executed by the MPU 231 during the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data determination flag 233i generated here is set to “off” indicating that the storage state for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i is updated when a transfer instruction of transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 124) executed by the MPU 231. Is called. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite in which the transfer instruction is set is set to “ON” indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Further, the image data of other sprites that are to be stored in the same subarea of the image storage area 236a as that one sprite are always in an unstored state by storing the image data of one sprite. Therefore, the storage state corresponding to other sprites is set to “off”.

  Further, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233i when transferring image data of a sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and determines the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether the image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235 (see S4813 in FIG. 124). If the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is “OFF” and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for the image data is set (see S4814 in FIG. 124). Then, the image controller 237 transfers the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is “ON”, the corresponding image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a, and the transfer processing of the image data is stopped. As a result, it is possible to prevent unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and reducing the traffic on the bus line 240. it can.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233j is a frame buffer that develops an image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (first frame buffer 236b and second frame buffer 236c). When the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, the information on the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S5002 in FIG. 126).

  As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process for developing an image drawn based on the drawing list on the designated drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out previously developed drawing image information from a frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer in parallel with the drawing processing, and outputs the image to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated when the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the rendering target buffer flag 233j, that is, when the value is “0”, it is set to “1”, and when it is “1”, it is set to “0”. Is done by. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted. The drawing list is transmitted by a V interrupt executed by the MPU 231 based on a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process for one frame are completed. This is performed each time the drawing process of the process (see FIG. 111B) is executed (see S5002 in FIG. 126).

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame, and When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image for one frame after 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information is read out. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. The

  Further, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. Is done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. The Thereafter, a frame buffer that expands an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately alternating and designating, it is possible to continuously display an image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing an image for one frame.

  The display clock counter 233m is a 16-bit counter that is repeatedly updated between 0 and 65535, which is counted according to a clock change input from the clock generator 900. The clock of the clock generator 900 is also input to the sound lamp control device 113, and the effect is easily synchronized with the sound lamp control device 113 by performing the effect based on the value of the display clock counter 223m. Can be made.

  Specifically, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 111), when it is determined that the clock signal input from the clock generator 900 has changed, the value of the clock counter 223k is incremented by one. The clock of the clock generator 900 changes at a cycle of once every 100 ms (that is, a clock with a frequency of 5 Hz), and the clock counter 223k is incremented by 1 every 100 ms. Therefore, when it is desired to start an effect such as turning on an LED after 2 seconds, it may be determined to start the effect from a value obtained by adding 20 to the current value of the clock counter 223k. Although not shown, the clock counter 223k is configured to return to 0 when 1 is added when the value is 65535.

  Although details will be described later, the clock generator 900 is configured to start outputting the clock after the start-up processing of the display control device 114 (see S2601 to S2606 in FIG. 109) is completed. As a result, after the start-up process of the display control device 114 that requires more time than the sound lamp control device 113 is finished (that is, the start-up processing of the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 is finished). Since the clock output is started, the values of the clock counters (clock counter 223k and display clock counter 233m) can be accurately synchronized.

  The drive data storage area 233p is an area for storing drive data for driving the sub liquid crystal display device 523 set by the sound lamp control device 113. As shown in FIG. 80, the drive data storage area 233p has areas of a slide amount storage area 233p1, a rotation amount storage area 233p2, and an inversion amount storage area 233p3.

  This drive data storage area 233p is transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 when the drive of various drive motors (slide motor 431, rotation motor 311, reversing motor 531) is set in the sound lamp control device 113. The drive data is set based on the reception of the drive data command (see S3017 in FIG. 112).

  Then, in the drawing correction process (see FIG. 125), the display coordinates and the display angle of each image constituting one sprite are corrected according to the drive data stored in the drive data storage area 233p. Thereby, even when the upper display surface 523a and the lower display surface 523b of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 are slid and rotated, a suitable effect can be displayed.

  The demonstration display flag 233y is a flag indicating whether or not a demonstration effect is being performed. If this demo display flag 233y is on, it means that the demonstration is being performed, and if it is off, it means that the demonstration is not being performed. The demo display flag 233y is set to ON when the demo display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d in the display setting process (see FIG. 119) (see S4222 in FIG. 119). When another display data table is set for the display data table buffer 233d, it is set to OFF (see S3405 in FIG. 115A). With this demonstration display flag 233y, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the demonstration is currently being performed.

  The confirmed display flag 233z is a flag indicating whether or not a confirmed display effect is being executed. Here, the confirmed display effect indicates an effect in which the stop symbol is stopped and displayed (determined display) for a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) after the variation pattern. If the fixed display flag 233z is on, it means that the fixed display effect is being performed, and if it is off, it means that the fixed display effect is not being performed. The fixed display flag 233z is set to ON when the fixed display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d during the display setting process (see FIG. 119) (S4215 in FIG. 119). When another display data table is set for the display data table buffer 233d, it is set to OFF (see S3405 in FIG. 115 (a)). With the confirmation display flag 233z, it can be easily determined whether or not the present is in the confirmation display effect.

<Control processing executed by main controller 110 in the first control example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 84 to 99. The MPU 201 is roughly classified into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the startup process, and a timer that is periodically started (at intervals of 2 milliseconds in this control example). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process are described first, and then the startup process And the main process will be described.

  FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The timer interruption process is a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds, for example. In the timer interruption process, first, reading process of various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main controller 110 is read, and the state of the switch is determined and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored.

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299 in this control example). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI 1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, 1 is added to the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this control example), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Further, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second hit random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second per-random number counter C4 are each incremented by 1 and their counter values are the maximum values (in this control example). When it reaches 299, 99, 239), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Next, a special symbol variation process for setting the third symbol variation pattern and the like by the third symbol display device 81 is executed in addition to the processing for displaying on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B (S104). Thereafter, a start winning process is performed in accordance with winning (start winning) at the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640 (S105). Details of the special symbol variation process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After the start winning process is executed, a normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device, is executed (S106). A gate passing process is executed (S107). Details of the normal symbol variation process and the through gate passing process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 89 and 90. After executing the through gate passing process, the firing control process is executed (S108), and other processes to be executed periodically are executed (S109), and the timer interrupt process is terminated. In the launch control process, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch is not operated. This is a process for determining on / off of firing. The main controller 110 instructs the launch controller 112 to launch a sphere when the launch of the sphere is on.

  Next, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation process (S104). This special symbol variation process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 84), and the special symbol (first symbol) variation display and the third symbol performed in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. This is a process for controlling the variation display of the third symbol and the like performed on the display device 81.

  In this special symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the present symbol is a special symbol jackpot (S201). During the special symbol jackpot, the special symbol jackpot (including the special symbol jackpot game) is being displayed on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81, Includes during the predetermined time after the end of the symbol jackpot game. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S201: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  If the special symbol is not big hit (S201: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is changing (S202), and the display of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is performed. If the aspect is not changing (S202: No), the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (the number N2 of the variable display hold in the special symbol) is acquired (S203). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is greater than 0 (S204).

  If the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is decremented by 1 (S205), and is changed by calculation. A reserved ball number command (special figure 2 reserved ball number command) indicating the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is set (S206). The held ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in an external output process (S1001) of a main process (see FIG. 93) described later executed by the MPU 201. And sent to the sound lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted values in the RAM 223. They are stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c, respectively.

  After the special figure 2 reserved ball number command is set by the process of S206, the data stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the holding area 1 → the execution area, the holding area 2 → the holding area 1, the holding area 3 → the holding area 2, the holding area 4 → the holding area 3, etc. Shift data. After the data is shifted, a special symbol variation start process for starting variation display is executed in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B (S213). The special symbol variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, in the process of S204, when it is determined that the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is 0 (S204: No), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d. Is obtained (S208). It is determined whether the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is greater than 0 (S209). If it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S209: No), this process ends.

  On the other hand, if the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is not 0 (S209: Yes), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is subtracted (S270) and is changed by calculation. Then, a reserved ball number command (special figure 1 reserved ball number command) indicating the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is set (S211). After the special figure 1 reserved ball number command is set by the process of S211, the data stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (S212). Thereafter, the process of S213 is executed.

  In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is changing (S202: Yes), has the change time of the variable display executed in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B elapsed? It is determined whether or not (S214). The variation display variation time executed in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command). If the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S214: No), this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has passed in the process of S214 (S214: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is set (S215). . The setting of the stop symbol is performed in advance by a special symbol variation start process (S213) described later with reference to FIG. When this special symbol variation start processing is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. Is called. More specifically, whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is determined according to the value of the first random number counter C1, and if the special symbol is a big hit, the value depends on the value of the first hit type counter C2. It is determined whether it is a big hit A, a small hit, or a miss.

  In this control example, when the jackpot A is reached, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. In addition, when it is a small hit, the red LED is turned on, and when it is off, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. In addition, although the lighting of each LED is released when the next fluctuation display is started, it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation stops.

  After the process of S215 is completed, the special symbol lottery result (current lottery result) performed by the special symbol variation start process when the variation display being executed in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is started. Is determined to be a special symbol jackpot (S216). If the current lottery result is a special symbol jackpot (S216: Yes), based on the jackpot type, a specific winning mouth opening scenario is set (S217), and then the jackpot A start setting (16 rounds, etc.) is set. Jackpot setting) is executed (S218).

  On the other hand, in the process of S216, if the current lottery result is out (S216: No), it is determined whether or not the value of the hour / minute counter 203t is 1 or more (S220). When it is determined that the value of the hour / midtime counter 203t is 0 (S220: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the hour / minute counter 203t is 1 or more (S220: Yes), the value of the hour / hour counter 203t is decremented by 1 (S221).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 86, the special symbol variation start process (S213) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation start process (S213). This special symbol change start process (S213) is a process executed in the special symbol change process (see FIG. 85) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 84). Based on the values of the various counters stored in the common execution area with the symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, a lottery (decision of success / failure) of “special symbol jackpot” or “exclusion of special symbol” is performed. This is a process for determining the effect pattern (variation effect pattern) of the variation effect performed by the symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81.

  In the special symbol variation start process, first, the first per-random number counter C1 and the first per-type counter C2 stored in the common execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. Each value of the stop type selection counter C3 and the stop type counter CN1 is acquired (S301). Next, it is determined whether the probability change flag 203g of the RAM 203 is on (S302).

  When the probability variation flag 203g is on (S302: Yes), the special symbol jackpot is determined based on the value of the first hit random number counter C1 acquired in the processing of S301 and the special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability. Whether or not the lottery result is obtained from the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 73C) (S303). Specifically, the value of the first per-random number counter C1 is compared one by one with the ten random number values set in the first per-random number table 202a (see FIG. 73 (c)). As described above, 10 random numbers that are big wins of special symbols are set to “0-9”, and the value of the first random number counter C1 matches the random number that hits them. When it does, it determines with it being a jackpot of the special symbol. If the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired, the process proceeds to S305.

  In the present control example, the first special symbol and the second special symbol have the same determination value determined as a big hit, but the present invention is not limited thereto, and different random values may be used. By comprising in this way, it is comprised so that the random number value determined to be off in the 1st special symbol may be determined to be a win in the 2nd special symbol, and the big hit bias can be suppressed.

  In this control example, the number of jackpot random numbers is set to be the same for the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The number of random values to be set may be set differently. By configuring in this way, the probability of jackpots can be made different between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and when the lottery is executed with the special symbol with the higher jackpot probability, the player Can give you the expectation of jackpot.

  On the other hand, in the process of S302, when the hour / minute counter 203g is 0 (S302: No), since the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state (low probability gaming state) of the special symbol, the first acquired in the process of S301. Based on the value of the winning random number counter C1 and the first winning random number table 202a for low probability (see FIG. 73 (c)), a lottery result as to whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is acquired (S304). Specifically, the value of the first per-random number counter C1 is compared with one random number value stored in the first per-random number table 202a for low probability. As the random number value that is a big hit of the special symbol, one of “9” is set, and when the value of the first random number counter C1 and the random number value that hits this match, the special symbol jackpot It is determined that If the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired, the process proceeds to S305.

  Then, it is determined whether the special symbol lottery result acquired by the process of S303 or S304 is a special symbol jackpot (S305). A display mode for jackpot time indicating jackpot A is set (S306).

  In the process of S306, the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is set according to the determined jackpot type (jackpot A). In addition, the jackpot type is set as the stop type so that the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Next, based on the value of the variation type counter CS1, the variation pattern at the big hit is determined from the variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 74A) (S307).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S305 that the special symbol is out (S305: No), the display mode at the time of removal corresponding to the special symbol is set (S308). In the process of S308, the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is set according to the determined deviation. Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of detachment is determined based on the current number of reserved balls (S309). Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  Although illustration is omitted, a fluctuation pattern command for notifying the sound lamp control device 113 of each decided fluctuation pattern is generated. When this process ends, the process returns to the special symbol variation process.

  Next, start winning information processing (S105) will be described. First, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S105). The start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interruption process (see FIG. 84), and it is determined whether or not there is a winning (start winning) at the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640. Is a process for acquiring various random number counters and executing a hold process for the values.

  When the start winning process (FIG. 87, S105) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the ball has won the first winning opening 64 (start winning) (S401). Here, the ball entering the first winning port 64 is detected over three timer interruption processes. When it is determined that the ball has won the first winning opening 64 (S401: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the number N1 of the variable display hold in the special symbol) is acquired (S402). . Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in this control example) (S403).

  Then, there is no winning in the first winning opening 64 (S401: No), or even if there is a winning in the first winning opening 64, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d is less than 4. If not (S403: No), the process proceeds to S407. On the other hand, if there is a winning at the first winning opening 64 (S401: Yes) and the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 holding ball counter 203d is less than 4 (S403: Yes), the special symbol 1 holding ball. The value (N1) of the number counter 203d is incremented by 1 (S404). Then, a reserved ball number command (special figure 1 reserved ball number command) indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S405).

  The held ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in an external output process (S1001) of a main process (see FIG. 93) described later executed by the MPU 201. And sent to the sound lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d from the reserved ball number command, and the extracted value is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

  After setting the pending ball number command by the process of S405, the values of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above are stored in the RAM 203. Is stored in the first area among the empty reserved areas (the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a (S406). In the process of S406, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is referred to. If the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  Next, in the processing from S407 to S412, the same processing is executed for the winning of the second winning opening 640 with respect to the processing from S401 to S406. The second winning symbol 640 is different from the winning in the second special symbol only in that the holding process is executed, and the other processes are the same, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted. When it is determined in the process of S407 that the ball has not won the second winning opening (S407: No), a pre-read process is executed after the process of S412 (S413). Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  Next, referring to FIG. 88, the prefetching process (S413), which is one process in the start winning process (see S105 of FIG. 87) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 88 is a flowchart showing this prefetch process (S413).

  In this prefetching process (FIG. 88, S413), first, it is determined whether or not there is a new winning in the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640 (S501). As a result of the determination, when there is no new winning in the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640 (S501; No), this process is ended as it is. On the other hand, when there is a new winning in the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640 (S501: Yes), the process proceeds to S502.

  In the process of S502, it is determined whether or not the gaming state at the start of the change is probable (S502). If the gaming state is probable (S502: Yes), the first random number table 202a has a high probability. A lottery result is acquired based on the jackpot determination value (S503), and the process proceeds to S505. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not certain in the process of S502 (S502: No), the lottery result is acquired based on the jackpot determination value at the low probability of the first random number table 202a (S504), and the process of S505 is performed. Move.

  In the process of S505, it is determined whether or not the lottery result acquired in the process of S503 or S504 is a big hit (S505). In the process of S505, when it is determined that the lottery result is a jackpot (S505: Yes), a winning information command indicating a jackpot type and including a jackpot type is set (S506), and this process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S505 that the lottery result is out (S505: No), then whether or not the lottery result is a big hit if the gaming state at the start of the variation is a probable variation gaming state. A determination is made (S507).

  In the process of S507, even if the game state at the start of variation is the probability change game state, if the lottery result is out (S507: No), a winning information command indicating the out is set (S508), The process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S507, if it is determined that the lottery result is a big win if the gaming state at the start of variation is a probabilistic gaming state (S507: Yes), then, the process shifts to a probable state at the beginning of variation. It is determined whether or not there is a possibility (S508). Specifically, the determination is made based on whether or not the winning winning information being fluctuated or the pending winning information includes a winning bonus information that shifts to the probability changing state.

  In the processing of S508, when there is no possibility of shifting to the probability variation state at the start of the variation (that is, there is no jackpot winning information that shifts to the probability variation gaming state) (S508: No), a winning indicating a miss An information command is set (S509), and this process ends.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S508, when there is a possibility that the state has shifted to the probability variation state at the start of the variation (that is, there is jackpot winning information that transitions to the probability variation gaming state) (S508: Yes), a high probability A lottery result is acquired based on the jackpot determination value for the use and the low probability (S520). Then, the sign flag 203u is set to ON (S511), the sign flag 203u is indicated to be ON, and a winning information command including each lottery result acquired in the process of S520 is set (S512). Exit.

  Here, in this control example, it is impossible to determine whether or not the probability variation gaming state is given until the game ball passes through the probability variation switch 65a5 during the big hit game. On the other hand, in the present control example, by performing the processing of S507 to S512, if there is winning information that is a big hit that can pass through the probability variation switch 65a5, the lottery results at the high probability and low probability are displayed. The sound lamp control device 113 can be obtained and notified. As a result, the sound lamp control device 113 can display an appropriate effect regardless of whether the probability variation gaming state is given or not.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 89, the normal symbol variation process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 89 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation processing (S106). The normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interruption process (see FIG. 84), and the second symbol variation display performed in the second symbol display device and the electric combination associated with the second winning opening 640 are displayed. This is a process for controlling the opening time of an object.

  In this normal symbol variation process (FIG. 89, S106), it is first determined whether or not the present symbol is being hit by the normal symbol (second symbol) (S601). As for the normal symbol (second symbol) being hit, the opening and closing control of the electric accessory 640a associated with the first winning port 64 is performed while the winning symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device. In the middle. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is being hit (S601: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S601: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device is changing (S602), and the second symbol display device If the display mode is not changing (S602: No), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is acquired (S603). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is greater than 0 (S604), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 0 (S604: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is not 0 (S604: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (S605).

  Next, the data stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is shifted (S606). In the process of S606, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the holding area 1 → the execution area, the holding area 2 → the holding area 1, the holding area 3 → the holding area 2, the holding area 4 → the holding area 3, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is acquired (S607).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a short time state of a normal symbol (S608).

  When the pachinko machine 10 is in the short time state of the normal symbol (S608: Yes), it is determined whether or not the present symbol is a big hit with the special symbol (S609). During the special symbol jackpot, the special symbol jackpot (including the special symbol jackpot game) is being displayed on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81, Includes during the predetermined time after the end of the symbol jackpot game. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S609: Yes), the process proceeds to S611.

  In the process of S609, if the special symbol jackpot is not being hit (S609: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not hitting the special symbol and the pachinko machine 10 is in a short time state of a normal symbol, so it is acquired in the process of S607. Based on the value of the second per random number counter C4 and the second per random symbol table 202c for high probability, a lottery result indicating whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S610). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second random number table 202c for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “5-204”, it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of “0-4, 205-239”, It is determined that it is out of the normal symbol (see FIG. 73 (c)).

  In the process of S608, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the short time state of the normal symbol (S608: No), the process proceeds to S611. In the process of S611, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the big hit of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 acquired in the process of S607 is low. Based on the second random number table 202c for probability, a lottery result indicating whether or not the normal symbol is won is acquired (S611). Specifically, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second per-random number table 202c for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “5-28”, it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of “0-4, 29-239”, It is determined that it is out of the normal symbol (see FIG. 73 (c)).

  Next, it is determined whether the normal symbol lottery result acquired by the processing of S610 or S611 is a normal symbol win (S612). If it is determined that the normal symbol wins (S612: Yes) The display mode for winning is set (S613). In the process of S613, after the variable display on the second symbol display device is finished, the symbol “◯” is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol).

  Then, it is determined whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time-short state (S614). Is determined (S615). If the result of determination is that the special symbol is being hit (S615: Yes), the process proceeds to S617. In this control example, during the jackpot of the special symbol, in order to suppress the ball from entering the first winning hole 64 as much as possible, even when it hits the normal symbol, it is the same as when the normal symbol falls out The number of opening times and the opening time of the electric accessory 640a are set.

  In the process of S615, if the special symbol jackpot is not being hit (S615: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not hitting the special symbol and the pachinko machine 10 is in the short-time state of the normal symbol, so the second prize opening 640 Is set to 1 second, the number of times of opening is set to 2 (S616), and the process proceeds to S619. In the process of S614, when the pachinko machine 10 is not in the short time state of the normal symbol (S614: No), the process proceeds to S617. In the process of S617, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the big hit of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the opening period of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is set to 0. In addition to setting for 2 seconds, the number of times of opening is set to 1 (S617), and the process proceeds to S619.

  In the process of S612, when it is determined that the symbol is out of the normal symbol (S612: No), the display mode at the time of disconnection is set (S618). In the process of S618, after the variable display on the second symbol display device is completed, the symbol “x” is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of removal is completed, the process proceeds to S619.

  In the process of S619, it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time-short state (S619). If the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time-short state (S619: Yes), the variable display on the second symbol display device is displayed. Is set to 3 seconds (S620), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the pachinko machine 10 is not in the normal symbol time-short state (S619: No), the variation display variation time in the second symbol display device is set to 30 seconds (S621), and this process is terminated. In this way, except for the big hit of the special symbol, when the probability of the normal symbol is high, the time of the variable display becomes “30 seconds → 3 seconds” as compared with the case of the low probability of the normal symbol, and further, Since the release period of the second winning opening 640 becomes very long as “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, it becomes easy for the ball to easily enter the second winning hole 640.

  In the process of S602, if the display mode of the second symbol display device is changing (S602: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display executed in the second symbol display device has passed ( S622). The variation time here is a time preset by the processing of S620 or the processing of S621 before the variable display is started in the second symbol display device.

  If the variation time has not elapsed in the process of S622 (S622: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed in the process of S622 (S622: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device is set (S623). In the process of S623, if the normal symbol lottery is won and the display mode is set by the process of S613, the symbol “◯” as the second symbol is displayed in the stop display (lighted display) on the second symbol display device. ). On the other hand, if the normal symbol lottery is lost and the display mode is set by the processing of S618, the “x” symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lit display) on the second symbol display device. Is set as follows. When the stop display is set by the process of S623, when the second symbol display update process (see S1007) of the main process (see FIG. 93) is executed next, the variable display in the second symbol display device is finished. Then, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed (lit display) on the second symbol display device in the display mode set in the processing of S613 or S618.

  Next, the normal symbol lottery result (the current lottery result) performed by the normal symbol variation process (FIG. 89, S106) when the fluctuation display being executed in the second symbol display device is started is the normal symbol. It is determined whether or not it is a win (S624). If the current lottery result is a normal symbol (S624: Yes), the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is set (S625), and this process is terminated. When the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 640a is set by the process of S625, when the electric accessory opening / closing process (see S1005) of the main process (see FIG. 93) is executed next, the opening / closing of the electric accessory is started. The control is started, and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of opening times set in the process of S616 or the process of S617 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S624, if the current lottery result is out of the normal symbol (S624: No), the process of S625 is skipped and the process is terminated.

  Next, the through gate passage process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing the through gate passing process (S107). This through gate passing process (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 84), and it is determined whether or not a sphere has passed through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67, and there has been a sphere passing. In this case, it is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the second random number counter C4.

  In the through gate passing process (FIG. 90, S107), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 (S701). Here, the passage of the sphere at the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is detected over three timer interruption processes. If it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 (S701: Yes), the value of the normal symbol reservation ball number counter 203f (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is acquired. (S702). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than the upper limit value (4 in this control example) (S703).

  Whether the ball has not passed through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 (S701: No), or even if the ball has passed through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67, the normal symbol holding ball counter 203f If the value (M) is not less than 4 (S703: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 (S701: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol retention ball number counter 203f is less than 4 (S703: Yes), the normal symbol The value (M) of the reserved ball number counter 203f is incremented by 1 (S704). Then, the value of the second random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interruption process described above is used as the first of the free reserved areas (the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area) of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203. (S705), and this process ends. In the process of S705, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203d is referred to. If the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  FIG. 91 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The NMI interruption process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as a setting of the power-off occurrence information (S801), and ends the NMI interrupt process. To do.

  The above NMI interrupt process is executed in the same manner in the payout and emission control device 111, and information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Thus, the NMI interrupt process is started.

  Next, a startup process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the main control device 110 is powered on will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is activated by a reset at power-on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S901). For example, a predetermined value set in advance for the stack pointer is set. Next, a wait process (1 second in this control example) is executed to wait for the sub-side control devices (peripheral control devices such as the sound lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to become operable. (S902). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S903).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S904). If it is turned on (S904: Yes), the process proceeds to S912. On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), it is further determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905), and if not stored (S905: No). Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power-off was not completed normally, the process proceeds to S912 also in this case.

  If the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S906). If the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S907: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored at the time of power-off, the backed up data has been destroyed. In such a case as well, the process proceeds to S912. Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203, as described later in the processing of S1014 in FIG. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S912, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 as the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S912). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (working area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and enters a state in which game ball payout control can be started. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing (S913, S914) of RAM 203.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall starts business, the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S913, S914) is executed. Similarly, initialization processing (S913, S914) of the RAM 203 is executed even when the information on occurrence of power interruption is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). . In the RAM initialization process (S913, S914), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S913), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S914). After the initialization process of the RAM 203 is executed, the process proceeds to S910.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored (S905: Yes), and the RAM judgment value (checksum value etc.) is normal ( (S907: Yes), the power-off occurrence information is cleared while the backed up data is held in the RAM 203 (S908). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state when the drive power supply is cut off is transmitted (S909), and the process proceeds to S910. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

  In the process of S910, an effect permission command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, and the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects. Next, an interrupt is permitted (S911), and the process proceeds to a main process described later.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 93, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 after the above startup process will be described. FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing this main process. In this main process, the main process of the game is executed. As its outline, each process of S1001 to S1007 is executed as a periodic process with a period of 4 milliseconds, and the counter update process of S1010 and S1011 is executed in the remaining time.

  In the main process (see FIG. 93), first, during execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 84), output data such as commands stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 is sent to the sub-side. External output processing to be transmitted to each control device (peripheral control device) is executed (S1001). Specifically, the presence / absence of winning detection information detected in the switch reading process of S101 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 84) is determined, and if there is winning detection information, the payout control device 111 corresponds to the number of balls acquired. Send a prize ball command. Further, the reserved ball number command set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 85) or the start winning process (see FIG. 87) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, a variation pattern command, a stop type command, and the like necessary for the third symbol variation display by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Also, the opening command, the round number command, and the ending command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 94) are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a sphere, a sphere launch signal is transmitted to the launch controller 112.

  Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (S1002). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this control example). Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS 1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is completed, the winning ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1003). Next, when the special symbol is in the big hit state, the big hit effect is executed or variable. A jackpot control process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a of the winning device 65 is executed (S1004). In the jackpot control process, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for each round of the big hit state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a has elapsed or whether a specified number of balls have won the specific winning slot 65a. When any of these conditions is met, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is repeated for a predetermined number of rounds. In this control example, the jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 93), but may be executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 62).

  Next, an electrical accessory opening / closing process for performing opening / closing control of the electrical accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is executed (S1005). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, when the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory is set by the process of S625 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 89), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is started. The opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of opening times set in the processing of S616 or the processing of S617 in the normal symbol variation processing are completed.

  Next, the 1st symbol display update process which updates the display of 1st symbol display apparatus 37A, 37B is performed (S1006). In the first symbol display update processing, when a variation pattern is set by the processing of S307 or the processing of S309 of the special symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 86), the variation display corresponding to the variation pattern is displayed as the first symbol display. Start in devices 37A, 37B. In this control example, among the LEDs of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, for example, if the currently lit LED is red until the variation time elapses after the variation starts, the red LED If the green LED is lit, the green LED is turned off and the blue LED is lit. If the blue LED is lit, the blue LED is turned on. And turn on the red LED.

  The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed every time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted once every time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The counter value is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  Further, in the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the processing of S307 and S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 86) is completed, the first symbol display device 37A, The variation display being executed in 37B is ended, and the stop symbol (first symbol) is displayed in the first symbol display device 37A in the display mode set by the processing of S306 and S310 of the special symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 86). , 37B are stopped (lighted).

  Next, the 2nd symbol display update process which updates the display of a 2nd symbol display apparatus is performed (S1007). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S620 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 89) or the process of S621, the variation display is started on the second symbol display device. To do. Thereby, in the 2nd symbol display apparatus, the variable display which turns on the symbol of "(circle)" and the symbol of "x" as a 2nd symbol alternately is performed. Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device is set by the process of S623 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 89), the variation being executed in the second symbol display device. The display is terminated, and the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device in the display mode set by the processing of S613 or the processing of S618 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 89). )

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not occurrence information of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008). If no occurrence information of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008: No), a power failure signal is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. SG1 is not output and the power supply is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the next main process execution timing has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in this control example) has elapsed since the start of the current main process (S1009). If the predetermined time has already elapsed (S1009: Yes), the process proceeds to S1001, and the above-described processes after S1001 are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed since the start of the current main process (S1009: No), the first time is reached until the predetermined time, that is, within the remaining time until the next main process execution timing. The initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1010, S1011).

  First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1010). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299, 239 in this control example). . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the processing of S1002 (S1011).

  Here, since the execution time of each process of S1001 to S1007 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the next main process execution timing is not constant and varies. Therefore, by repeatedly performing the update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be updated at random, and similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can be updated at random.

  In the processing of S1008, if the occurrence information of the power supply interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008: Yes), the power supply is shut down due to the occurrence of a power outage or the power off, and the power outage monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power outage signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interrupt process of FIG. 91 has been executed, the power-off process after S1012 is executed. First, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1012), and a power-off command indicating that the power has been cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113). (S1013). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated and stored (S1014), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1015), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut down and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area to be backed up in the RAM 203.

  Note that the processing of S1008 is performed at the timing when the series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S1001 to S1007 ends, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S1010 and S1011 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main controller 110, the occurrence information of the power supply interruption is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. The process can be started from S1001. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1001 as in the case where the initialization is performed in the startup process. Therefore, in the process at the time of power shutdown, the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved. In the initial setting process (S901), the stack pointer By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the processing of S1001. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control burden on the main control device 110 and to perform accurate control without causing the main control device 110 to malfunction or run away.

  Next, the jackpot control process (S1004) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process (S1004). This jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 93). When the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol jackpot state, execution of various effects according to the jackpot or a specific prize opening ( This is a process for opening or closing the large opening) 65a.

  In the jackpot control process (FIG. 94, S1004), first, it is determined whether or not a special symbol jackpot is started (S1101). Specifically, if the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 85) S218 or S220 is executed and the special symbol jackpot start is set, it is determined that the special symbol jackpot is started. When the special symbol jackpot is started in the processing of S1101 (S1101: Yes), an opening command is set (S1102), and this processing is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the special symbol jackpot is not started in the processing of S1101 (S1101: No), it is determined whether the special symbol jackpot is being hit (S1103). During the special symbol jackpot, the special symbol jackpot (including the special symbol jackpot game) is being displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the special symbol jackpot Includes during a predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. In the process of S1103, if the special symbol is not big hit (S1103: No), this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1103 that the special symbol is a big hit (S1103: Yes), the process of S1104 is executed. In the process of S1104, it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1104). In the process of S1104, when it is determined that it is the start timing of a new round (S1104: Yes), a jackpot operation setting process is executed (S1105).

  Here, with reference to FIG. 95, the jackpot operation setting process will be described (S1105). FIG. 95 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot operation setting process (S1105). In the jackpot operation setting process (FIG. 95, S1105), first, an opening operation corresponding to the number of jackpot rounds to be started is read from the set opening scenario (S1201). The opening operation of the flow path solenoid (probability changing solenoid) 65k is set based on the data read in S1201 (S1202). The opening operation of the open / close door 65f1 of the variable winning device 65 is set by the data read in the process of S1201. Thereafter, this process is terminated. In the processing of S1202, the operation of the flow path solenoid 65k and the operation of the opening / closing door 65f1 are set for each round.

  Then, the value of the winning number counter 203j is reset to 0 (S1204), a round number command corresponding to the number of rounds is set (S1205), and this process ends.

  In this way, each operation of the variable winning device 65 is set at the start of each round, so that even if an unexpected power interruption occurs during the jackpot game, the jackpot game will end in the middle Defects can be suppressed.

  Returning to FIG. 94, the description will be continued. In the process of S1104, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of a new round (S1104: No), it is then determined whether it is the operation timing of the probability variable solenoid 65k (S1106). If it is determined that it is the operation timing of the probability variation solenoid 65k (S1106: Yes), the probability variation solenoid 65k is set to ON (S1107), and this processing is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1106 that it is not the timing of the opening operation (S1106: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1108). The start timing of the ending effect is the end timing of the ending effect when the 15th round is completed and the open / close door 65f1 is closed, and a waiting time (3 seconds in this control example) that is a ball throwing time has elapsed. It is determined as If it is determined that it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1108: Yes), the probability variation solenoid 65k is set to off (S1109), and the ending process is executed (S1110). Thereafter, this process is terminated. Although illustration is omitted, in this control example, when one game ball passes through the probability change switch 65a5, the probability change solenoid 65k is set to OFF. However, in consideration of the case where the big hit game is finished without the game ball passing through the probability variation switch 65a5, the probability variation solenoid 65k is set to OFF just in case of the processing of S1009.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 96, details of the ending process (S1110) will be described. FIG. 96 is a flowchart showing the contents of this ending process (FIG. 96, S1110). In the ending process (FIG. 96, S1110), first, an ending command indicating the start of ending is set to the sound lamp control device 113 (S1301). It is determined whether the probability variation setting flag 203h is on (S1302). If it is determined in the processing of S1302 that the probability variation setting flag 203h is on (S1302: Yes), the probability variation flag 203g is set to on (S1303), and this processing ends. Although illustration is omitted, the probability variation setting flag 203h is configured to be turned off based on the probability variation flag 203g being turned on.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1302 that the probability variation setting flag 203h is off (S1302: No), the process of S1303 is skipped and the process is terminated.

  Thus, in this control example, at the end of the jackpot game, it is determined whether the probability variation setting flag 203h is on, and if it is on, the probability variation flag 203g is set on. Therefore, at the end of the big hit game, it is possible to determine whether or not the game ball is passing through the probability change switch 65a5 and set the probability change. Therefore, it is possible to keep the player expecting to shift to the probable gaming state until the big hit game ends. Furthermore, if the game ball can be passed through the probability change switch 65a5 during the jackpot game, the probability change game state is given after the jackpot game, so whether or not the game ball passes through the probability change switch 65a5 even during the jackpot game. You can play games with interest.

  Returning to FIG. 94, the description will be continued. In the process of S1109, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S1109: No), a notification process is executed (S1111). Here, the details of the notification process (S1111) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 97 is a flowchart showing the contents of the notification process (S1111).

  In the notification process (S1111), first, it is determined whether or not the value of the notification counter 203m is greater than 0 (S1401). If it is determined that the value of the notification counter 203m is 0 (S1401: No), it is determined whether it is the end timing of the 12th round (S1402). The determination of the end timing of the 12th round is performed when it is detected that 10 balls have been won in the 12th round or when it is determined that 30 seconds have elapsed. When it is determined that it is the end timing of the 12th round (S1402: Yes), a counter value corresponding to 2 seconds is set in the notification counter 203m. Thereafter, this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S1402, when it is determined that it is not the end timing of the 12th round (S1402: No), this process ends. Here, when the 2-second counter is set in S1403, the notification counter 203m becomes 0 during 3 seconds of the interval time, which is the ball throwing time after 12 rounds have ended, and the sound of watching the liquid crystal is heard. Is output. Therefore, although the flow path solenoid 65k operates in the 13th round, since the player is attracted attention to the liquid crystal from the interval time after the 12th round, the movement of the switching member 65h of the variable winning device 65 is identified, It is possible to suppress the jackpot type being identified by the player. Therefore, the player can play the game with the expectation that the probability variation game state is given until the end of the jackpot game.

  In this control example, by providing the notification counter 203m, an effect of attracting attention to the liquid crystal is performed across the 13th round from 1 second before the end of the interval time. It may be executed continuously.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1401 that the value of the notification counter 203m is greater than 0 (S1401: Yes), the value of the notification counter 203m is decreased by -1 and updated (S1404). It is determined whether the value of the updated notification counter 203m is 0 (S1405). When it is determined that the value of the notification counter 203m is 0 (S1405: Yes), a notification command is set (S1406). Thereafter, this process is terminated. In response to this notification command, the sound lamp control device 113 executes the sound output setting “Look at the liquid crystal”.

  Returning to FIG. 94, the description will be continued. When the notification process (FIG. 97, S1111) is executed, a winning process is executed (S1112). Here, with reference to FIG. 98, the winning process (S1112) will be described in detail. FIG. 98 is a flowchart showing the contents of the winning process (S1112).

  In the winning process (FIG. 98, S1112), first, it is determined whether or not it is a round effective period (S1501). The round effective period is a period during which a round game is set, that is, a period from the open state of the open door 65f1 to the end of the interval period (3 seconds). When it is determined that it is outside the round effective period (S1501: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is within the round effective period (S1501: Yes), it is determined whether or not the detection switch 65c1 of the specific winning opening 65a has been passed. If it is determined that the detection switch 65c1 of the specific winning opening 65a has been passed (S1502: Yes), the winning number counter 203j is incremented by one and updated, and a winning number command indicating the updated value of the winning number counter 203j is issued. Setting is made (S1503). Thereafter, the process of S1504 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the detection switch 65c1 has not been passed (S1502: No), the processing of S1504 is executed.

  In the process of S1504, it is determined whether the value of the winning number counter 203j is 10 or more (S1504). When it is determined that the value of the winning number counter 203j is 10 or more (S1504: Yes), the closing of the open / close door 65f1 of the specific winning port 65a is set (S1506). Thereafter, the remaining ball timer flag 203n is set to ON (S1507). Thereafter, the process of S1508 is executed. By setting the remaining ball timer flag 203n to be on, it can be determined that the ball is being thrown away after the open / close door 65f1 is closed.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1504, if it is determined that the value of the winning number counter 203j is less than 10, it is determined whether the round time (30 seconds in this control example) has elapsed (S1505). If it is determined that the round time has elapsed (S1505: Yes), the processing of S1506 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the round time has not elapsed (S1505: No), the processing of S1508 is executed.

  In the processing of S1508, it is determined whether or not the value of the operation counter 203k is greater than 0 (S1508). When it is determined that the value of the operation counter 203k is greater than 0 (S1508: Yes), the value of the operation counter 203k is decremented by 1 and updated (S1509). It is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the probability change switch 65a5 (S1510). If it is determined that the game ball has passed through the probability variation passing switch 65e3 (S1510: Yes), the value of the probability variation passing counter 203i is incremented by 1 and updated (S1511). The probability variation setting flag 203h is set to ON (S1512). Thereafter, the process of S1513 is executed. On the other hand, in the process of S1510, when it is determined that the game ball has not passed through the probability change switch 65a5 (S1510: No), the process of S1513 is executed. In the processing of S1513, it is determined whether or not the operation counter 203k is 0 (S1513). If it is determined that the operation counter 203k is 0, the flow path solenoid 65k is set to OFF (S1514). The probability variation valid flag 203q is set to ON (S1515). Thereafter, this process is terminated. Here, when the probability variation valid flag 203q is set to ON, if the game ball remaining in the special flow path 65e2 passes the probability variation switch 65a5 even after the switching member 65h is switched, the probability variation game Can be controlled to be set.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1508, when it is determined that the operation counter 203k is 0 (S1508: No), it is determined whether the probability variation valid flag 203q is on (S1516). If the probability variation valid flag 203q is off (S1516: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the probability variation valid flag 203q is on (S1516: Yes), the probability variation valid timer 203r is incremented by 1 and updated (S1517). It is determined whether the value of the probability variation valid timer is the upper limit value (1.2 s in this control example) (S1518). When it is determined that the probability variation valid timer 203r is the upper limit value (S1518: Yes), the probability variation valid flag 203q is set to off (S1519). The probability variation valid timer 203r is reset to 0, which is an initial value (S1520), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S1518, when it is determined that the probability variation valid timer 203r is not the upper limit value (S1518: No), the process of S1510 is executed.

  Thus, if the probability variation valid timer 203r is not the upper limit value, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the probability variation switch 65a5, so that the probability variation gaming state can be set in consideration of the time of ball removal. In addition, since there is an upper limit for the time that is determined to be valid, it is possible to prevent the probability variation gaming state from being imparted by illegally passing the game ball through the probability variation switch 65a5.

  Returning to FIG. 94, the description will be continued. When a winning process (FIG. 98, S1112) is executed, an abnormal process is executed (S1113). Thereafter, this process is terminated. Here, the details of this abnormality process (S1113) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 99 is a flowchart showing the contents of the abnormality process (S1113). In the abnormality process (S1113), a process for monitoring whether the probability variation switch 65a5 is illegally passed is executed.

  In the abnormality process (FIG. 99, S1113), first, it is determined whether it is a round effective period (S1601). If it is outside the round effective period (S1601: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is within the round effective period (S1601: Yes), it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the ball outlet switch 65e4 (S1602). When it is determined that the game ball has passed through the ball discharge port switch 65e4 (S1602: Yes), the value of the ball discharge number counter 203s is incremented by 1 and updated (S1603). Thereafter, the process of S1604 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the game ball has not passed through the ball outlet switch 65e4 (S1602: No), the processing of S1604 is executed.

  In the processing of S1604, it is determined whether the remaining ball timer flag 203n is on (S1604). If it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203n is off (S1604: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203n is on (S1604: Yes), the remaining ball timer 203p is incremented by 1 and updated (S1605) because it is during the ball throwing time period. The remaining ball timer 203p determines whether or not the upper limit value (3 seconds in this control example) has elapsed (S1606). If it is determined that the value is not the upper limit value (S1606: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value is the upper limit value (S1606: Yes), the number of discharges (total value of the probability variation passage counter 203i and the discharge number counter 203s) and the number of winning (value of the winning number counter 203j) match. Is discriminated (S1607).

  If it is determined that they match (S1607: Yes), the process of S1609 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that they do not match (S1607: No), an error command is set (S1608). Thereafter, the process of S1609 is executed. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the error command, an error display (for example, displaying a character of the winning number mismatch error) is performed, and an error signal is output to the hall computer. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress the illegal act of allowing the game ball to pass through the probability variation switch 65a5 even if the game ball is illegally left in the variable winning device 65 and the jackpot is B.

  In the processing of S1609, the remaining ball timer flag 203n is set to OFF (S1609), and the remaining ball timer 203p is reset to 0, which is an initial value (S1610). Thereafter, the winning number counter 203j, the discharging number counter 203s, and the probability variation passing counter 203i are respectively reset to initial values (S1611), and then this process ends.

<Control processing executed by the sound lamp control device 113 in the first control example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 100 to 108. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, and a main process that is executed after the startup process.

  First, a startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed (S1701). Specifically, a predetermined value set in advance for the stack pointer is set. Thereafter, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is turned on, the power-on processing in S1815 (see FIG. 101) is performed due to an instantaneous voltage drop (momentary power failure, so-called “momentary power failure”). ) Is determined during execution (S1702). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 101, when the sound lamp control device 113 receives a power-off command from the main control device 110 (see S1814 in FIG. 101), it executes the power-off process in S1815. The power-off process flag is turned on before the power-off process is executed, and the power-off process flag is turned off after the power-off process ends. Therefore, whether or not the power-off process in S1815 is being executed can be determined based on the state of the power-off process flag.

  If the power-off process flag is off (S1702: No), the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut off, or after a momentary power failure has occurred and the power-off process in S1815 It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or started only after the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1703).

  Confirmation of data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword “55AAh” is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the processing of S1706. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is “55AAh”, there is no data destruction in the RAM 223. Conversely, if the data is not “55AAh”, the data destruction in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1703: Yes), the process proceeds to S1704, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1703: No), the process proceeds to S1708.

  If the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut down, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory in the RAM 223 is lost due to the power-off). ), It is determined that the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S1703: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1704. On the other hand, this startup process was started after an instantaneous power failure and after completing the power-off process in S1817, or reset only to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. When the process starts, since the keyword “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is normal (S1703: No), and the process proceeds to S1708.

  If the power-off process flag is on (S1702: Yes), the startup process of this time is after the instantaneous power failure has occurred and during the execution of the power-off process of S1817, the sound lamp control device 113. The MPU 221 is started after being reset. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct. Therefore, since control cannot be continued in such a case, the process proceeds to S1704 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the processing of S1704, the entire storage area of the RAM 223 is checked (S1704). As a check method, first, “0FFh” is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is “0FFh”. If “0FFh”, it is determined as normal. The writing and checking for each byte are performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” after “0FFh”. This RAM 223 read / write check clears all storage areas of the RAM 223 to zero.

  If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1705: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223, and the RAM destruction check data is set (S1706). By checking the keyword “55AAh” written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality of the read / write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S1705: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S1707), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is shut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. The sound output device 226 may output a sound to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. It may be.

  In the processing of S1708, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S1708). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process in S1817 is executed (see S1816 in FIG. 101). In other words, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process in S1817 is executed, the current startup process is instantaneous because the power-off flag is turned on. This is a case where the process is started after a power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S1817 is completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1708: Yes), the RAM work area is cleared to initialize each process of the sound lamp control device 113 (S1709), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1710), and an interrupt is performed. The permission is set (S1711), and the process proceeds to the main process. Note that the work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than an area for storing commands received from the main control device 110.

  On the other hand, when the power-off flag is turned off, the processing of S1708 is reached because the current start-up processing is started after, for example, the power supply is completely shut down. This is a case where the processing has been reached, or the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset only (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. Therefore, in such a case (S1708: No), S1709, which is a process for clearing the work area of the RAM 223, is skipped, the process proceeds to S1710, the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1710), and interrupt permission is set. In step S1711, the process proceeds to the main process.

  The reason for skipping the clear process of S1709 is that when the process from S1704 to S1706 is reached via the process of S1706, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S1704. When only the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is stored without being cleared, so that the sound lamp control device 113 is saved. This is because the control can be continued.

  Next, a main process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 after the start-up process of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 101 is a flowchart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, it is first determined whether or not 1 msec or more has elapsed since the main process was started or since the current processing of S1801 was executed (S1801). If not (S1801: No), the process proceeds to S1813 without performing the processes in S1802 to S1811. In S1801, the process of determining whether or not 1 msec has passed is mainly a process related to display (production) in S1802 to S1811, whereas it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 msec). This is because it is preferable to execute the variable display setting process of S1813 and the command determination process of S1812 in a short cycle. By executing the process of S1812 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent the reception of a command transmitted from the main controller 110 from being missed. By executing the process of S1813 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process Based on the above, it is possible to make a setting related to the changing effect without delay.

  If 1 msec or more has elapsed in the process of S1801 (S1801: Yes), first, various commands for the display control apparatus 114 set by the processes of S1803 to S1813 are transmitted to the display control apparatus 114 (S1802). ). Next, the setting of the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the processing of S1808 described later are set (S1803), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S1804). In the power-on notification process, when the power is turned on, a notification is given to notify that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). The notification is performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Is called. Moreover, it is good also as what transmits a command to the display control apparatus 114 to alert | report that power was supplied on the screen of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81. FIG. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S1805 without performing the notification by the power-on notification process.

  In the process of S1805, a waiting-for-customer effect process is executed, and then a hold number display update process is executed (S1806). In the customer waiting effect process, when a predetermined period of time elapses when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player, setting for switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen is performed, and the setting is displayed as a command. Sent to device 114. In the number-of-holds display update process, a process for turning on a hold lamp (not shown) according to the value of the special symbol 1 number-of-holds ball counter 223b is performed.

  Thereafter, frame button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (S1807). This frame button input monitoring / production process monitors the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed to enhance the production effect, and corresponds to the case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. This is a process for setting to produce an effect. In this process, when an operation by the player on the frame button 22 is detected, a display command corresponding to the operation of the frame button 22 is set to the display control device 114. In addition, it monitors the input of whether or not a touch operation has been performed on the third symbol display device 81.

  When the frame button input monitoring / production process ends, the lamp editing process is executed (S1808), and then the sound editing / output process is executed (S1809). In the lamp editing process, the lighting pattern of the illumination units 29 to 33, the lighting pattern of the sub LED 290, and the like are set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81. Details of the lamp editing process will be described later with reference to FIG. In the sound editing / output process, the output pattern of the sound output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the sound output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the process of S1809, a liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S1810). In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the variable pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110. The lamp editing process of S1808 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. Note that the sound editing / output process of S1809 is also executed in a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed in the third symbol display device 81.

  When the process of S1810 is completed, a sub liquid crystal drive process is executed to drive the sub liquid crystal display device (sub liquid crystal) 523 (slide drive, rotation drive, etc.) (S1811). Details of the sub liquid crystal driving process (S1811) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After the sub liquid crystal driving process (S1811), a command determination process for performing a process according to the command received from the main controller 110 is performed (S1812). Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the process proceeds to S1813. In the process of S1813, a variable display setting process is executed (S1813). In the variation display setting process, a variation pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to execute a variation effect. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. Details of the change display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Then, when the variable display setting process is completed, it is determined whether or not the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1814). The information on the occurrence of power-off is stored when a power-off command is received from the main controller 110. If power failure occurrence information is stored in the process of S1814 (S1814: Yes), both the power interruption flag and the power interruption process flag are turned on (S1816), and the power interruption process is executed (S1817). After the power-off process is executed, the power-off process flag is turned off (S1818), and then the process is looped infinitely. In the power-off process, the generation of the interrupt process is prohibited and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. Further, the storage of the information on occurrence of power interruption is also erased.

  On the other hand, if the occurrence information of the power interruption is not stored in the process of S1814 (S1814: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1815), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1815: No), the process returns to S1801, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1815: Yes), the process is looped infinitely in order to stop the subsequent processes. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, and thereafter, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, since the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, he can call a hall clerk or the like and request repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the sound output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may notify the RAM destruction.

  Next, a command determination process (S1812) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 102 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing (S1812). This command determination processing (S1812) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 101) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. . Further, in this process, when the reserved ball number command is received from the main control device 110, the third symbol display device 81 also determines to start the continuous notice effect.

  In the command determination processing (FIG. 102, S1812), first, the first command received from the main controller 110 among unprocessed commands is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and analyzed. It is further determined whether or not a variation pattern command has been received (S1901). When the variation pattern command is received (S1901: Yes), the variation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S1902), and the variation pattern type is extracted from the received variation pattern command (S1903). Return to the main process. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when a variation display setting process (see FIG. 106) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variation effect and its variation pattern type.

  On the other hand, if the variation pattern command has not been received (S1901: No), it is then determined whether a stop type command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1904). When the stop type command is received (S1904: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1905), and the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S1906). Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when a later-described variable display setting process (see FIG. 106) is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variation effect.

  On the other hand, if the stop type command has not been received (S1904: No), it is then determined whether or not a reserved ball number command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1907). Then, when the reserved ball number command is received (S1907: Yes), it is determined whether the received reserved ball number command is the special figure 1 reserved ball number command or the special figure 2 reserved ball number command. The value included in the command, that is, the value of the special symbol 1 held ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110 (the number N1 of the variable display hold in the special symbol) is extracted, and the special symbol 2 of the main controller 110 is extracted. The value of the reserved ball number counter 203e (the number N2 of the variable display hold in the special symbol) is extracted and stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1908). In the process of S1908, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c is set. After the process of S1908 ends, the process returns to the main process.

  Here, the special figure 1 reserved ball number command or the special figure 2 reserved ball number command is executed when the ball wins (start winning prize) at the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640, or a special symbol is drawn. Is transmitted from the main control device 110 when it is released, so that every time a start prize is detected or every time a special symbol is drawn, the special symbol 1 holding ball of the voice lamp control device 113 is processed by the processing of S1908. The values of the number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c can be matched with the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110. Therefore, due to the influence of noise or the like, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 becomes the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d or special symbol of the main controller 110. The value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c of the sound lamp control device 113 at the time of detection of the start winning or the special symbol lottery even if it deviates from the value of the 2 reserved ball number counter 203e To the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main control device 110. When the processing of S1908 is executed, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c. Is set. Thereby, in the display control device 114, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the number of reserved balls is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the processing of S1907, when the pending ball number command has not been received (S1907: No), it is then determined whether a notification command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1909). When it is determined that the notification command has been received (S1909: Yes), the notification voice corresponding to the received command (in this control example, “see the liquid crystal”) is selected, and the display command for notification is set. (S1910).

  Next, in the processing of S1909, when it is determined that a notification command has not been received (S1909: No), it is then determined whether or not a jackpot related command has been received (S1911). In the process of S1911, when it is determined that a jackpot related command is received (S1911: Yes), the jackpot related process is executed (S1912), and the process proceeds to S1913. Details of the jackpot related process (S1912) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S1911 that a jackpot-related command has not been received, the process proceeds to S1913.

  In the process of S1913, it is determined whether another command has been received, the process corresponding to the received command is executed (S1913), and the process returns to the main process. If the other command is a command used in the sound lamp control device 113, processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used in the display control device 114, the command is displayed. The command is set so as to be transmitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 103, the jackpot related process (S1912) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 103 is a flowchart showing the jackpot related processing (S1912). This jackpot related process (S1912) is a process executed when it is determined in the command determination process (see FIG. 1812) that a jackpot related command has been received.

  In the jackpot related process, it is first determined whether or not an opening command has been received (S2001). When it is determined that the opening command has been received (S2001: Yes), a display opening command is set (S2002), and this process ends. The display opening command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S1802) of the main process (see FIG. 101) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display opening command, the display control device 114 displays an effect suggesting the start of the jackpot on the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the opening command has not been received (S2001: No), it is then determined whether a round number command has been received (S2003). In the process of S2003, when it is determined that the round number command has been received (S2003: Yes), 1 is added to the round number counter 223g (S2004). Thereafter, a display round number command is set based on the round number counter 223g (S2005), and this process ends.

  In the process of S2003, when it is determined that the round number command has not been received (S2003: No), it is determined whether or not a winning number command has been received (S2006). In the process of S2006, if it is determined that a winning command is received (S2006: Yes), the value of the sub winning counter 223h is updated based on the received command, and the process proceeds to S2008.

  In the process of S2008, it is determined whether or not the value of the sub winning prize counter 223h updated in the process of S2007 is greater than 10 (S2008). In the process of S2008, when the value of the sub-winning number counter 223h is larger than 10 (S2008: Yes), more game balls have entered the specific winning opening 65a than the predetermined number (10) in one round ( This is the case of so-called over winning. In this case, the over winning process is executed (S2009), and this process is terminated. The details of the over winning process (S2009) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2008, when it is determined that the value of the sub-winning number counter 223h is 10 or less (S2008: No), in order to execute a normal winning effect, a normal effect command is set, End the process.

  If it is determined in the process of S2006 that a winning command has not been received (S2006: No), it is determined whether an ending command has been received (S2011).

  If it is determined in step S2011 that an ending command has been received (S2011: Yes), an ending setting process is executed (S2012), the round number counter 223g is set to 0 (S2013), and the process ends. To do. Details of the ending setting process (S2012) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  If it is determined in step S2011 that an ending command has not been received (S2011: No), it is determined whether a V-pass command has been received (S2014).

  In the process of S2014, when it is determined that the V passing command is received (S2016: Yes), in order to execute an effect suggesting that the game ball passes through the probability change switch 65a5 and the probability change game state is given, A display V effect command is set (S2015), and this process ends.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 104, the over winning process (S2009) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 104 is a flowchart showing the over-winning process (S2009). This over-winning process (S2009) is a process for executing an effect based on the overwinning to the specific winning port 65a, which is executed in the above-mentioned jackpot-related process (see FIG. 103).

  In the over winning process, first, the value of the effect counter 223f is acquired (S2101). Then, it is determined whether or not there is winning winning information in the winning information storage area 223a (S2103). When it is determined that there is winning winning information (S2103: Yes), an over winning effect is selected from the winning over winning table 222b1 based on the value of the effect counter 223f acquired in the processing of S2101 (S2103). , The process proceeds to S2107.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2103 that there is no winning winning information (S2103: No), it is then determined whether or not there is winning information including information in which the predictor flag 203u is set to ON. (S2104). In the process of S2104, when it is determined that there is winning information including the information that the sign flag 203u is set to ON (S2104: Yes), the sign is over based on the value of the effect counter 223f from the sign over winning table 222b2. A winning effect is selected (S2105), and the process proceeds to S2107.

  In the process of S2104, when it is determined that there is no winning information including information in which the predictor flag 203u is set to ON (S2104: No), it is overrun based on the value of the effect counter 223f from the over-winning winning table 222b3. A winning effect is selected (S2106), and the process proceeds to S2107.

  In the process of S2107, an over-winning command for display indicating the over-winning effect selected in the process of S2103, S2105 or S2106 is set (S2107), and the process proceeds to S2108.

  In the processing of S2108, it is determined whether or not the selected over winning effect is “fish school” (S2108). If it is determined that the selected over-winning effect is “fish school” (S2108: Yes), the fish school flag 223i is set to ON (S2109), and this process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2108 that the selected over winning effect is not “fish school” (S2108: No), it is then determined whether or not the selected over winning effect is “bubble”. (S2110). If it is determined that the selected over-winning effect is “bubble” (S2110), the bubble count counter 223j is incremented by 1 (S2111), and this process is terminated. In the process of S2111, the number of times “bubble” is selected in the over winning prize is stored, and when selecting the ending effect, the selection ratio of the ending effect is changed according to the number of times “bubble” is selected (FIG. 104).

  In the process of S2110, when it is determined that the selected over winning effect is not “bubble” (S2110: No), this process is ended as it is.

  As described above, the over-winning effect displayed at the time of over-winning is different depending on whether or not there is information that is a big hit in the winning information storage area 223a (that is, whether or not it is a big win thereafter). It is configured as follows. As a result, the player executes the game with the expectation that an over-winning effect will be displayed, so that the interest of the player can be improved.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 105, the ending setting process (S2012) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 105 is a flowchart showing the ending setting process (S2012). This ending setting process (S2012) is a process executed in the jackpot related process (see FIG. 103) described above, and is a process for executing an effect at the end of the jackpot.

  In the ending setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the fish school flag 223i is on (S2201). If it is determined in the process of S2201 that the fish school flag 223i is on (S2201: Yes), then in the over winning effect, an effect suggesting that the probability variation game state is given is already executed (displayed). In this case, the continuation ending effect is selected (S2202), and the process proceeds to S2209. As a result, it is possible to suppress (prevent) the problem that the effect suggesting that the probability variation gaming state is given is executed (displayed) in duplicate, and the player feels uncomfortable.

  If it is determined in the processing of S2201 that the fish school flag 223i is off (S2201: No), then the value of the effect counter 223f is acquired (S2203). Then, it is determined whether or not winning information that is a win is stored in the winning information storage area 223a (S2204).

  In the process of S2204, when it is determined that the winning information storing the winning information storage area 223a is stored (S2204: Yes), the ending effect is selected from the winning ending table 222c1 based on the value of the effect counter 223f. (S2205), the process proceeds to S2209.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2204 that the winning information corresponding to the winning information storage area 223a is not stored (S2204: No), then the winning information including information in which the predictor flag 203u is set to ON is determined. It is determined whether or not there is (S2206).

  In the process of S2206, when it is determined that there is winning information including information in which the sign flag 203u is set to ON (S2206: Yes), an effect is selected from the sign ending table 222c2, and the process proceeds to S2209. To do.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2206, when it is determined that there is no winning information including the information that the sign flag 203u is set to ON (S2206: No), the effect is selected from the outlier ending table 222c3, and the process of S2209 Migrate to

  In the process of S2209, an effect command indicating the effect selected in the process of S2202, S2205, S2207 or S2208 is set (S2209), the fish school flag 223i is set to OFF (S2210), and the value of the bubble counter 223j is set. It is set to 0 (S2211), and this process ends.

  As described above, the ending effect displayed at the end of the jackpot is different depending on whether or not there is information that will be a jackpot in the winning information storage area 223a (that is, whether or not it will be a jackpot thereafter). It is configured as follows. Thereby, since a player pays attention to an ending effect and performs a game, the interest of a player can be improved.

  Next, the variable display setting process (S1813) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 106 is a flowchart showing the change display setting process (S1813). This variable display setting process (S1813) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 101) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and in order to execute a variable effect in the third symbol display device 81, A display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from main controller 110.

  In the variation display setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the variation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is ON (S2301). If it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is not on (that is, it is off) (S2301: No), the fluctuation pattern command is not received from the main controller 110, so the process proceeds to S2306. Transition. On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is on (S2301: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223d is turned off (S2302), and then the fluctuation pattern is determined in the process of S1903 of the command determination process (see FIG. 102). The variation pattern type in the variation effect extracted from the command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S2303).

  Based on the acquired variation pattern type, a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set for transmission to the display control device 114 (S2304). The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. Display control of the variation effect is started.

  When the process of S2304 is finished, it is determined whether or not there is a drive scenario setting in the variation pattern acquired in the process of S2303 (S2305). If it is determined in the process of S2305 that a driving scenario is set (S2305: Yes), the corresponding driving scenario is stored from the sub liquid crystal driving scenario 222d into the driving scenario storage area 223n (S2306), and the driving scenario is stored. The counter 223m is set to 0 (S2307), and the process proceeds to S2308.

  In the processing of S2308, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223e provided in the RAM 233 is on (S2308). If it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is not on (that is, it is off) (S2308: No), the stop type command has not been received from the main control device 110, so this change display The setting process ends, and the process returns to the main process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is on (S2308: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e is turned off (S2309), and then in the process of S1906 of the command determination process (see FIG. 102), The stop type in the variation effect extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S2310). The stop type instructed by the stop type command from the main control device 110 is set as it is as the stop type of the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81 (S2311), and the process proceeds to S2312. In the processing of S2312, based on the set stop type, a display stop type command for notification to the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S2312). . In the display control device 114, by receiving this display stop type command, the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by this display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop display of the fluctuation effect is controlled.

  Next, the lamp editing process (S1808) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 107 is a flowchart showing the lamp editing process (S1808). This lamp editing process (S1808) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 101) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and has the same timing as the sub-symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 114. The setting such as lighting of the sub LED whose lighting is controlled is executed.

  In the ramp editing process (FIG. 107, S1808), first, it is determined whether or not the clock signal input from the clock generator 900 has changed (S2401). If it is determined that the clock signal has not changed (S2401: No), the process from S2402 to S2406 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2407.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2401 that the clock signal has changed (S2401: Yes), the clock counter 223k is incremented by 1 (S2402), and it is determined whether or not it is the fluctuation start timing (S2403). .

  In the process of S2403, when it is determined that it is not the change start timing (S2403: No), the process of S2404 to S2406 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2407.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2403 that it is a change start timing (S2403: Yes), the value of the clock counter to be lit is determined based on the selected change time (S2404). Then, a counter command indicating the value of the clock counter determined in the process of S2404 is set (S2405), lighting data of the sub LED is set based on the determined value of the clock counter (S2406), and the process proceeds to S2407. To do.

  In the processing of S2407, processing for lighting other lamps is executed, and this processing is terminated.

  Although details will be described later, the sound lamp control device 113 and the sub display device 114 execute the lighting of the sub LED and the display of the sub symbol on the basis of the counter value updated based on the same clock signal. Like to do. Thereby, it is possible to control to turn on the sub LED at the same timing as the sub symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 114.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 108, the sub liquid crystal driving process (S1811) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 108 is a flowchart showing the sub liquid crystal driving process (S1811). This sub liquid crystal drive process (S1811) is a process executed in the main process (see FIG. 101) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and drives the sub liquid crystal display device 523 (slide drive, For example, rotational driving).

  In the sub liquid crystal drive process (FIG. 108, S1811), first, it is determined whether or not a drive scenario is stored in the drive scenario storage area 223n (S2501). If it is determined in step S2501 that the driving scenario is not stored, it is not the timing for driving the sub liquid crystal display device 523, and thus this processing is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2501 that the driving scenario is stored (S2501: Yes), the driving scenario counter 223m is incremented by 1 (S2502).

  Then, in the driving scenario stored in the driving scenario storage area, it is determined whether there is motor driving data corresponding to the value of the driving scenario counter 223m after the addition (S2503). If it is determined in step S2503 that there is motor drive data (S2503: Yes), various drive motors (slide motor 431, rotation motor 311 and reversing motor 531) are driven based on the motor drive data. Therefore, motor drive data is set based on the information in the drive scenario storage area 223n (S2504), a drive data command is set (S2505), and this process ends.

  If it is determined in step S2503 that there is no motor drive data (S2503), it is then determined whether it is the end timing of the drive scenario (S2506). Specifically, if the information of the driving scenario storage area corresponding to the value of the driving scenario counter 223m is “END”, it is determined that it is the end timing of the driving scenario.

  If it is determined in the processing of S2506 that it is the end timing of the driving scenario (S2506: Yes), the information in the driving scenario storage area 223n is cleared (S2507), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2506 that it is not the end timing of the driving scenario, this processing is ended as it is.

<Control processing executed by display control apparatus in first control example>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 109 to 126. The MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main process that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt process that is executed when a command is received from the sound lamp control device 113, and one frame worth from the image controller 237. There is a V-interrupt process executed when the MPU 231 detects a V-interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of a command and detection of a V interrupt signal. If command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, command reception processing is preferentially executed. As a result, the contents of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected to execute the V interrupt process.

  First, a main process executed by the MPU 231 in the display control apparatus 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 109 is a flowchart showing this main process. The main process executes an initialization process when the power is turned on.

  Specifically, the main process is activated according to the following flow. When power is turned on from the power supply circuit 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to “0000H” according to its hardware configuration. The address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is designated for the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified on the bus line 240 is “0000H”, it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, and starts the main process by starting execution of the process according to the fetched instruction.

  Here, if all the boot programs processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 confirms that the address specified on the bus line 240 is “0000H”. Upon detection, one page of data including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address “0000H” must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to set it from the reading to the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, the MPU 231 receives the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” after designating the address “0000H”. A lot of waiting time will be consumed. Therefore, since the time required for starting the MPU 231 becomes longer, as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, as in this control example, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released in the boot program is stored in the NOR ROM 234d. Since the memory can read data, when the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234 c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after designating the address “0000H”, the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  When the main processing is executed as described above, first, the boot processing executed by the boot program is executed (S2601), and the display control device 114 is configured so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. Start up.

  Here, the boot processing (S2601) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 110 is a flowchart showing a boot process (S2601) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114.

  As described above, in this control example, the control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are stored in the third symbol display device 81 instead of storing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. It is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing image data to be displayed. The character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area, so that not only image data but also a control program or the like can be sufficiently stored. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure occurrence rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed especially when random access is performed. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are transferred to the program storage area 233a or data table provided in the work RAM 233 constituted by DRAM. The process of transferring to the storage area 233b and storing it is executed.

  Specifically, first, based on the above-described hardware operations of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234, the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR-type ROM 234d after the system reset is released is read according to the boot program set in the buffer RAM 234c. Among the control programs stored in the two program storage area 234a1, a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S2701). The predetermined amount of control program transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

  Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the head address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S2702). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot program included in the control program transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a by the process of S2701.

  Further, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S2702, the MPU 231 executes various processes while reading out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction instead of reading the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1. Then, various processes are executed. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the processing of S2702, it is then stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot program that is started to be executed by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b by a predetermined amount (S2703). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-described various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are stored in the data table. Transfer to the storage area 233b.

  Then, after executing other processing necessary for the boot processing (S2704), the instruction pointer 231a is executed after the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a, that is, after the end of this boot processing (see S2601 in FIG. 109). By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the power initialization process (see S2602 in FIG. 109) (S2705), the boot program is finished and the boot process is terminated.

  As described above, by executing the boot process (S2601), the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. At the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address described above. Thereafter, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. To execute various processes.

  Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control program and the fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. By transferring the data to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read out a control program and fixed value data from a work RAM constituted by a DRAM having a high reading speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the auxiliary effect section.

  On the other hand, not all boot programs are stored in the NOR-type ROM 234d, but a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND-type flash memory 234a. Even if it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small-capacity NOR-type ROM 234d. Can do.

  In the boot process shown in FIG. 110, the predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S2701 includes all remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although it is configured, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. A predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S2701 is a boot program that executes a boot process to be processed following the process of S2702 It may be part of The boot program transferred here transfers a predetermined amount of the control program including the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a, and further, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set as an instruction pointer. The process set to 231a may be performed. Then, the processing of S2703 to S2705 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

  In addition, the boot program transferred by the process of S2701 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, and then the head of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. Processing for setting an address in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. In addition, a part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this processing further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently to the program storage area 233a. Processing for setting the head address of the stored boot program in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and then the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a in the instruction pointer 231a is performed in S2701. The processing of S2703 to S2705 may be executed after repeating a plurality of times including the processing of S2702.

  Thus, even if the boot program has a large program size and the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at a time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. The boot program can be transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount.

  In the present control example, a case has been described in which a part of the boot program executed by the MPU 231 is first stored in the first program storage area 234d1 when the system reset is released, but all the boot programs are stored in the first program storage area 234d1. One program storage area 234d1 may be stored. In this case, when starting the boot process, the MPU 231 may execute the processes of S2703 to S2705 without performing the processes of S2701 and S2702. This eliminates the need to transfer the boot program to the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the boot processing time. Therefore, the control of the auxiliary effect section in the MPU 231 that can be performed after the boot process can be started earlier.

  Now, the description returns to FIG. When the boot process is completed, an initial setting process is executed in accordance with the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S2602). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231 and various settings for the register group in the MPU 231 and the I / O device are performed. Further, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set for the respective flags. Note that “off” or “0” is set as the initial value of each flag unless otherwise specified.

  Further, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237, the image controller 237 draws an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And instructing execution of display processing. Thus, immediately after the power is turned on, an image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. Thereby, in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacture, immediately after turning on the power, the pachinko machine 10 is checked by checking whether an image of a color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the start can be normally started.

  Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 (S2603). This transfer instruction includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 storing image data corresponding to the main image when the power is turned on, transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. In accordance with this transfer instruction, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with the transfer instruction. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

  When the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the transfer end to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can recognize that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. When the image controller 237 completes the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, transfer end information indicating the end of transfer is stored in a register or a partial area of the built-in memory provided in the image controller 237. You may make it write. The MPU 231 reads information in this register or a partial area of the built-in memory as needed, and detects that transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has been completed by detecting writing of transfer end information by the image controller 237. You may do it.

  The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the process of S2603, the power-on variation image is then displayed. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so that the image data corresponding to is transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S2604). In this transfer instruction, the head address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image, the data size of the image data, transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), , The start address of the power-on variation image area 235b as the transfer destination is included, and the image controller receives image data corresponding to the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 in the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with the transfer instruction. The image is transferred to the fluctuation image area 235b at power-on. The image data transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

  When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image to the power-on variation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the process of S2604, the simple image display flag 233c is then displayed. Is turned on (S2605). Thus, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in a transfer setting process (see FIG. 123A) described later. Resident image transfer setting processing for instructing transfer to the image controller 237 so as to transfer is executed (see S4602 in FIG. 123A).

  The simple image display flag 233c is used to transfer all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on a transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It remains on until it is finished. Thereby, in the meantime, in the V-interrupt process (see FIG. 111 (b)), the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image (not shown), which are power-on images, are drawn. Command determination processing (see S2908 in FIG. 111 (b)) and simple display setting processing (see S2909 in FIG. 111 (b)) are executed.

  As described above, since the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is caused by the slow reading speed. It takes a lot of time to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in the main processing, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the power-on main image is transferred to the third image. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the hall-related person can turn on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The main image can be confirmed. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 114. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the player resides in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped.

  Also in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the third symbol display device 81 starts operating without any problem when the power is turned on. The use of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed as the character ROM 234 can suppress the deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

  In the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, the power-on variation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the power-on main image after the power is turned on. When the player starts playing while being displayed on the display device 81, there is a ball entry (start winning) into the first winning opening 64, and an instruction to start the changing effect is sent from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device. 113, that is, when a display variation pattern command is received, a variation image at power-on (not shown) is immediately displayed during the variation rendering period to perform a simple variation rendering. Can do. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery is surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on.

  As described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image is continuously displayed on the third symbol display device 81, but the character ROM 234 is displayed. Is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, and therefore, it takes time to transfer the data. Therefore, after the power is turned on, the time during which the main image is displayed when the power is turned on also becomes longer. However, since the pachinko machine 10 can perform a simple variation effect using the power-on variation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, after power failure Even immediately after the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  After the processing of S2605, interrupt permission is set (S2606), and clock output start is set for the clock generator 900 (S2607). Thereby, the clock output is started after the display control device 114 is started up. Since the sound lamp control device 113 starts up earlier than the display control device 114, the timing at which the clock output is started is after both the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are started up. Can be accurately synchronized.

  Thereafter, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. Thereby, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S2606, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

  Next, a command interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 111 (a) is a flowchart showing the command interrupt processing. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes a command interrupt process.

  In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S2801), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are read by a command determination process or a simple command determination process of a V interrupt process described later, and a process corresponding to the command is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 111 (b), a V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 will be described. FIG. 111 (b) is a flowchart showing the V interrupt processing. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, and an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the image is drawn. A list (see FIG. 59) is created, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237, thereby instructing the image controller 237 to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

  As described above, the execution of this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V-interrupt signal is a signal that is generated every 20 milliseconds when image rendering processing for one frame is completed in the image controller 237 and transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image when the image drawing process or the display process is not finished, so that drawing of a new image is started in the middle of drawing the image, It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  Here, the outline of the flow of the V interrupt process will be described first, and then the details of each process will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 111 (b), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2901), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on. If it is off (S2901: No), it means that all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred, so it is not a power-on image (not shown) but a normal effect. In order to display an image on the third symbol display device 81, a command determination process (S2902) is executed, and then a display setting process (S2903) is executed.

  In the command determination process (S2902), the content of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process is analyzed, and the process according to the command is executed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, a display data table for demonstration or a variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfer corresponding to the set display data table is performed. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the process is executed. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, and it is highly likely that a plurality of commands are stored in the command buffer area during the 20 milliseconds. is there. In particular, when the main control device 110 determines the start of a variation effect, there is a high possibility that a display variation pattern command, a display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the variation effect mode and stop type selected by the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113 can be quickly grasped, and an effect image corresponding to the mode can be obtained. Drawing of an image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Details of this command interrupt processing will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  In the display setting process (S2903), an image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S2902) or the like. The contents of are specifically identified. Further, an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the processing status and the like, and a display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. Details of the display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After the display setting process is executed, a task process is then executed (S2904). In this task process, the image is constructed based on the content of the next one frame image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 specified by the display setting process (S2903) or the simple display setting process (S2909). In addition to specifying the type of sprite (display object) to be performed, various parameters necessary for drawing, such as a display coordinate position, an enlargement ratio, and a rotation angle, are determined for each sprite.

  Next, a transfer setting process is executed (S2905). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. In addition, while the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is transmitted from the character ROM 234 to the normal controller for the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information in the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. In addition to setting a transfer instruction to be transferred to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 and receiving a continuous notice command or a back image change command from the audio lamp control device 113, the image controller 237 is continuously connected. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous notice image used in the notice effect and the image data of the rear image after the change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. Details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 123 and 124.

  Next, in order to correct the drawing content, a drawing correction process is executed (S2906). Details of the drawing correction processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, a drawing process is executed (S2907). In this drawing process, the types of sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S2904), parameters necessary for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set in the transfer setting process (S2905) are used. 59 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. Thereby, the image controller 237 executes image drawing processing according to the drawing list. Details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S2908). As a counter updated by the process of S2908, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and an update process is performed each time the V interrupt process is executed. When reception of the display stop type command is detected in the command determination process, the stop type indicated by the display stop type command (big hit A, big hit B, front / rear outreach, reach other than front / rear out, reach out, chance The stop type table corresponding to the eye) is compared with the stop type counter, and the stop symbol after the change effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

  Then, it is determined whether or not the clock signal input from the clock generator 900 has changed (S2909). If it is determined that the clock signal has changed (S2909: Yes), the display clock counter is incremented by 1 (S2910), and the V interrupt process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the clock signal has not changed (S2909: No), the V interrupt process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2901 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2901: Yes), this means that transfer of all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image (not shown) on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination process (S2911) is executed, and then the simple display setting process (S2912) is executed. Transition to processing.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 112 to 118, details of the above-described command determination process (S2902), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. First, FIG. 112 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing.

  In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 112, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S3001). If there is no unprocessed new command (S3001: No), The command determination process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S3001: Yes), the new command flag for notifying the display setting process (S2903) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S3002), and then the command The command types of all unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area are analyzed (S3003).

  First, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among unprocessed commands (S3004). If there is a display variation pattern command (S3004: Yes), the variation pattern command processing is executed. (S3005), the process returns to S3001.

  Details of the variation pattern command process (S3005) will be described with reference to FIG. 113 (a). FIG. 113A is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command process. This variation pattern command process executes a process corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is displayed. It is set in the buffer 233d (S3101).

  Here, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always performed several seconds or more in the main controller 110, two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command is displayed incorrectly. It may be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the process of S3101, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  If a change display data table corresponding to a change pattern with a long change time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, a change effect having a change time shorter than the set display data table is actually generated by the main control device. 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may cause the player to feel uncomfortable.

  On the other hand, as shown in this control example, by setting the change display data table corresponding to the change pattern with the shortest change time in the display data table buffer 233d, the change is actually longer than the set display data table. Even when the variable effect having time is instructed by the main controller 110, as will be described later, after the variable effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, the main controller 110 performs the next display. Since the display setting process controls the display of the 3rd symbol display device 81 so that the demonstration effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player can feel the 3rd symbol display device 81 without any discomfort. You can continue to see changes in the three symbols.

  Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S3101 is determined and read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3102). Then, among the data table determination flags provided for each variation display data table corresponding to each variation pattern, the data table determination flag corresponding to the variation display data table set by the processing of S3101 is turned on, and other variations A data table discrimination flag corresponding to the display data table is set to OFF (S3103). In the display setting process, by referring to the data table determination flag set by the process of S3103, it is easy to determine which fluctuation pattern the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d corresponds to. Judgment can be made.

  Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S3101, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the time counter 233h (S3104), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3105). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the confirmed display flag 233z are set to OFF (S3106), the variation pattern command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  By executing this variation pattern command processing, in the display setting processing, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S3105, from the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S3101. The drawing contents specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f are extracted, the contents of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 are specified, and at the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e is processed by the processing of S3102. The transfer data information defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in (2), and the image data of the sprite required in the set variable display data table is previously stored in the normal video R from the character ROM 234. To be transferred to the image storage area 236a of M236, to control the image controller 237.

  In the display setting process, the time of the variation effect defined in the variation display data table is measured using the time counter 233h in which the time data is set by the process of S3104, and the variation effect in the variation display data table is completed. If it is determined, the stop display setting is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in step S3004 that there is no display variation pattern command (S3004: No), it is then determined whether there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S3006). If there is a display variation type command (S3006: Yes), stop type command processing is executed (S3007), and the processing returns to S3001.

  Details of the stop type command process (S3007) will be described with reference to FIG. 113 (b). FIG. 113 (b) is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. This stop type command process executes a process corresponding to the display variation type command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the stop type command processing, first, stop type table corresponding to stop type information (one of big hit A, big hit B, front / rear outreach, reach other than front / rear out, complete out, chance chance) indicated by the display stop type command. (S3201), the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter updated each time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 111 (b)) is executed, and the third symbol display device The stop symbol after the change effect displayed in 81 is finally set (S3202).

  Then, among the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the processing of S3202 is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flags corresponding to other stop symbols are turned off. (S3203), the stop type command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a predetermined time has elapsed since the variation based on the data table was started. , Offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the process of S3202 is described. In the task process (S2904) described above, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the change was started, the stop symbol set by the process of S3202 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set in S3203, and the specified stop By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. Then, the address at which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. Note that the image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235 as described above.

  As described above, in this control example, the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed. However, before the drawing on the third symbol display device 81 is performed, the normal video is read from the character ROM 234. Image data necessary for drawing can be transferred to the RAM 236. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a, the drawing responsiveness in the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  In addition, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always performed several seconds or more in the main controller 110, two or more display stop type commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, so the command determination process is executed. If there are two or more display stop type commands stored in the command buffer area, part of the command will change due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command will stop display for mistakenly. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the process of S3201, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, the stop type is assumed to be completely out of order, and the stop type is determined. Determine the table. As a result, a stop symbol corresponding to complete detachment is set by the processing of S3202.

  If the stop symbol corresponding to the “special symbol jackpot” is set, the third symbol display device 81 actually displays “special symbol” even if it is a “special symbol detachment”. The stop symbol corresponding to “Large Bonus” will be displayed, which may cause the player to misunderstand that the pachinko machine 10 has become a “special symbol jackpot”, possibly reducing the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, as shown in the present control example, by setting a stop symbol corresponding to complete disconnection, in fact, if it is a “special symbol jackpot”, the third symbol display device 81 stops complete disconnection. Even if the symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a “special symbol jackpot”, so that the player can be pleased.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the processing of S3006 that there is no display stop type command (S3006: No), it is then determined whether there is a jackpot related command among the unprocessed commands (S3008). If there is a related command, display jackpot related command processing is executed (S3009), and the processing returns to S3001.

  Here, referring to FIG. 114 to FIG. 117, the above-mentioned display jackpot related command processing (S3009), which is one processing of the command determination processing (S2902, see FIG. 112) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, is performed. Details will be described. FIG. 114 is a flowchart showing the display jackpot related command processing.

  In this display jackpot-related command processing, as shown in FIG. 114, first, it is determined whether or not there is a display opening command among unprocessed commands (S3301), and if there is a display opening command ( (S3301: Yes), an opening command process is executed (S3302), and the process proceeds to S3303.

  Here, the details of the opening command process (S3302) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 115A is a flowchart showing the opening command process. This opening command process executes a process corresponding to the opening command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the opening command process, first, an opening display data table corresponding to the command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3401). Thereafter, a transfer data table corresponding to the opening display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3402), and time data is set in the time counter 233h based on the set opening display data table (S3403). Thereafter, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3404). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the confirmed display flag 233z are set to OFF (S3405), the opening command is terminated, and the process returns to the display jackpot related command processing.

  Returning to FIG. 114, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the processing of S3301 that there is no display opening command (S3301: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a display round number command among unprocessed commands (S3303). If there is a round number command for use (S3303: Yes), the round number command process is executed (S3304), and the process proceeds to S3305.

  Here, the details of the round number command processing (S3304) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 115B is a flowchart showing round number command processing. This round number command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display round number command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the round number command processing, first, a round number display data table corresponding to the round number indicated by the display round number command is determined, and the determined round number display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data. It is set in the table buffer 233d (S3501). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3502).

  Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S3501, time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S3503), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S3504). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the confirmed display flag 233z are set to OFF (S3505), the round number command processing is ended, and the display jackpot related command processing is returned to.

  Returning to FIG. 114, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S3303 that there is no display round number command (S3303: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display ending command among the unprocessed commands (S3305). If there is an ending command for use (S3305: Yes), ending command processing is executed (S3306), and the process proceeds to S3307.

  Here, the details of the ending command process (S3306) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 116A is a flowchart showing the ending command process. This ending command process is to execute a process corresponding to the display ending command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the ending command processing, first, an ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending effect indicated by the display ending command is determined, the determined ending display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is displayed. It is set in the buffer 233d (S3601). Next, Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S3602).

  Next, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S3601, time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S3603), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ( S3604). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the confirmed display flag 233z are set to OFF (S3605), the ending command process is terminated, and the process returns to the display jackpot related command process.

  Returning to the description of FIG. If it is determined in the processing of S3305 that there is no display ending command (S3305: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a display normal winning effect command among the unprocessed commands (S3307). If there is a display normal winning effect command (S3307: Yes), the normal winning effect command process is executed (S3308), and the process proceeds to S3309.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 116B, the details of the normal winning effect command process (S3308) will be described. FIG. 116 (b) is a flowchart showing the normal winning effect command process. This normal winning effect command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display normal winning effect command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the normal winning effect command process, first, the normal winning display data table corresponding to the display mode of the normal winning effect indicated by the display normal winning effect command is determined, and the determined normal winning display data table is stored in the data table storage area 233b. Are set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3701). Next, Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S3702).

  Next, based on the normal winning display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S3701, time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S3703), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S3704). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the confirmed display flag 233z are set to OFF (S3705), the normal winning command process is terminated, and the process returns to the display jackpot related command process.

  Returning to the description of FIG. If it is determined in the processing of S3307 that there is no display normal winning effect command (S3307: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a display over winning effect command among the unprocessed commands (S3309). ) If there is a display over winning effect command (S3309: Yes), the normal over effect command process is executed (S3310), and the process proceeds to S3311.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 117A, details of the over winning effect command processing (S3310) will be described. FIG. 117 (a) is a flowchart showing over-winning effect command processing. This over-winning effect command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display over-winning effect command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the over-winning effect command process, first, an over-winning effect display data table corresponding to the display mode of the over-winning effect indicated by the display over-winning effect command is determined, and the determined over-winning effect display data table is stored in the data table. The data is read from the area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3801). Next, the Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S3802).

  Next, based on the over-winning effect display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S3801, time data indicating the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S3803), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S3804). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the confirmed display flag 233z are set to OFF (S3805), the over winning effect command process is terminated, and the process returns to the display jackpot related command process.

  Returning to the description of FIG. If it is determined in the processing of S3309 that there is no display over winning effect command (S3309: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a display V effect command among the unprocessed commands (S3311). If there is a display V effect command (S3311: Yes), the V effect command process is executed (S3312), and the display jackpot related command process is terminated.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 117B, details of the V effect command processing (S3312) will be described. FIG. 117 (b) is a flowchart showing the V effect command process. This V effect command process is to execute a process corresponding to the display V effect command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the V effect command process, first, a V effect display data table corresponding to the display mode of the V effect indicated by the display V effect command is determined, and the determined V effect display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b. The display data table buffer 233d is set (S3901). Next, the Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S3902).

  Next, based on the V effect display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S3901, time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S3903), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S3904). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the confirmed display flag 233z are set to OFF (S3805), the V effect command process is terminated, and the process returns to the display jackpot related command process.

  Returning to the description of FIG. If it is determined in the process of S3311 that there is no display V effect command (S3311: No), the display jackpot related command process is terminated as it is.

  Returning to FIG. 112, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the processing of S3008 that there is no jackpot related command (S3008: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a back image change command among the unprocessed commands (S3010), and the back image change command is determined. If there is (S3010: Yes), the back image change command process is executed (S3011), and the process returns to S3001.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 118A, details of the rear image change command processing (S3009) will be described. FIG. 118A is a flowchart showing the rear image change command process. This rear image change command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the rear image change command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the back image change command processing, first, the back image change flag for notifying the normal image transfer setting processing (S4603) of the change of the back image due to reception of the back image change command in the ON state is set to ON (S4001). . Then, among the back image discrimination flags provided for each back image type (back A to C), the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image change command is turned on, and other back images The rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the type is set to OFF (S4002), the rear image change command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the back image change flag set by the process of S4001 is turned on, the back image type after the change is specified from the back image discrimination flag set by the process of S4002. . If the specified back image type is back B or back C, a part of the image data corresponding to the back image is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 as described above. Therefore, the transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the rear image in the predetermined range is transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, in the task processing, when it is specified that any one of the back surfaces A to C is displayed according to the back surface type of the back image specified in the display data table, from the back image discrimination flag set in S4002, The rear image type to be displayed at the time is specified, the range of the rear image to be displayed is specified with time, and the RAM type (resident) that stores the image data corresponding to the range of the rear image Video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the RAM address.

  Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 in 20 milliseconds or less, two or more back image change commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, so the command determination process is executed. If there are two or more back image change commands stored in the command buffer area, some of the commands will change due to noise and other commands, and another command will change the back image by mistake. It may be interpreted as a command. In the processing of S4002, when it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received earlier is turned on. Alternatively, the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received later may be turned on. Further, any one rear image change command may be extracted, and the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since the change of the back image does not directly affect the game value in the pachinko machine 10, it is preferably set as appropriate according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in step S3010 that there is no rear image change command (S3010: No), then it is determined whether there is an error command among unprocessed commands (S3010). If (S3010: Yes), error command processing is executed (S3011), and the processing returns to S3001.

  Here, details of the error command process (S3011) will be described with reference to FIG. 118 (b). FIG. 118B is a flowchart showing error command processing. This error command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the error command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the error command process, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S4101). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to off (S4102). The process ends, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S4101, the error type generated from the error determination flag set by the process of S4102 is determined, and the error type is dealt with. The processing is executed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in the process in S4102, the error determination flags corresponding to all the error types indicated by the respective error commands are set to ON. As a result, warning images corresponding to all error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that a player or a hall-related person can correctly grasp the error occurrence status.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in step S3012 that there is no error command (S3012: No), it is then determined whether there is a counter command among unprocessed commands (S3014).

  If it is determined that there is a counter command in the process of S3014 (S3014: Yes), the lighting clock storage area 223n is updated based on the received command (S3015), and the process returns to S3001. The timing to turn on the sub LED 290 in the sound lamp control device 113 is notified to the display control device 114 by the counter command. Based on the notified timing of lighting the sub LED 290, the lighting clock storage area 223n is updated. Based on the information stored in the lighting clock storage area 223n and the display clock counter 223m, a sub symbol is set in a sub symbol setting process (see FIG. 122) described later. As a result, control is performed so that the sub-symbol is displayed at the same timing as the sub-LED 290 is turned on in the sound lamp control device 113 with reference to the display clock counter 223m that is a counter synchronized with the sound lamp control device 113. Therefore, the lighting of the sub LED 290 and the display of the sub symbol can be produced in synchronization.

  If it is determined in step S3014 that there is no counter command (S3014: No), it is then determined whether there is a drive data command (S3016). If there is a drive data command (S3016: Yes), reception is performed. The drive data storage area 223p is updated based on the command (S3017), and the process proceeds to S3001.

  The display content (for example, the display angle) can be changed according to the updated information driven by the sub liquid crystal display device 523 by the process of S3017, so that a suitable effect can be executed.

  If it is determined in the process of S3016 that there is no drive data command (S3016: No), then the process corresponding to the other unprocessed command is executed (S3018), and the process returns to S3001.

  In the process of S3001 that is executed again after the process of each command is executed, it is determined again whether there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S3001: Yes). ), The processing of S3002 to S3013 and S3019 is executed again. Then, the processes of S3001 to S3013 and S3019 are repeatedly executed until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area. If it is determined in the process of S3001 that there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, The command determination process ends.

  Note that the simple command determination process (S2911) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 111B) is the same as the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, a command necessary for displaying a power-on image (not shown) from unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area, that is, a display variation pattern command and a display command Only the stop type command is extracted, the variation pattern command process (see FIG. 113 (a)) and the stop type command process (see FIG. 113 (b)), which are processes corresponding to the respective commands, are executed, and others For this command, the process corresponding to the command is discarded without executing the process.

  Here, in the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 113A) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the variation image at power-on is displayed in the display data table buffer 233d in the processing of S3101. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on variation image that are set and required in that case are stored in the power-on main moving image area 235a and the power-on variation moving image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S3102, the Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233b and the content is cleared.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 119 to 122, the details of the above-described display setting process (S 2903), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 119 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

  In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 112, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is ON (S4201). If the new command flag is not ON, that is, if it is OFF (S4201: No), In the command determination process executed first, it is determined that a new command has not been processed, the process of S4202 to S4204 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S4205. On the other hand, if the new flag is on (S4201: Yes), it is determined that a new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, the new command flag is set to off (S4202), and then S4203 to S4204. By this process, the process corresponding to the new command is executed.

  In the process of S4203, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is ON (S4203). If the error occurrence flag is on (S4203: Yes), a warning image setting process is executed (S4204).

  Details of the warning image setting process will be described here with reference to FIG. FIG. 120 is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process. This process is a process for developing image data that causes the third symbol display device 81 to display a warning image corresponding to the error that has occurred. First, an error determination flag is referred to, and all error determinations that are set to ON are performed. The warning image data for displaying the warning image of the error corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is developed (S4301).

  In task processing, the type of sprite (display object) that constitutes the warning image is specified based on the developed warning image data, and the display coordinate position, magnification, and rotation angle are drawn for each sprite. Various parameters are determined.

  In the warning image setting process, after the process of S4301, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S4302), and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. 119. After the warning image setting process (S4204) or in the process of S4203, if it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, is off (S4203: No), the process proceeds to S4205.

  In S4205, pointer update processing is executed (S4205). Here, the details of the pointer update processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 121 is a flowchart showing the pointer update process. This pointer update processing acquires the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table respectively stored in the display data table buffer 233d and transfer data table buffer 233e. This is a process for updating the pointer 233f for designating the power address.

  In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S4401). That is, the update process is performed so that the pointer 233f is incremented by 1 every time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, the start information is described in the address “0000H”, and the substance of each data is specified after the address “0001H”. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 as it is stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update processing. Substantial data can be read from the data table.

  After updating the value of the pointer 233f by the processing of S4401, next, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, whether or not the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information. Is discriminated (S4402). As a result, if it is End information (S4402: Yes), it means that in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the pointer 233f has been updated past the address where the entity data is described.

  Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demonstration display data table (S4403), and if it is a demonstration display data table (S4403: Yes), the display data is displayed. The time data corresponding to the presentation time in the demonstration display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the time counter 233h (S4404), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S4405), and this processing ends. Return to the display setting process. Thereby, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be developed in order from the top of the demonstration display data table, so that the demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4403, when it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the display data table for demonstration (S4403: No), the value of the pointer 233f is subtracted by 1 ( S4406) This process is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the display data table for demonstration, for example, a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address in which End information is described. Since the drawing contents of the above are always developed, the third image display device 81 can display the last image defined by the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S4402, if the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S4402: No), this process ends and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, returning to FIG. 119, the description will be continued. After the pointer update process, the drawing content at the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process is expanded from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S4206). In the task processing, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the drawing content expanded in the processing of S4206 together with the warning image previously expanded and the display coordinate position for each sprite. Various parameters necessary for drawing, such as a zoom ratio, an enlargement ratio, and a rotation angle are determined.

  Next, in order to set the display of the sub symbol, a sub symbol setting process is executed (S4207). Here, the details of the sub symbol setting process (S4207) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This sub symbol setting process is a process for displaying the sub symbol on the third symbol display device 81 or the sub liquid crystal display device 523 in synchronization with the sub LED 290 whose lighting is controlled in the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the sub symbol setting process (S4207), first, it is determined whether or not it is a variable period (S4501). If it is determined in the processing of S4501 that the period is not a fluctuation period (S4501: No), this processing is terminated as it is not the timing for displaying the sub-symbol displayed corresponding to the fluctuation.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the period is a fluctuation period (S4501), it is then determined whether or not the value of the display clock counter 233m is a lighting timing value (S4502). Specifically, it is determined whether the information corresponding to the value of the display clock counter 233m is the lighting information among the information stored in the lighting clock storage area 233n.

  In the process of S4502, when it is determined that the value of the display clock counter 233m is the value of the lighting timing (S4502: Yes), the drawing content acquired in the process of S4206 of the display setting process (see FIG. 119) is determined. Among these, the sub-symbol information is set (changed) to lighting, and this processing is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4502 that the value of the display clock counter 233m is not the value of the lighting timing (S4502: No), the drawing content acquired in the process of S4206 of the display setting process (see FIG. 119). Among these, the sub-symbol information is set to be turned off (changed), and this processing is terminated.

  Returning to FIG. 119, the description will be continued. When the process of S4207 is completed, the value of the time counter 233h is decremented by 1 (S4208), and it is determined whether or not the value of the time counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S4209). If the value of the time counter 233h is 1 or more (S4209: No), the display setting process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if the value of the time counter 233h is equal to or less than 0 (S4209: Yes), it means that the production effect time corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing for ending the variable display and performing the stop display, so it is confirmed whether the fixed display flag 233z is on. (S4210).

  As a result, if the confirmed display flag 233z is off (S4210: Yes), the confirmed display data table is first displayed in the display data table buffer 233d because the confirmed display effect has not been performed yet and the confirmed display effect is performed. (S4311), and then the Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S4212). Then, time data corresponding to the presentation time in the final display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S4213), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S4214). Then, after the confirmation display flag 233z indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S4215), the content of the stop symbol determination flag is directly copied to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S4216), the process returns to the V interrupt process.

  As a result, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the fixed symbol display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the end of the effect. Thus, the drawing content can be set. Moreover, the effect displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 can be easily changed into a fixed display effect only by changing the display data table set to the display data table buffer 233b to a fixed display data table. And, compared with the case where the display contents are changed by starting another program as in the prior art, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore, the MPU 231 is not greatly loaded. Regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

  The previous stop symbol determination flag set by the processing of S4216 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variation effect changes depending on the stop symbol of the variation effect performed one time before. In the variation display data table, the variation based on the data table is changed. The symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the fluctuating effect performed one time before is described until a predetermined time elapses from the start. In the task process (S2904), until the predetermined time elapses after the change is started, the previous stop pattern determination flag set in S4216 is specified and the stop effect of the change effect performed immediately before is specified. The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol. Thereby, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

  On the other hand, if the confirmation display flag 233z is not on but off in the processing of S4210 (S4210: No), it is determined whether or not the demonstration display flag 233y is on (S4217). If the demonstration display flag 233y is off (S4217: Yes), it means that the value of the time counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the final display effect, so the demonstration display data table is displayed as display data. The contents are set in the table buffer 233d (S4218), and then the null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S4219). Then, time data corresponding to the production time in the demonstration display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S4220). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S4221), the demonstration display flag 233y indicating that the demonstration effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S4222), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. .

  Thus, when the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect is not received after the final display effect is finished, the demonstration effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The drawing content can be set.

  In the process of S4217, if the demonstration display flag 233y is on (S4217: Yes), it means that the demonstration effect is performed after the final display effect is finished, and the demonstration effect is finished. End and return to V-interrupt processing. In this case, as described above, various settings are made so that the demonstration effect is started again by the pointer update process executed in the next V interrupt process. The demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until a new display variation pattern command is received.

  In the V interrupt process (see FIG. 111B), the same process as the display setting process is also performed in the simple display setting process (S2912) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on. However, in the simple display setting process, after the effect time of the variation effect by the power-on variation image ends, the power-on variation image corresponding to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command for a predetermined time (Fig. (Not shown) is set in the display data table buffer 233d, which is a display data table that stipulates that display is stopped.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 123 and 124, details of the above-described transfer setting process (S2905), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. First, FIG. 123A is a flowchart showing the transfer setting process.

  In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S4601). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S4601: Yes), all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The process is executed (S4602), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. Thereby, a transfer instruction for transferring the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set to the image controller 237. Details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on as a result of the processing of S4601, that is, if it is off (S4601: No), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video. It is transferred to the RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S4603), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. Thus, the transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. Details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, a resident image transfer setting process (S4602), which is a process of the transfer setting process (S2905) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 123 (b). FIG. 123B is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process (S4602).

  In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not an instruction to transfer untransferred image data is issued to the image controller 237 (S4701), and if a transfer instruction is transmitted (S4701: Yes). Further, based on the transfer instruction, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 237 has ended (S4702). In the process of S4702, when an image data transfer instruction is issued to the image controller 237 and a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined in S4702 that the transfer process has not ended (S4702: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237. Therefore, the resident image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (S4702: Yes), the process proceeds to S4703. Also, as a result of the process of S4701, when the transfer instruction of untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (S4701: No), the process proceeds to S4703.

  In the process of S4703, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S4703). A transfer instruction to the image controller 237 is set so as to transfer the image data to be transferred to the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 (S4704), and the resident image transfer setting process is terminated.

  As a result, transfer data information relating to untransferred resident object image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the head address and final address of the character ROM 234 storing the resident target image data, transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and transfer destination (transferred here). The head address of an area provided in the resident video RAM 235 in which the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified by the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and then during the unused period of the resident video RAM 236. To the designated address of the resident video RAM 236. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  If all the resident target image data has been transferred as a result of the processing of S4703 (S4703: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S4705), and the resident image transfer setting processing is terminated. Thus, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 111B), the command is not the simple command determination process (see S2908 in FIG. 111B) and the simple display setting process (see S2909 in FIG. 111B). Since the determination process (see FIGS. 112 to 118) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 119 to 93) are executed, the normal image drawing is set, and the third symbol display device 81 has The normal image is displayed. The subsequent transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 124) (see S4601: No in FIG. 123A).

  By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 removes all the resident images to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 excluding the power-on main image and the power-on variation image that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 performs control so that the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 is held without being overwritten while the power is turned on. Thus, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process is resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

  Therefore, after all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display controller 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. The image drawing process can be performed at. Thus, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed at the time of image drawing. Therefore, the time required for the reading can be omitted, and the drawn image can be displayed immediately on the third symbol display device 81 by drawing the image.

  In particular, in the resident video RAM 235, image data of frequently displayed images such as a back image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, the main controller 110, the sound lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114 are displayed. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is made resident immediately after the display is determined by, for example, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, the player can perform various operations performed at an arbitrary timing. The responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Next, a normal image transfer setting process (S4603), which is a process of the transfer setting process (S2905) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 124 is a flowchart showing the normal image transfer setting process (S4603).

  In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S4205) of the display setting process (S2903) executed previously is used. Information described at the indicated address is acquired (S4801). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S4802), and if it is transfer data information (S4802: Yes), the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored from the transfer data information. Start address (storage source start address), final address (storage source final address), and transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) start address are extracted and stored in a transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( In step S4803, a transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the on state is set to on (S4804), and the process proceeds to step S4805.

  In the process of S4802, if the acquired information is not transfer data information but Null data (S4802: No), the process of S4803 and S4804 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S4805. In the process of S4805, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous transfer of image data has been completed (S4805), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S4805: Yes), it is further determined whether the transfer of the image data performed by the image controller 237 has been completed based on the transfer instruction (S4806).

  In the process of S4806, when an image data transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 and a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined that the transfer process is not completed by the process in S4806 (S4806: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237. Therefore, the normal image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (S4806: Yes), the process proceeds to S4807. Also, as a result of the processing in S4805, if the image data transfer instruction has not been set for the image controller 237 after the previous transfer processing has ended (S4805: No), the processing proceeds to S4807.

  In the process of S4807, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S4807). If the transfer start flag is on (S4807: Yes), there is image data to start transfer, so the transfer start flag is present. Is turned off (S4808), the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer in the process of S4803 is set as the transfer target image data, and the process proceeds to S4813. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S4807: No), it is then determined whether or not the back image change flag is on (S4809). If the back image change flag is not on but off (S4809: No), there is no image data to be transferred, and the normal image transfer setting process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the back image change flag is on (S4809: Yes), it means that the back image is changed. Therefore, after the back image change flag is set to off (S4810), the back image provided for each back image type Among the discrimination flags, the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the on state is specified, and the image data is set as transfer target image data (S4811). Furthermore, the head address (storage source start address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the on state, and the transfer destination (normally) The top address of the video RAM 236) is acquired (S4812), and the process proceeds to S4813.

  When the back image discrimination flag in the on state is that of the back A, all the corresponding image data is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and therefore the image to be transferred to the normal video RAM 236. There is no data. Therefore, in the processing of S4813, if the back image discrimination flag in the on state is that of the back A, the normal image transfer processing is ended as it is.

  In the processing of S4813, it is determined whether or not the transfer target image data is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S4813). The determination in the process of S4813 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233j. That is, when the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the transfer target image data is read from the stored image data determination flag 233j and the storage state is "ON", the image data of the sprite that is the transfer target is the normal video. If it is determined that the image is stored in the RAM 236 and the storage state is “OFF”, it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

  If the transfer target image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S4813 (S4813: Yes), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. Then, the normal image transfer setting process is finished as it is. Thereby, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and reducing the traffic on the bus line 240. Can be planned.

  On the other hand, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S4813 (S4813: No), a transfer instruction for the transfer target image data is set (S4814). Thereby, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 stores the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the transfer target image can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the transfer target image, transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and transfer destination (transfer here). The start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 to store the image data of the transfer target image is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads the image data specified by the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and specifies the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). To the specified address. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  After the process of S4814, the stored image data determination flag 233j is updated (S4815), and the normal transfer setting process is terminated. As described above, the stored image data determination flag 233j is updated by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the transfer target image data to “on” and substituting the same image storage area 236a as that one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to the other sprites to be stored in the area to “off”.

  As described above, when the normal image transfer process is executed, if the back image is changed based on the reception of the back image change command in the command determination process executed earlier, the back image is displayed. The image data not stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

  In this control example, the display data table is displayed in the display data table buffer 233d in accordance with a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. As a result, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, the MPU 231 executes the normal image transfer setting process to the image controller 237 according to the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set, the sprite image data used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. Can do.

  In the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, so that the transfer data information is determined in accordance with the display data table. When drawing a sprite, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  In the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 125, the details of the above-described drawing correction process (S2906), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. FIG. 125 is a flowchart showing the drawing correction process. The drawing correction process (S2906) is a process for correcting the effect to be displayed in response to the sub liquid crystal display device 523 being driven.

  In the drawing correction process, first, it is determined whether or not the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is driven (S4901). If it is determined that the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is not driven in the process of S4901 (S4901: No), it is not necessary to correct the drawing content, and thus this process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4901, when it is determined that the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is driven (S4901: Yes), the process proceeds to S4902 in order to perform correction according to the drive state.

  In the process of S4902, it is determined whether or not the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is slid (S4902). If it is determined in the process of S4902 that the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is slide-driven (S4902: Yes), the display coordinates of the symbols 1 to 3 are corrected according to the amount of slide movement. (S4903), the process proceeds to S4904. In the process of S4903, the display coordinates of the symbols 1 to 3 are corrected, and an effect that the display positions of the symbols 1 to 3 are integrally changed corresponding to the driving of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is executed (display). Can improve the interest of the player.

  If it is determined in the process of S4902 that the slide drive is not performed (S4902: No), the process of S4903 is skipped and the process proceeds to S4904.

  In the process of S4904, it is determined whether or not the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is driven to rotate (S4904). If it is determined in the process of S4904 that the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is rotationally driven (S4904: Yes), the display coordinates (and display angles) of all images are displayed according to the rotational amount of the rotational drive. ) Is corrected (S4905), and this process is terminated.

  Since the display coordinates (and display angle) of the image can be corrected according to the rotation amount of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 by the processing of S4905, a suitable effect is displayed even when the sub liquid crystal display device 523 rotates. can do.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 126, the details of the above-described drawing process (S2907), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. FIG. 126 is a flowchart showing this drawing processing.

  In the drawing process, the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S2904) and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information) , Color information, filter designation information), and the transfer list set by the transfer setting process (S2905), the drawing list shown in FIG. 59 is generated (S4301). That is, in the process of S4301, the storage RAM type and address storing the image data of each sprite are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S2904). The parameters necessary for the sprite determined by the task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, after rearranging each sprite in the order of the sprite that should be placed on the front side from the sprite that should be placed on the back side in the image for one frame, the details for each sprite in the order of the sprite after the rearrangement As a drawing information (detailed information), a drawing list is generated by describing a storage RAM type and address where sprite image data is stored, and parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S2905), the leading address (storage source leading address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data as transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the final address (storage source final address) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are added.

  As described above, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 Depending on the sprite type, the storage RAM type and address in which image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233k are transmitted to the image controller (S4302). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 0, when the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 1, including information instructing to expand the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b as drawing target buffer information Includes information instructing to expand the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c as drawing target buffer information.

  Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws images in order from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list, and develops the image by overwriting the frame buffer designated by the drawing target buffer information. Thereby, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the most back side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the most front side.

  Further, when transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data are determined from the transfer data information. ) And the destination address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted, and the image data stored from the source address to the end address of the storage source are sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination head address of the normal video RAM 236 in anticipation of the normal video RAM 236 being in an unused state. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on a drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 thereafter, and an image is drawn according to the drawing list.

  The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer instructed by the drawing target buffer information, and displays the image information together with the drive signal in the third symbol display device 81. Send to. As a result, the developed image in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, while developing the image drawn in one frame buffer, the image developed from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display 81, and the drawing process and the display process are processed simultaneously in parallel. Can do.

  In the drawing process, after the process of S4302, the drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated (S4303). Then, the drawing process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated by inverting the value, that is, by setting the value to “1” when the value is “0” and setting it to “0” when the value is “1”. Done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted.

  Here, the drawing list is transmitted based on the V interrupt signal executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process for one frame are completed. This is performed every time the drawing process of the embedding process (see FIG. 111B) is executed. Thus, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image for one frame after 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for the remaining minutes is read out. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

  Further, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. Is done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . Thereafter, a frame buffer that expands an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately designating, it is possible to continuously display the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing the image for one frame.

  As described above, in the first control example, the over winning effect is displayed when the game ball is over won to the specific winning opening 65a. Thereby, the player can easily recognize that he has won an over-winning game during the jackpot game, so that it is possible to provide a game machine that is easy for the player to understand.

  Note that information indicating the number of game balls that have been over-winned may be displayed as an over-winning effect. Thereby, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that allows the player to easily grasp the number of game balls that have won over. Further, the production may be varied according to the number of game balls that have won over. Thereby, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the number of game balls over-winned, so that the interest of the player can be improved.

  In the first control example, as an over-winning effect, an over-winning effect indicating that the degree of expectation is high is easily displayed in accordance with the progress of the round in the jackpot game. That is, the selection ratio of the over-winning effect is different according to the number of rounds in the jackpot game. Thereby, even if the jackpot game becomes a long term, the interest of the player can be improved.

  In the first control example, a character string suggesting a right strike (right strike, right strike, right strike) is arranged and displayed in a circle. Thereby, even when the display screen (the sub liquid crystal display device 523 or the third symbol display device 81) rotates, it is possible to suitably suggest (notify) that the game state is a right-handed game.

  In addition, a display suggesting a right strike may be performed, and a voice suggesting a right strike (for example, a voice “Please make a right strike”) may be output. Thereby, even when the display screen is rotated, it is possible to suitably suggest (notify) that the game state is a right-handed game.

  In the first control example, the sub LED 290 is provided on the decorative surface 523b which is the back side of the display surface 523a of the sub liquid crystal display device 523, and the LED is blinked in synchronization with the blinking display of the sub symbol displayed on the display surface 523a. Configured.

  As a result, even when the sub liquid crystal display device 523 performs a reverse operation and the display surface 523a of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 becomes invisible, the blinking display state of the sub symbol can be grasped by visually recognizing the sub LED. It is possible to provide a game machine that is easy for a player to understand.

  In the first control example, the symbols are displayed across the upper display surface 523a, the lower display surface 523b, and the third symbol display device 81 of the sub liquid crystal display device 523, and the upper display surface 523a and the lower display surface 523b slide. The display position of the symbol can be changed according to the displacement. As a result, the display area of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 and the third symbol display device 81 can be effectively used to produce an effect, and the player's interest can be improved. In addition, even if a part or all of the third symbol display device 81 cannot be visually recognized by the sub liquid crystal display device 523, it is possible to suitably display the effect.

  In the first control example, the upper display surface 523a and the lower display surface 523b of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 are driven up and down (sliding) (that is, the display area is vertically long), and are driven left and right (sliding). ) (That is, when the display area is horizontally long), the display angle and display coordinates of the image data are corrected. As a result, the display area of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 and the third symbol display device 81 can be effectively used to produce an effect, and the player's interest can be improved.

<About the second control example>
Next, a second control example of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 127 to 137. In the first control example described above, the gaming machine that displays the effect when the game ball is over won in the specific winning opening 65a has been described.

  On the other hand, in this control example, the game balls that are over won during the jackpot game are stored in an area where the player can visually recognize, and the ending effect of the jackpot game is generated according to the number of the stored game balls. The production contents were made variable. This makes it possible to focus on the number of game balls that are over-winned during the jackpot game, so that the interest of the player can be improved.

  Further, in the first control example described above, the display screen (the sub-liquid crystal display device 523 or the third symbol display device) is displayed by displaying the character string (right-handed, right-handed, right-handed) suggesting a right-handed side by side. A description has been given of a gaming machine that can favorably indicate that the game is in a right-handed game state even when 81) rotates.

  On the other hand, in the present control example, direction notification LEDs 295a to 295a for suggesting a gaming state (a direction in which a game ball is fired) are arranged on the decorative surface 523b of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 in a circumferential shape. The game state is suggested by lighting patterns (clockwise lighting pattern, counterclockwise lighting pattern) of the direction notification LEDs 295a to 295j arranged in a shape. Thereby, even when the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is displayed in reverse, the gaming state can be suggested (notified) by the lighting patterns of the direction notification LEDs 295a to 295j provided on the decorative surface 523b. Furthermore, even when the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is rotationally driven, the gaming state can be suggested (notified) without changing the lighting pattern of the direction notification LEDs 295a to 295j arranged in the circumference.

  The second control example is different from the first control example in that the game balls that have won the variable winning device 65 are stored so as to be stored in an area that can be visually recognized by the player. A gaming state is provided on the decoration surface 523b of the sub liquid crystal display device 523, and a distribution member 65c for distributing whether or not to store the winning game balls and a distribution motor 65c2 for driving the distribution member are provided. The difference is that the direction notification LEDs 295a to 295a-j for suggesting (the direction in which the game ball is fired) are arranged circumferentially. Further, the contents of the RAM 223 in the sound lamp control device 113 are partially changed, the processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, and the processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control processing 113 are partially changed. Is different. The other points are the same as in the first control example. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as those in the first control example, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  FIG. 127 is a diagram showing a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in this control example. As shown in FIG. 127, the present control example is different in that the inside of the variable winning device 65 in the first control example described above is changed, and the other points are the same.

  The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 128. As in the first control example, the variable winning device 65 in the present control example, when the jackpot game is started, opens and closes the opening / closing door 65f1 a predetermined number of times (for example, , 15 times (round)). In each round, the opening / closing door 65f1 is opened for a predetermined period (for example, until 30 seconds elapses or until a predetermined number (10) of balls are won).

  In each round, up to a predetermined number of game balls that have been won are discharged through the normal winning flow path 65e1 in the variable winning device 65. On the other hand, the game balls won in excess of a predetermined number (so-called over-winning game balls) are configured to flow down the over-winning flow path 65e2 in the variable winning device 65.

  On the left side of the opening / closing door 65f1, there is formed an effect section for executing an effect with the game ball after winning the variable winning device 65. The details of this effect section will be described with reference to FIG. 128. However, more than 10 game balls (hereinafter referred to as over winning) in each round game are distributed members 65c (see FIG. 128). The effect of whether or not to be guided to the storage channel 65e4 is executed. In this control example, it is configured to indicate that, in each round, when the four or more balls are stored in the storage channel 65e4, the reserved ball that is a winning ball is stored in the reserved ball. As shown in FIG. 127, since the distribution member 65c and the storage channel 65e4 are arranged at positions that can be visually recognized by the player, more prize balls are paid out than usual by winning over during the jackpot game. In addition to the feeling of expectation, it is possible to enjoy the effect of whether or not the over-winning game ball is guided to the storage channel 65e4. Therefore, the interest of the player can be further improved.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 128, the details of the variable winning device 65 in this control example will be described. FIG. 128 (a) is a rear view of the variable winning device 65 immediately after the start of each round. The specific winning port 65a of the variable winning device 65 has a vertically long opening portion configured to have a height that allows one game ball to pass, and the game ball that has entered the opening portion is directed to the back side of the game board 13. A guiding path for guiding is formed. A guide hole for guiding the game ball to a guide path for allowing the game ball to flow downstream is formed inside the specific winning port 65a, and the guide hole and an over-winning channel 65e3 described later or a normal prize are provided. A flow path 65e1 is formed in communication. A detection switch 65a1 is attached to the guide hole, and a game ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a is detected.

  A winning channel switching member 65b is disposed between the normal winning channel 65e1 and the over winning channel 65e3 so that the game balls can be distributed to the normal winning channel 65e1 and the over winning channel 65e3. Has been. The winning flow path switching member 65b is rotated upward by a not-shown over winning solenoid (see FIG. 128 (b)) and turned downward to turn the tip downward. It is configured to be rotatable in a state (see FIG. 128 (a)). When the over winning solenoid is turned on, the winning flow path switching member 65b is rotated upward (see FIG. 128 (b)), and when the over winning solenoid is turned off, the winning flow path switching member 65b is moved downward. It is configured to rotate (see FIG. 128 (a)).

  The normal winning flow path 65e1 is a flow path for causing the game ball to flow downward vertically in a state where the winning flow path switching member 65b is rotated downward (see FIG. 128 (a)), and for discharging the game ball. It is configured to communicate with the discharge channel 65e2. In the discharge channel 65e2, a discharge switch 65a3 for detecting a game ball flowing down is disposed. The normal winning channel 65e1 is a channel through which game balls flow down to 10 winning balls in each round, and the gaming ball that has flowed down passes through the discharge channel 65e2 and is a channel in which the probability change switch 65a5 is arranged. After being guided to, it is discharged outside the gaming machine. Note that the game ball detected by the detection switch 65a1 is treated as an out ball in the same manner as the game ball after entering the out port. By being treated as an out ball, the game ball can be stored and used for production.

  The over winning channel 65e3 is a channel that causes the game ball to flow downward in the left direction in a state where the winning channel switching member 65b is rotated upward to communicate with the over winning channel 65e3 (see FIG. 128 (b)). It is. The over-winning flow path 65e3 is a flow path through which over-winning game balls that have won more than 10 balls in each round flow down. An over-winning detection switch 65a2 (photo sensor) that detects passage of an over-winning game ball is disposed at the end of the over-winning flow path 65e3. On the downstream side of the over winning channel 65e3, a sorting member 65c for distributing the over winning game balls into the storage channel 65e4 and the discharging channel 65e2 is disposed.

  The distribution member 65c has a disk-shaped outer shape, and has a thickness (15 mm) slightly larger than one game ball. A shaft portion is formed at the center of the distributing member 65c so as to protrude to the back side, and is configured to be turnable to the left and right by a stepping motor. In the sorting member 65c, a concave portion into which one game ball can enter is configured as a storage area 65c1. The storage area 65c1 has an opening formed on the side surface of the sorting member 65c, and is configured such that a game ball flowing down from the over winning flow path 65e3 can enter. The storage area 65c1 is configured such that when the game ball enters, the entire game ball is accommodated in the storage area 65c1, and the rotation is not hindered even when the distribution member 65c is rotated. Has been. The distribution member 65c is always in the direction of 45 degrees in the upper right, which is a position (see FIG. 128 (a)) at which the game ball flowing down from the over winning flow path 65e3 can be received by the top region 65c1. Stopped with the opening facing, so that the game ball is detected by the over winning detection switch 65a2, and after 2 seconds, the game ball is stored in the storage area 65c1 so as to rotate in either the left or right direction. It is configured. The direction of rotation is determined based on the determination result of the holding ball stored in the holding ball. As will be described in detail later, if a reserve ball that is a big win is stored, a lottery is executed with a probability of 1/2 each time an over-winning game ball is generated. The minute member 65c rotates leftward, and the game ball stored in the storage area 65c1 is guided to the storage channel 65e4. The upper limit is 6 balls, and when 6 balls are stored in the storage area 65i, the sorting member 65c rotates rightward with the game balls stored in the storage area 65c1. Thus, the game ball stored in the discharge channel 65e2 is caused to flow down. If the lottery with the probability of 1/2 is not selected, the distribution member 65c rotates rightward, and the game balls in the storage area 65c1 are guided (distribution) to the discharge flow path 65e2. Is done.

  When a holding ball that is a big hit is not stored in the holding ball in the holding (when the holding ball that is a big hit is stored when passing through the probability change switch 65a5 (including before passing through the probability change switch 65a5)) As in the case where the holding ball that is a big hit is stored, the sorting member 65c is rotated and distributed to the left and right. If a holding ball that is a big hit when the switch 65a5 is passed is stored, over winning balls are guided to the storage area 65i up to a maximum of four balls. The game ball that is rotated in the direction and stored in the storage area 65c1 is guided to the discharge flow path 65e2.

  As described above, the storage channel 65e4 has a storage region 65i capable of storing up to six over winning balls at the end portion. The storage area 65i is configured to have a height at which two game balls can be stacked and stored, and is formed with a depth (15 mm) slightly larger than the diameter of the game balls. The bottom surface of the storage area 65i is gently inclined rightward, and a storage switching member 65g for discharging game balls in the storage area 65i is attached to the downstream end portion. The storage switching member 65g has a shaft portion 65g1 formed on one end side fixed to the upper wall portion of the storage region 65i so as to be rotatable, and is rotated upward by a solenoid (not shown) (FIG. 128 (b ) And a state where the tip portion is turned vertically downward and turned downward. In this control example, at the start of the jackpot game, it is in a state of rotating downward, and based on the ending start timing that is the end timing of the jackpot game, it is rotated upward (rotated in the upper right direction) and is stored. The game ball in 65i is configured to be discharged to the storage / discharge channel 65e6. A storage / discharge switch 65a4 (a photosensor or the like) capable of detecting a game ball discharged from the storage area 65i is disposed upstream of the storage / discharge channel 65e6 (entrance). The game ball discharged from the storage area 65i is configured not to be guided to the probability variation switch 65a5.

  Although illustration is omitted, a switching member 65h and a probability variation switch 65a5 that are variable by a probability variation solenoid 65k are provided at the tip of the discharge channel 65e2. When the probability variation solenoid 65k is on, the game ball that has flowed down can pass through the probability variation switch 65a5, and when the probability variation solenoid 65k is off, the game ball that has flowed down cannot pass through the probability variation switch 65a5 (or difficult). It is comprised so that it may become.

  Thus, in the variable winning device 65 in the present control example, the winning flow path switching member 65b is such that the game ball passes through the normal winning flow path 65e1 until the ten winning balls determined in each round are reached. Is controlled. Therefore, it is possible to separate the flow path between the game ball that has won over and the game ball before winning over, and the game ball that has won over can be accurately detected.

  In the present control example, the game board 13 is cut out in front of the effect section (the distribution member 65c, the storage flow path 65e4, and the storage area 65i) so that it can be seen from the front side of the gaming machine 10. Yes.

  As described above, in the present control example, when an overwinning is generated in each round, the sorting member 65c is rotated, and an effect of whether or not the game ball is guided to the storage area 65i is executed. Therefore, it is possible to notify that an over prize has been won. The player can visually recognize that the game ball has entered the storage area 65c1 of the distribution member 65c, confirm the over winning, and enjoy the effect of whether the distribution member 65c rotates in the left or right direction. it can. Based on the number of game balls guided to the storage area 65i during the big hit game, it is also possible to predict whether or not the hold ball is stored in the hold. In the present control example, when a holding ball that is a big hit is stored in the holding ball, the game ball is guided to the storage area 65i with a high probability, and therefore the storage area 65i by the distribution member 65c. The determination result in the holding ball can also be predicted based on the frequency of distribution to the reservation ball. Therefore, the game player distributes the game balls to the storage area 65i, so that the reserve balls that are big hits are stored in the hold balls, and the big hits are continuously executed in a short time after the big hit games. You can have high expectations. Furthermore, in this control example, the maximum number of game balls guided to the storage area 65i is variably set according to the determination result stored in the hold, so the result of the determination of the success / failure is also determined from the number of the guidance. Can be predicted. Furthermore, when 5 or more balls are stored in the storage area 65i, it is possible to recognize that a holding ball that is a big hit in the holding is stored, and inform the player early of the determination result and Can be improved.

  In this control example, it is configured to notify that a reserve ball that is a big hit with five or more balls is stored, but the number or the like may be set as appropriate. Moreover, you may set suitably in the lottery probability of whether to distribute to the storage area | region 65i by the distribution member 65c. Further, the lottery probability of the allocation may be changed according to the history of the over-winning occurrence ratio (in the previous jackpot game). Furthermore, the maximum number based on the determination result in the reserved ball guided to the storage area 65i may be changed according to the over-winning occurrence ratio (in the previous jackpot game). In this case, at the start of the jackpot game or during the jackpot game, the third symbol display device 81 is provided with a text or voice guidance such as “If three game balls are stored in the storage area 65i, the reservation is confirmed!”. Thus, it is possible to make the player play the game easily. Furthermore, although the distribution member 65c is configured to distribute the game balls by rotating, the distribution member 65c is not limited thereto, and may be configured to distribute in a seesaw shape. In addition, all over winning balls are guided to the storage area 65i, and the judgment result in the reserved ball is notified by the number of stored over winning balls, or used for promotion effect during the big hit game from the normal symbol to the probable variation symbol May be. In this case, an effect such as a configuration in which a promotion chance is given by the number of over winning balls during the jackpot game can be considered.

<Electric Configuration in Second Control Example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 129, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example will be described. FIG. 129 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  In the second control example, the point that the sorting motor 65c2 is provided, the direction notification LED 295 is provided, and the contents of the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 are partly changed from the first control example described above. The other points are the same. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The sorting motor 65c2 is connected to the input / output port 225 of the sound lamp control device 113, and is driven and controlled based on a command transmitted from the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113. Specifically, when the big hit game is started, the driving of the sorting motor 65c2 is started, and the sorting member 65c is rotationally driven. As described above, the distribution motor 65c2 is alternately driven counterclockwise and clockwise at regular intervals (2 seconds), and the storage area 65c1 of the distribution member 65c has flowed down the over winning flow path 65e3. Centered on the position where the game ball can be received, the position rotated 120 degrees counterclockwise (the position where the game ball in the storage area 65c1 flows down to the storage channel 65e4), and the position rotated 90 degrees clockwise ( The game balls in the storage area 65c1 are alternately moved to a position where the game balls flow down to the out flow path 65e5 (see FIG. 128).

  The direction notification LED 295 is connected to the input / output port 225 of the sound lamp output device 113 and is controlled to be turned on based on a command transmitted from the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113. The direction notification LEDs 295 are arranged on the decoration surface 523b of the sub liquid crystal display device 523, and a total of ten direction decoration LEDs 295b (five (295f to 295j) on the upper decoration surface 523b1 and five (295a to 295e) are provided on the lower decoration surface 523b2. (See FIG. 132). As described above, if the gaming state is a right-handed gaming state, the lighting / turn-off control is performed so that the lighting order of the direction notification LED 295 is clockwise (clockwise), and it is suggested that the right-handed be made. (Notification), and when the game state is a game state in which the player makes a left turn, the lighting / turn-off control is performed so that the lighting order of the direction LED 295 is counterclockwise (counterclockwise), suggesting that the player makes a left turn. (Notification).

  Next, the contents of the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 130 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203. FIG. The RAM 203 of the main controller 110 in the second control example is different from the RAM 203 in the first control example in that a storage number counter 203v and a storage upper limit number 203w are added. Since other points are the same as those in the first control example, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The stored number counter 203v is a counter for counting the number of game balls distributed among the over-winning game balls to the storage area 65i by the distribution member 65c. The value of the storage number counter 203v is incremented by one when the distribution motor is set with the distribution destination set as the storage flow path 65e4 in the distribution motor setting process (see FIG. 133) (in FIG. 133). 5111). In the distribution motor setting process (see FIG. 133), when the distribution destination is determined to be the storage flow path 65e4, it is determined whether or not the game balls are distributed to the storage area exceeding the storage upper limit number. Referenced for. Although illustration is omitted, the value of the stored number counter 203v is initialized to 0 at the end of the jackpot game.

  The storage upper limit number 203w is a value for determining the upper limit of the number of game balls distributed among the over-winning game balls to the storage area 65i by the distribution member 65c. The value of the storage upper limit number 203w is set according to the winning information that is put on hold (that is, according to the degree of expectation that subsequently becomes a big hit) in the sorting motor setting process (see FIG. 134) (see FIG. 134). (See S5103, S5105, and S5106). And when the value of the above-mentioned storage number counter 203v is smaller than the storage upper limit number 203w, it is permitted that the allocation destination is determined to be the storage flow path 65e4. Although illustration is omitted, the value of the storage upper limit number 203w is initialized to 0 at the end of the jackpot game.

  Next, the contents of the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 130B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223. In the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the second control example, a specific winning opening state 223p and a stored number counter 223r are added to the RAM 223 in the first control example. Since other configurations are the same as those in the first control example, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The specific winning opening state 223p stores information indicating whether or not a game ball can enter the specific winning opening 65a. When the specific winning opening state 223p is in the open state, it indicates that the open / close door 65f1 of the variable winning device 65 is in the open state, and that the game ball can enter the specific winning opening 65a. When the winning opening state 223p is in the closed state, the open / close door 65f1 of the variable winning device 65 is in the closed state, and a game ball cannot enter (or is difficult to enter) the specific winning opening 65a. Indicates. The specific prize opening state 223p is set to the open state when a round number command indicating the start of a round in the jackpot game (that is, opening of the specific prize opening 65a) is received from the main controller 110 (see S2031 in FIG. 136). When the closing command based on the closing of the open / close door 65f1 of the specific winning opening 65a is received, the closed state is set (see S2034 in FIG. 136). The set special winning opening state 223p is referred to when a winning number command is received from the main controller 110 (see S2032 in FIG. 136), and the received winning number command is a command based on a normal winning or Whether the command is based on over winning or not is determined.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 131, a liquid crystal drive interlocking effect that is an integrated effect of the third symbol display device 81 and the sub liquid crystal display device 523 in this control example will be described. 131 (a) and 131 (b) are schematic diagrams schematically showing the liquid crystal drive interlocking effect executed in this control example.

  First, with reference to FIG. 131A, a liquid crystal drive interlocking effect in the case where the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is driven up and down will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 131 (a), in the liquid crystal drive interlocking effect, the sub liquid crystal display device 523 and the second display surface 523a2 are driven in accordance with the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 being driven up and down. The display content displayed on the three-symbol display device 81 is varied.

  Specifically, in the state where the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are adjacent to each other in front of the third symbol display device 81, the center of the display area combining the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 A star image is displayed in the area.

  Thereafter, the upper display surface 523a1 is driven upward, the lower display surface 523a2 is driven downward, and a part of the third symbol display device 81 can be visually recognized at the center. In accordance with this drive, the star image displayed in the center is duplicated and displayed in the four directions of upper right, lower right, lower left, and upper left. The star image moved and displayed in the upper right and upper left is displayed across the 3rd symbol display device 81 and the upper display surface 523a1 that can be viewed, and moved and displayed in the lower right and lower left. The star image is displayed across the third symbol display device 81 and the lower display surface 523a2 that are visible.

  When the upper display surface 523a1 is further driven upward and the lower display surface 523a2 is further driven downward, the star image that is moved to the upper right and upper left is displayed on the upper display surface 523a1, The star image moved and displayed at the lower right and lower left is displayed on the lower display surface 523a2.

  Thus, in the liquid crystal drive interlocking effect, the sub liquid crystal display device 523, the third symbol display device 81, and the sub liquid crystal display device 523 are driven in accordance with the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 being driven up and down. Are combined to display an effect in which the star image is moved in the four directions of upper right, lower right, lower left, and upper left. Thereby, in addition to driving the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 up and down, an effect according to the drive can be displayed, so that the interest of the player can be improved. .

  Next, with reference to FIG. 131 (b), a liquid crystal drive interlocking effect in the case where the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is rotationally driven and the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are driven left and right will be described. .

  In the liquid crystal drive interlocking effect when the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are driven left and right, and in the liquid crystal drive interlocking effect when the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are driven up and down as described above. The same image data is used, and the rotation angle and position of the image data are corrected and the effect is executed. Thereby, the capacity of the image data used for the liquid crystal drive interlocking effect can be reduced.

  Specifically, in the state where the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are adjacent to each other in front of the third symbol display device 81, the center of the display area combining the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 A star image is displayed in the area.

  The star image displayed in the center is displayed by being rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise (counterclockwise) as compared to the case where the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are driven up and down. Thereby, even when the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise (counterclockwise), the same effect can be displayed using the same image data.

  Thereafter, the upper display surface 523a1 is driven leftward, the lower display surface 523a2 is driven rightward, and a part of the third symbol display device 81 can be visually recognized at the center. In accordance with this drive, the star image displayed in the center is duplicated and displayed in the four directions of upper right, lower right, lower left, and upper left. The star image moved and displayed in the upper left and lower left is displayed straddling the 3rd symbol display device 81 and the upper display surface 523a1 that have become visible, and moved and displayed in the upper right and lower right. The star image is displayed across the third symbol display device 81 and the lower display surface 523a2 that are visible.

  The star image moved and displayed in the four directions of the upper right, lower right, lower left, and upper left is counterclockwise (when the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are driven up and down ( The image is rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise. The display position is corrected and displayed. Specifically, when the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are driven up and down, when the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are driven left and right, the display area is vertically long. The display area changes to a horizontally long display area. Therefore, the display position is corrected so that each star symbol has a small amount of movement in the vertical direction and a large amount of movement in the horizontal direction. Thereby, even when the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise (counterclockwise), the same effect can be displayed using the same image data.

  When the upper display surface 523a1 is further driven upward and the lower display surface 523a2 is further driven downward, the rotation angle and display position of each star image are corrected and moved to the upper left and lower left. The star image to be displayed is displayed on the upper display surface 523a1, and the star image displayed by being moved to the upper right and lower right is displayed on the lower display surface 523a2.

  Thus, in this control example, the liquid crystal drive interlocking effect when the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are driven left and right, and the above-described upper display surface 523a1 and lower display surface 523a2 are driven up and down. The same image data is used for the liquid crystal drive interlocking effect in the case of the image data, and the effect is executed by correcting the rotation angle and display position of the image data. Thereby, the capacity of the image data used for the liquid crystal drive interlocking effect can be reduced.

  In this control example, the display position of the image data is corrected. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are driven up and down (that is, when the display area is vertically long), the image data is compressed (reduced) to be vertically long and displayed. When the display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are driven left and right (that is, when the display area is horizontally long), the image data may naturally be compressed (reduced) to be horizontally long.

  In addition, when one (or both) of the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 cannot be driven due to a failure or the like and the display area cannot be expanded, the display position of the image data is corrected according to the display area. Or image data may be compressed (reduced). Thereby, even when either one (or both) of the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 cannot be driven and the display area cannot be expanded, it is possible to appropriately display the effect.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 132, the game method suggestion effect executed (notified) by the direction notification LEDs 295a to 295j arranged on the decorative surface 523b of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 in this control example will be described. FIG. 132 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the game method suggestion effect.

  As shown in FIG. 132 (a), the decoration surface 523 of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 in this control example is decorated with an apple-like decoration, and the upper decoration surface 523b1 is decorated with the left half of the decoration. The lower decorative surface 523b2 is decorated with the remaining right half. Therefore, an integrated effect can be performed by driving the upper decorative surface 523b1 and the lower decorative surface 523b2 to positions adjacent to each other.

  Direction notification LEDs 295a to 295j are circumferentially arranged on the round apple part of the decoration on the decorative surface 523. Specifically, the direction notification LED 295a is disposed at the uppermost position of the right half, and each direction notification LED 295 is disposed in order clockwise from there (in the order of the direction notification LEDs 295b, 295c... 295j), The direction notification LED 295j is arranged at a position that is the uppermost part of the left half.

  These direction notification LEDs 295a to 295j are controlled to be lighted by setting a right-handed notification command or a left-handed command according to a current gaming state by a gaming method notification process of the sound lamp control device 113 described later.

  When a right-handed notification command indicating that the current gaming state is a right-handed gaming state is set, first, the direction notification LED 295a is turned on / off, and then the direction notification LED 295b is turned on / off, Thus, each direction notification LED 295 is turned on / off in the clockwise order. As a result, the circumferentially arranged direction notification LEDs 295 are turned on / off clockwise (in the clockwise direction), so that it is suggested to the player that the current state is a right-handed gaming state ( Notification).

  On the other hand, when a left-handed notification command indicating that the current gaming state is a left-handed gaming state is set, the direction notification LED 295a is turned on / off, and then the direction notification LED 295j is turned on / off. Thus, the direction notification LEDs 295 are turned on / off in the counterclockwise order. As a result, the direction indicator LEDs 295 arranged circumferentially are turned on and off counterclockwise (counterclockwise), which suggests that the player is currently in a left-handed gaming state. (Notification).

  FIG. 132 (b) is a schematic diagram showing a case where the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is rotated 90 degrees clockwise with respect to FIG. 132 (a). Also in this case, when the right-handed notification command is set, the direction notification LED 295 is turned on / off clockwise from the direction notification LED 295a. When the left-handed notification command is set, the direction notification LED 295 is turned on / off counterclockwise (counterclockwise) from the direction notification LED 295a.

  Thus, in this control example, regardless of the state in which the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is driven to rotate, the same control process is executed to indicate that the game state is to make a right strike (or left strike). It can be suggested (notified). As a result, the control process can be prevented (suppressed) from becoming complicated.

<Control processing executed by main controller 110 in the second control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 133, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 in the second control example will be described. The present control example is different from the first control example described above in that the process of the jackpot control process (S1004) is partially changed, and the other points are the same. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 133 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process (S1004) in this control example. This jackpot control process (S1004) is a process executed in the main process (see FIG. 93) executed by the MPU of the main controller 110.

  In the jackpot control process (S1004), first, it is determined whether or not it is the start timing of the jackpot game (S1101).

  If it is determined that it is the big hit start timing in the processing of S1101 (S1101: Yes), an opening command is set (S1102), the storage solenoid 65g1 is set to ON (S1131), and this processing ends. To do.

  Further, the storage solenoid 65g1 is set to ON by the processing of S1131, so that it is possible to store the game ball that has entered the storage area 65i. This storage area 65i is an area where the over-winning game balls flow down, and is configured such that the content of the ending effect varies depending on the number of game balls stored in the storage area 65i during the big hit game. . The game ball stored in the storage area 65i is flowed down to the storage / discharge channel 65e6 when the storage solenoid 65g1 is set off at the end of the big hit (before the start of the ending effect).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1101 that it is not the big hit start timing (S1101: No), it is next determined whether or not the big hit is being made (S1103). If it is determined in the processing of S1103 that the game is not a big hit (S1103: No), this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot is being hit (S1103: Yes), it is then determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1104).

  If it is determined in the process of S1104 that it is the start timing of a new round (S1104: Yes), the over winning solenoid 65b1 is set to OFF (S1132), and the jackpot operation setting process is executed (S1134). This process ends.

  As a result of the processing of S1132, the over winning solenoid 65b1 is set to OFF, so that the game ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a and passed through the detection switch 65a1 can flow into the normal winning flow path 65e1. Although details will be described later, when a predetermined number (10 in the present control example) of game balls pass through the detection switch 65a1 in the same round, the over winning solenoid 65b1 is set to ON and the specific winning opening 65a is entered. Then, the game ball that has passed through the detection switch 65a1 cannot flow down to the normal winning flow path 65e1, but flows down to the over winning flow path 65e2.

  In the process of S1104, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of a new round (S1104: No), it is then determined whether it is the timing of the closing operation (S1133). If it is determined in the processing of S1133 that the timing is the closing operation (S1133: Yes), the over winning solenoid 65b1 is set to ON (S1134), the opening solenoid is set to OFF (S1135), and the closing command is set. In step S1136, the process is terminated.

  As a result of the processing of S1134, the over winning solenoid 65b1 is set to ON, so that the game ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a and passed through the detection switch 65a1 cannot flow down to the normal winning flow path 65e1. It is possible to flow down to the winning flow path 65e2. The game balls that have flowed down to the over winning flow path 65e2 flow down to the storage area 65c1 of the sorting member 65c, and are distributed to the storage flow path 65e4 or the out flow path 65e5.

  As a result of the processing of S1135, the opening solenoid is set to OFF, and the open / close door 65f1 of the specific winning opening 65a is closed.

  The voice lamp control device 113 is notified that the open / close door 65f1 of the specific winning opening 65a has been closed by the processing of S1136. The voice lamp control device 113 is notified of this closing command, whereby it can be determined that the number-of-balls command to be notified thereafter is a number-of-balls command based on over winning.

  In the process of S1133, when it is determined that it is not the timing of the closing operation (S1133: No), it is determined whether it is the operation timing of the probability changing solenoid 65k (S1106). In the process of S1106, when it is determined that it is the operation timing of the probability variation solenoid 65k (S1106: Yes), the probability variation solenoid 65k is set to ON, and this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1133, when it is determined that it is not the operation timing of the probability variation solenoid 65k (S1106: No), it is then determined whether it is the storage discharge timing (S1137), and it is determined that it is the storage discharge timing. If it is determined (S1137: Yes), the storage solenoid is set to OFF (S1138), and this process is terminated.

  In the processing of S1137, it is determined that it is the storage and discharge timing if it is a timing predetermined as a jackpot game (in this control example, 5 seconds before the start timing of the ending effect). Thereby, the number of game balls stored in the storage area 65i before the start of the ending effect can be counted by the storage / discharge switch 65a4, and the ending effect according to the count result can be displayed.

  The storage / discharge timing is not limited to that described above. For example, it may be counted so that it is discharged every round, or it may be discharged when the ending command is received.

  In the processing of S1137, when it is determined that it is not the storage / discharge timing (S1137: No), it is then determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the storage / discharge switch 65a4 (S1139), and the storage / discharge switch 65a4 is set to the game ball. Is determined to have passed (S1139: Yes), a storage / discharge command is set (S1140), and this process ends.

  Since the storage / discharge command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 by the processing of S1140, the number of game balls stored in the jackpot game in the sound lamp control device 113 can be counted, and according to the count result Ending effects can be displayed.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1139, when it is determined that the game ball has not passed through the storage switch 65a4 (1139: No), the process proceeds to S1108.

  If it is determined in the processing of S1108 that it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1108: Yes), the processing of S1109 and S1110 is executed and the present processing is terminated as in the first control example.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1108 that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S1108: No), a sorting motor setting process is executed (S1141), and other processes (notification process (S1111), winning process) (S1112), abnormal processing (S1113)) is executed, and this processing is terminated.

  Here, the details of the sorting motor setting process (S1141) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The distribution motor setting process (S1141) determines whether to drive the distribution motor 65c2 so that the game balls that have passed the over winning switch 65a2 are distributed to the storage flow path 65e4 or the out flow path 65e5. This is a process for setting.

  In the sorting motor setting process (S1141), first, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the over winning switch 65a2 (S5101).

  If it is determined in S5101 that the game ball has not passed through the over-winning switch 65a2 (S5101: No), it is not necessary to drive the sorting motor to distribute the game ball. finish. Of course, the present invention is not limited to this, and the sorting motor may be always driven.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5101 that the game ball has passed the over winning switch 65a2 (S5101: Yes), it is then determined whether or not there is winning information that is a big hit in the pending winning information. (S5102).

  In the processing of S5102, if it is determined that there is winning information that is a big hit in the pending winning information (S5102: Yes), it is a case where it is confirmed that it will be a big win after that, the storage upper limit number 203w Is set to 4, and the process proceeds to S5107.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5102 that there is no winning information that is a big hit in the pending winning information (S5102: No), it is then determined whether or not the predictor flag 203u is on (S5103). ).

  In the process of S5103, if it is determined that the predictor flag 203u is on (S5103), since it is not determined that it will be a big hit after that, it is a case where the probability of a big hit is high, so the storage upper limit number 203w Is set to 3, and the process proceeds to S5107.

  On the other hand, in the process of S5103, when it is determined that the predictor flag 203u is on (S5103: No), when all of the pending winning information is out of place (that is, when the probability of a big hit is low thereafter). Therefore, the storage upper limit number 203w is set to 2, and the process proceeds to S5107.

  In the process of S5107, it is determined whether the game ball that has passed the over winning switch 65a2 is to be distributed to the storage channel 65e4 or the out channel 65e5 (S5107). This distribution is determined based on a table and a counter (not shown).

  Specifically, when there is winning information that is a big hit in the pending winning information, a table for jackpot is used, and when the counter value is “0 to 2”, the distribution destination is stored. The path 65e4 is determined, and in the case of “3 to 5”, the distribution destination is determined to be the out flow path 65e5. That is, the distribution destination is determined to be the storage flow path 65e4 with a probability of 1/2, and the distribution destination is determined to be the out flow path 65e5 with a probability of 1/2. On the other hand, if there is no winning information that is a big hit in the pending winning information, a table for losing is used, and if the counter value is “0 to 1”, the distribution destination is stored in the storage channel 65e4. In the case of “2 to 5”, the distribution destination is determined to be the out flow path 65e5. That is, the allocation destination is determined to be the storage channel 65e4 with a probability of 1/3, and the allocation destination is determined to be the out channel 65e5 with a probability of 2/3.

  As described above, when there is a big hit in the pending winning information, the allocation destination is easily determined as the storage channel 65e4, and when there is no big hit in the pending winning information, the allocation destination is determined as the out channel 65e5. It is configured to be easy. Note that the distribution ratio is not limited to this, and may be appropriately changed.

  When the processing of S5107 is completed, it is determined whether or not the distribution destination is determined as the storage channel 65e4 in the processing of S5107 (S5108).

  In the process of S5108, when it is determined that the distribution destination is determined to be the storage flow path 65e4 (S5108: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the value of the storage number counter 203v is smaller than the storage upper limit number 203w. (S5109).

  In the process of S5109, when it is determined that the value of the storage number counter 203v is smaller than the storage upper limit number 203w (S5109: Yes), the drive of the distribution motor 65e2 is set with the distribution destination as the storage channel 65e4 ( (S5111), the stored number counter 203v is incremented by 1 (S5112), and this process is terminated.

  As the distribution motor 65c2 is driven and controlled by the processing of S5111, the distribution member 65c rotates counterclockwise (counterclockwise), and the storage region 65c1 of the distribution member 65c communicates with the over winning flow path 65e2. The position (orientation) at which the storage channel 65e4 communicates with the storage channel 65e4 is changed. Thereby, the game balls stored in the storage area 65c1 flow down the over winning flow path 65e2, and are distributed to the storage flow path 65e4, and flow down to the storage area 65i via the storage flow path 65e4. Become. Thereafter, the distribution member 65c rotates clockwise (clockwise), and the storage area 65c1 of the distribution member 65c is returned to a position (origin position) where the distribution region 65c2 communicates with the over winning flow path 65e2.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the distribution destination is determined to be the out flow path 65e5 (S5108: No), and when it is determined that the value of the storage number counter 203v is the storage upper limit number 203w (S5109: Yes). Sets the drive of the sorting motor 65c2 with the sorting destination as the out flow path 65e5 (S5112), and ends this processing.

  The distribution motor 65c2 is driven and controlled by the process of S5112, whereby the distribution member 65c rotates clockwise (clockwise), and the storage area 65c1 of the distribution member 65c communicates with the over winning flow path 65e2. The position (orientation) is changed to a state where it communicates with the out flow path 65e4. As a result, the game balls flowing down the over winning path 65e2 and stored in the storage area 65c1 are distributed to the out path 65e4. Thereafter, the distribution member 65c rotates counterclockwise (counterclockwise), and the storage region 65c1 of the distribution member 65c is returned to a position (origin position) where the distribution region 65c2 communicates with the over winning flow path 65e2.

  As described above, in the sorting motor setting process (S1141), the upper limit number of game balls to be distributed to the storage channel 65e4 is determined based on the pending winning information (that is, according to the degree of expectation that subsequently becomes a big hit). Configured differently. As a result, when a large number of game balls are distributed to the storage channel 65e4, it is possible to suggest that the expectation of the jackpot is high, and to the number of game balls allocated to the storage channel 65e4 to the player Since attention can be paid, the interest of the player can be improved.

  Moreover, since the production | generation part 65 (alpha) is comprised so that visual recognition is possible, the distribution operation | movement by the distribution motor 65c can be visually recognized. Thereby, attention can be paid to the sorting operation by the sorting motor 65c, so that the interest of the player can be improved.

  Furthermore, in the effect part 65α, the storage area 65i in which the game balls distributed to the storage flow path 65e4 are stored is visible so that the number of game balls distributed to the storage flow path 65e4 during the big hit game is determined. A gaming machine that can be easily grasped and is easy for a player to understand can be provided.

<Regarding the control process executed by the sound lamp control device 113 in the second control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 133, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described. This control example is different from the first control example described above in that the game method notification process (see FIG. 138) is executed in the main process 2 (see FIG. 135), and the jackpot related process (see FIG. 103). Instead, the jackpot related process 2 (see FIG. 136) is executed, and the ending process 2 (see FIG. 137) is executed instead of the ending process (see FIG. 105), and the other points are the same. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  First, the main process 2 executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 in this control example will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In the main process 2, similarly to the main process (see FIG. 101) in the first control example described above, the processes of S1801 to S1811 are executed.

  When the process of S1811 is completed, a game method notification process is executed (S1831), and the process proceeds to S1812. After S1812, the processing of S1812 to S1818 is executed in the same manner as in the first control example described above. Details of the gaming method notification process (S1831) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 136, the details of the jackpot related process 2 (S1912) executed in the command determination process (S1812) will be described. As described above, in the present control example, the main control device 110 includes a closing command indicating that the specific winning opening 65a is closed during the jackpot game and a storage / discharge command indicating that the game ball has passed through the storage / discharge switch 65a4. Will be sent. The jackpot related process 2 (S1912) in this control example is different from the jackpot related process in the first control example (see FIG. 103) in that it is changed to perform the process when these commands are received. Are the same. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  In the jackpot related process 2 (S1912), it is first determined whether or not an opening command has been received (S2001). If it is determined that an opening command has been received (S2001: Yes), a display opening command is set (S2002), and this process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2001 that the opening command has not been received (S2001: No), it is then determined whether a round number command has been received (S2003).

  If it is determined in step S2003 that the round number command has been received (S2001: Yes), the value of the round number counter 223g is incremented by 1 (S2004), and the display round is based on the value of the round number counter 223g. A number command is set (S2005). Then, the specific winning a prize opening state 223p is set to an open state (S2031), and this process is terminated.

  Based on the reception of the round number command indicating the start of a round from the main controller 110 by the processing of S2031, the open state is set to the specific winning opening state 223p. As a result, it is possible to determine that the winning number command received when the specific winning opening state 223p is set to the open state is a normal winning (that is, not over winning).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2003 that a round number command has not been received (S2003: No), it is then determined whether or not a winning number command has been received (S2006).

  If it is determined in the process of S2006 that a winning command has been received (S2006: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the specific winning opening state 223p is closed (S2032). If it is determined in the processing of S2032 that the specific winning opening state 223p is closed (S2032: Yes), the received winning number command is a command based on over winning, so the over winning process is executed. (S2009), this process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2032 that the specific winning opening state 223p is in the open state (S2032: No), since the received winning number command is a command based on a normal winning, the normal winning command is changed. After setting (S2010), the process is terminated.

  In the process of S2006, if it is determined that the winning command has not been received (S2006: No), it is determined whether or not a close command has been received (S2033). In the process of S2033, when it is determined that the close command has been received (S2033: Yes), the specific winning opening state 223p is set to the closed state (S2034), and this process ends.

  As described above, the specific winning opening state 223p is set to the closed state when the close command is received from the main control device 110. Therefore, after the closing command is received from the main control device 110 until the new round number command is received (that is, after the specific winning opening 65a has finished the prescribed number (10), the next specific winning is made. The specific winning opening state 223p is set to the closed state until the mouth 65a is opened. Thereby, it is possible to determine that the winning number command received when the specific winning opening state 223p is set to the closed state is a winning number command based on over winning.

  In addition, you may make it not discriminate | determine that it was over-winning, when it sets to a closed state based on having passed the predetermined period (30 second). In this case, the elapsed time from the start of the round may be measured to determine whether or not the closing command has been received at the elapse timing of the predetermined period.

  In the process of S2033, when it is determined that the close command has not been received (S2033: No), it is then determined whether or not a storage / discharge command has been received (S2035). In the process of S2035, when it is determined that the storage / discharge command has been received (S2035: Yes), the storage / discharge counter 233r is incremented by 1 (S2036), and this process ends.

  Since the storage discharge command is transmitted from the main control device 110 by the number of game balls stored in the storage area 65i in the jackpot game, when all the storage discharge commands are received, the value of the storage discharge counter 233r is stored. The number of game balls stored in the area 65i. The display content of the ending effect is determined based on the value of the storage / discharge counter 223r. That is, the ending effect according to the number of game balls stored in the storage area 65i can be displayed. Thereby, in the jackpot game, attention can be paid to the number of game balls stored in the storage area 65i, so that the interest of the player can be improved.

  In the process of S2035, when it is determined that the storage / discharge command has not been received (S2035: No), it is then determined whether or not an ending command has been received (S2011). If it is determined in step S2011 that an ending command has been received (S2011: Yes), ending setting processing 2 is executed (S2012), the round number counter is set to 0 (S2013), and this processing is performed. finish.

  In the processing of S2012, the display content of the ending effect is determined according to the value of the storage / discharge counter 223r. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  If it is determined in S2011 that the ending command has not been received (S2011: No), the processing from S2014 to S2015 is performed in the same manner as the jackpot-related processing (see FIG. 103) of the first control example described above. Execute this to finish this process.

  Next, details of the ending setting process 2 (S2012) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The ending setting process 2 (S2012) is different from the ending setting process (see FIG. 105) in the first control example in that an ending effect is selected according to the value of the storage / discharge counter 223r. The point is the same. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  In the ending effect process 2 (S2012), first, it is determined whether or not the fish school flag 223i is on (S2201). If it is determined that the fish school flag 223i is on (S2201: Yes), the ending effect is determined. Then, the continuation effect is selected (S2202), and the process proceeds to S2209.

  In the process of S2201, when it is determined that the fish school flag 223i is off (S2201: No), it is determined whether or not the value of the storage / discharge counter 223r is greater than 4 (S2231). In the processing of S2231, when it is determined that the value of the storage / discharge counter 223r is 4 or less (that is, when the number of game balls stored in the storage area 65i during the jackpot game is 4 or less) (S2231: No) ), The normal ending effect is selected as the ending effect, and the process proceeds to S2209.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S2231 that the value of the storage / discharge counter is larger than 4 (that is, when there are more game balls stored in the storage area 65i during the big hit game) (S2231: Yes) ) Similar to the ending setting process in the first control example (see FIG. 105), the process from S2203 to S2208 is executed, and the process proceeds to S2209.

  In the process of S2209, a display ending effect command indicating the ending effect selected by the process of S2203, S2205, S2207, S2208, or S2232 is set (S2209). Then, similarly to the ending setting process (see FIG. 105) in the first control example, the processes of S2210 and S2211 are executed, and this process ends.

  As described above, in this control example, when the value of the storage / discharge counter 223r is 2 or more, the ending effect indicating the degree of expectation with the winning information that is a big hit in the hold is selected. When the value of the counter 223r is 1 or less, a normal ending effect is selected. As a result, the player plays the game with the expectation that the value of the storage / discharge counter becomes 2 or more in the jackpot game (that is, two or more game balls enter the storage area 65i). Can be improved.

  Although the value of the storage / discharge counter 223r is 2 or more, the present invention is not limited to this, and the value may be 3 or more.

  Furthermore, only when the value of the storage / discharge counter 223r is a specific value (for example, 5), a specific effect (for example, an effect that accurately suggests whether there is winning information that is a big hit in the hold) is displayed. You may make it do.

  Further, the table for selecting the ending effect may be changed according to the value of the storage / discharge counter 223r.

  Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 138, the game method notification process (S1831) executed in the main process 2 (see FIG. 135) will be described in detail. In the game method notification process (S1831), the current game state is a game state in which a game ball is launched to flow down on the left side of the third symbol display device 81 (so-called left-handed game state), and the third symbol display. This is a process for suggesting (displaying) a gaming state (so-called right-handed gaming state) in which the game ball is launched so as to flow down on the right side of the device 81.

  In the gaming method notification process (S1831), first, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is a short-time gaming state or a probability variation gaming state (S5201). If it is determined in the processing of S5201 that the gaming state is the short-time gaming state or the probability-changing gaming state (S5201: Yes), the game is in a right-handed gaming state, so a display right-handed suggestion command is set (S5202). ).

  The display right-handed suggestion command set by the processing of S5202 is transmitted to the display control device 114, and when the display control device 114 receives the display right-handed suggestion command, the third symbol display device 81 or sub An image that suggests right-handedness is displayed on one of the liquid crystal display devices 523. Thereby, since it can be suggested to the player that the gaming state is a right-handed gaming state, an easy-to-understand gaming machine can be provided.

  When the process of S5202 is finished, a right-handed suggestion LED lighting command is set (S5203), and this process ends. The direction notification LEDs 295a to 295j arranged on the decorative surface 523b of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 are repeatedly turned on and off one by one in the order of 295a to 295j by the right-handed suggestion LED command set in the process of S5203. It is. Since the direction notification LEDs 295a to 295j are arranged clockwise (clockwise) in the order of 295a to 295j, the LED is lit clockwise (clockwise), so that It is possible to suggest (notify) that the game state is to make a hit. Thereby, even when the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is in the inversion state, the direction notification LEDs 295a to 295j arranged on the decorative surface 523b can suggest (notify) that the game is in the right-handed state. .

  In addition, the suggestion (notification) that the game is in the right-handed state is that the LED is lit clockwise (clockwise) even when the sub liquid crystal display device 523 rotates. Therefore, suggestion (informing) can be performed with the same control.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5201 that the gaming state is not the time saving or the probability variation gaming state (S5201: No), it is then determined whether or not the ball has passed through the through gate 67.

  If it is determined in the process of S5201 that the ball has passed through the through gate 67 (S5201: Yes), the game state is a left-handed game state, but the ball is placed on the right side of the third symbol display device 81. Since the game ball has passed through the through-gate 67 provided (that is, when a right-handed game is being performed), in order to suggest (notify) that the game is in a left-handed game, the process of S5205 Migrate to

  In the process of S5205, a display left-hand suggestion command is set (S5205). The display left-handed suggestion command set by the processing of S5202 is transmitted to the display control device 114, and when the display control device 114 receives the display left-handed suggestion command, the third symbol display device 81 or the sub The text “Please return to the left!” Is displayed on one of the liquid crystal display devices 523. Thereby, since it can be suggested to the player that the gaming state is a right-handed gaming state, an easy-to-understand gaming machine can be provided.

  When the process of S5205 is completed, a left-hand suggesting LED command is set (S5206), and this process ends. The direction notification LEDs 295a to 295j arranged on the decoration surface 523b of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 are turned on and off one by one in the order from 295j to a by the left-handed suggestion LED command set in the process of S5205. It is. Since the direction notification LEDs 295a to 295j are arranged clockwise (clockwise) in the order of 295a to 295j, the LED is turned on counterclockwise (counterclockwise). It is possible to suggest (notify) that the game is in a left-handed game state. As a result, even when the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is in the inversion state, the direction notification LEDs 295a to 295j arranged on the decorative surface 523b can suggest (notify) that the game is in a left-handed state. .

  Further, the suggestion (notification) that the game is in the left-handed state is that the LED is lit counterclockwise (counterclockwise) even when the sub liquid crystal display device 523 rotates. Since it does not change, suggestion (informing) can be performed with the same control.

  As described above, in the second control example, the distribution ratio for distributing the game balls that have won over the jackpot to the storage channel 65e4 is determined based on the pending winning information (that is, the jackpot thereafter. Depending on the degree of expectation), it was configured differently. As a result, when a large number of game balls are distributed to the storage channel 65e4, it is possible to suggest that the expectation of the jackpot is high, and to the number of game balls allocated to the storage channel 65e4 to the player Since attention can be paid, the interest of the player can be improved.

  In the second control example, the effect unit 65α in which the distribution member 65c for distributing game balls that have won over the jackpot is arranged is configured to be visible. Thereby, the player can visually recognize the sorting operation by the sorting motor 65c, and can pay attention to the sorting operation by the sorting motor 65c, so that the interest of the player can be improved.

  In the second control example, in the effect part 65α, a storage area 65i in which game balls distributed to the storage flow path 65e4 are stored is provided so as to be visible. Thereby, the number of game balls distributed to the storage channel 65e4 during the jackpot game can be easily grasped, and a game machine that is easy to understand for the player can be provided.

  In the second control example, the game balls that are over-winned during the jackpot game are stored in an area where the player can visually recognize, and depending on the number of the stored game balls (the value of the storage discharge counter 223r), The contents of the game ending production are made variable. This makes it possible to focus on the number of game balls that are over-winned during the jackpot game, so that the interest of the player can be improved.

  In addition, only when the value of the storage / discharge counter 223r is a specific value (for example, 5), a specific effect (for example, an effect that accurately suggests whether there is winning information that is a big hit in the hold) is displayed. You may make it do.

  In the second control example, direction notification LEDs 295a to 295a for suggesting a game state (a direction in which a game ball is fired) are arranged on the decorative surface 523b of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 in a circle, and arranged in the circle. The gaming state is suggested by the lighting patterns (clockwise lighting pattern and counterclockwise lighting pattern) of the direction notification LEDs 295a to 295j. Thereby, even when the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is displayed in reverse, the gaming state can be suggested (notified) by the lighting patterns of the direction notification LEDs 295a to 295j provided on the decorative surface 523b. Furthermore, even when the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is rotationally driven, the gaming state can be suggested (notified) without changing the lighting pattern of the direction notification LEDs 295a to 295j arranged in the circumference.

<Regarding the third control example>
Next, a third control example of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 139 to 145.

  In the first control example described above, the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 are inverted, and the upper decorative surface 523b1 and the lower decorative surface 523b2 which are the back side of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 are used. I explained the game machine that performed the production.

  On the other hand, in the third control example, when the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 are reversed, the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display facing the back side of the pachinko machine 10 are displayed. The display contents on the surface 523a2 are configured so as to be able to execute a mirror effect that makes the display contents visible from the front side of the gaming machine via a mirror (mirror) 298. Thereby, since the decoration surface (523b1, 523b2) of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 and the display surface (523a1, 523a2) which is the back side can be used at the same time, it is possible to increase the variation of the production. Can improve the interest of the player.

  Further, in the third control example, the mirror 298 arranged for executing the mirror effect is a half mirror (so-called magic mirror), and when viewed from the bright side, the light is reflected to become a mirror (mirror). However, when viewed from the dark side, light is transmitted and looks like a window. A mirror front LED 296 is provided on the front side of the mirror 298, and a mirror back LED is provided on the back side of the mirror 298. Therefore, by turning on the mirror front side LED 296, the front side of the mirror 298 is brightened, and the mirror 298 functions as a mirror. On the other hand, by turning on the mirror back side LED 297, the back side of the mirror 298 is brightened, and the mirror 298 becomes a simple window (glass).

  In this control example, in the mirror effect, after the display surface (523a1, 523a2) that is inverted and turned to the back side is ready (after the display content is inverted), the mirror front side LED 297 is turned on, The mirror 298 is configured to function as a mirror. Thereby, since the display surface (523a1, 523a2) before preparation for display is not seen by the player, a suitable effect can be provided.

  Here, the effect aspect of the mirror effect in this control example will be described. FIG. 139 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a mirror effect in this control example. FIG. 139 (a) schematically shows a state in which the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 are slid to the close positions, as viewed from the front side of the pachinko machine 10. It is a schematic diagram.

  As shown in FIG. 139 (a), in the mirror effect in this control example, the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 are slid in the left-right direction to be changed to the close position, and the proximity At the position, the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are reversed, and the upper decorative surfaces (523b1, 523b2) of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 are visible from the front side of the pachinko machine 10.

  A left mirror 298a is disposed on the left rear side of the sub liquid crystal display device 523, and a right mirror 298b is disposed on the right rear side. The left mirror 298a and the right mirror 298b are inclined so as to be located at the rear (back side) position toward the center of the pachinko machine 10, and the left mirror 298a and the right mirror 298b are viewed from the top side. (See FIG. 139 (b)). Therefore, it is possible to visually recognize the back side of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 disposed on the center side of each mirror 298 through the right mirror 298a and the left mirror 298 from the front side.

  A right mirror front LED 296a is disposed on the front side of the right mirror 298a, and a left mirror front LED 296b is disposed on the front side of the left mirror 298b. Further, a left mirror back LED 297a is disposed on the back side of the left mirror 298a, and a right mirror back LED 297b is disposed on the back side of the right mirror 298b. Each of the left mirror 298a and the right mirror 298b is composed of a magic mirror. When the left mirror front LED 296a is lit, the left mirror 298a becomes a mirror, and the display mode of the upper display surface 523a or the upper decoration surface 523b1 The decoration mode can be displayed. When the left mirror back LED 297a is lit, the magic mirror is seen through and the back side is visible (not a mirror but a transmissive member), and no mirror surface is formed. Therefore, the back side of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is not reflected on the left mirror 298a. It is configured. The right mirror 298b is similarly configured.

  By being configured in this manner, the state of the back side of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 can be switched between a state that can be visually recognized by the player and a state that cannot be visually recognized by the player, and a fresh effect can be provided to the player. Can do.

<Electric Configuration in Third Control Example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 140 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  In the third control example, the mirror front LED 296 and the mirror back LED 297 are connected to the input / output port 225 of the sound lamp control device, and the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113 is different from the first control example described above. The content differs from the content of the RAM 223 in that it is partially changed, and the other points are the same. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The contents of the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113 in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 141 (a), the ROM 222 in this control example is different from the ROM 222 in the first control example in that a mirror effect driving scenario 222d4 is added to the sub liquid crystal driving scenario 222d, and the other points are the same. It is. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The contents of the mirror effect drive scenario 222d4 will be described with reference to FIG. 141 (b). The mirror effect driving scenario 222d4 is a scenario for inverting the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 after sliding them.

  In the mirror effect drive scenario 222d4, a set value (operation speed (pps)) set for the motor control IC (motor driver) corresponding to the drive scenario counter 223m indicating the elapsed time since the start of the fluctuation display. , The number of operation steps, and the operation direction) are defined.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 141 (b), in correspondence with the value “1” of the drive scenario counter 223m, the slide motor 431 is defined as the operation target, the operation speed is defined as 50 pps, and the number of operation steps 100 is defined as the operation direction, and the positive direction is defined as the operation direction.

  Corresponding to the value “2001” of the drive scenario counter 223m, the reversing motor 531 is defined as an operation target, 100 pps is defined as the operation speed, 200 is defined as the number of operation steps, and the positive direction is defined as the operation direction. ing.

  Corresponding to the value “8001” of the drive scenario counter 223m, the reversing motor 531 is defined as the operation target, 100 pps is defined as the operation speed, 200 is defined as the number of operation steps, and the negative direction is defined as the operation direction. ing.

  Corresponding to the value “10001” of the drive scenario counter 223m, the reversing motor 531 is defined as the operation target, 50 pps is defined as the operation speed, 100 is defined as the number of operation steps, and the negative direction is defined as the operation direction. ing.

  Then, in correspondence with the value “12001” of the drive scenario counter 223m, “END” information indicating the end of the drive scenario is stored.

  As described above, in the mirror effect driving scenario 222d4, the sub liquid crystal display device 523 slides and displaces from the separated position to the adjacent position over 2 seconds, and the reflected position (display surface (523a1 facing the rear side) from the normal position at the adjacent position. 523a2) is reversed over 2 seconds to a position where it can be seen from the front side through the mirror 298, and then maintained at the reflection position for 4 seconds, and then again from the reflection position to the normal position over 2 seconds. It reverses and slides and displaces from the proximity position to the separation position over 2 seconds.

  Next, the contents of the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 142, the RAM 223 in this control example is different from the RAM 223 in the first control example in that a mirror effect flag 223s is added, and the other points are the same. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The mirror effect flag 223s is a flag for determining whether or not the mirror effect is being executed. If the flag is on, the mirror effect is being executed. If the flag is off, the mirror effect is being executed. Indicates no. This mirror effect flag 223s is turned on when the mirror effect drive scenario 222d4 is set as the drive scenario in the variable display setting process 3 (see FIG. 145) (that is, when the mirror effect is set as the effect pattern). Is set. When the mirror effect flag 223s is on, the mirror front LED 296 and the mirror rear LED 297 are controlled to be turned on / off in the mirror effect setting process (see FIG. 144), and the display content is inverted with respect to the display control device 114. Notification of the command to be executed is performed. Although illustration is omitted, it is set to OFF when the variable display in which the mirror effect is executed is finished.

<Regarding the control process executed by the sound lamp control device 113 in the third control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 143 to 145, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 in the third control example will be described. In the present control example, a point that the mirror effect setting process (see FIG. 143) is changed to be executed in the main process 3 (see FIG. 143) with respect to the first control example described above, the variable display setting process (see FIG. 106). It is different in that the variable display setting process (see FIG. 145) is executed instead, and the other points are the same. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  First, the main process 3 executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in this control example will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 143. In the main process 3, the processes of S1801 to S1811 are executed in the same manner as the main process (see FIG. 101) in the first control example described above.

  When the process of S1811 is completed, a mirror effect setting process is executed (S1851), and the process proceeds to S1812. After S1812, the processing of S1812 to S1818 is executed in the same manner as in the first control example described above.

  Here, the details of the mirror effect setting process (S1851) executed in the main process 3 (see FIG. 143) will be described with reference to FIG. The mirror effect setting process (S1851) is a command for turning on / off the mirror front LED 296 and the mirror back LED 297 or inverting the display contents to the display control device 114 when the mirror effect is being executed. This is a process for performing notification.

  In the mirror effect setting process (S1851), first, it is determined whether or not the mirror effect flag 223s is on. In the process of S1851, if it is determined that the mirror effect flag 223s is off (S5301: No), the mirror effect is not executed, and thus this process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S5301, if it is determined that the mirror effect flag 223s is on (S5301: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the drive scenario counter 223m is 1 (S5302). If it is determined in the process of S5302 that the value of the drive scenario counter 223m is 1 (S5302: Yes), the mirror front LED 296 is set to OFF to prevent the mirror 298 from functioning as a mirror (S5303). ), The mirror back LED 297 is set to ON (S5304), and this process is terminated.

  If it is determined in the process of S5302 that the value of the drive scenario counter 223m is not 1 (S5302: No), it is then determined whether or not the value of the drive scenario counter 223m is 4000 (S5305).

  If it is determined in the process of S5305 that the value of the drive scenario counter 223m is 4000 (S5305: Yes), the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 slide to the close positions. The timing at which the reversal operation is completed at the proximity position. In this case, in order to make the display surface (523a1, 523a2) facing the back side of the pachinko machine 10 visible from the front side through the mirror 298 by performing the reversal operation, the process proceeds to S5306. Transition.

  In the process of S5306, a display inversion correction start command is set (S5306), the mirror front LED 296 is set to ON (S5307), the mirror back LED 297 is set to OFF (S5308), and this process ends. As a result, the display content of the display surface (523a1, 523a2) is reversed symmetrically (that is, normal display content when viewed through a mirror), and the front side of the mirror 298 is brightened, so that the mirror 298 Will function as a mirror.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5305 that the value of the drive scenario counter 223m is not 4000 (S5305: No), it is then determined whether or not the value of the drive scenario counter 223m is 8000 (S5309).

  In the process of S5309, when it is determined that the value of the drive scenario counter 223m is 8000 (S5309: Yes), it is the timing when the display surface facing the back side is reversed to the front side in the mirror effect. .

  In this case, the mirror front LED 296 is set to off (S5310), the mirror back LED 297 is set to on (S5311), a display reversal correction end command is set (S5312), and this process ends.

  By the processing from S5310 to S5312, the display content of the display surface (523a1, 523a2) of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 controlled by the display control device 114 is set to the normal state, and the mirror 298 is set not to function as a mirror. Is done.

  On the other hand, in the process of S5309, when it is determined that the value of the drive scenario counter 223m is not 8000 (S5309: No), it is then determined whether or not the value of the drive scenario counter 223m is 12000 (S5313).

  In the process of S5313, when it is determined that the value of the drive scenario counter 223m is 12000 (S5313: Yes), the mirror front LED 296 is set to OFF because the mirror production end timing is reached (S5314). The rear LED 297 is set to OFF (S5315), and this process is terminated.

  When the mirror effect is not performed by the processing of S5313 and S5314, the mirror front LED 296 and the mirror back LED 297 can be turned off, so that power consumption can be reduced.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 145, details of the variable display setting process 3 (S1813) will be described. In the variable display setting process 3 (S1813), the processes from S2301 to S2307 are executed as in the first control example. When the processing of S2307 is finished, it is determined whether or not the driving scenario stored in the processing of S2306 is a driving scenario corresponding to the mirror effect (S2351).

  If it is determined in the process of S2351 that the drive scenario is a drive scenario corresponding to the mirror effect (S2351: Yes), since a variation pattern including the mirror effect is set, the mirror effect flag 223s is set. Is set to ON, and the process proceeds to S2308.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2351 that the drive scenario is a drive scenario that does not correspond to the mirror effect (S2351: No), the process of S2352 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2308.

  After S2308, the processing from S2308 to S2312 is executed as in the first control example described above, and this processing is terminated.

  Thus, in the third control example, when the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 are reversed, the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display that face the back side of the pachinko machine 10 are displayed. The display contents on the surface 523a2 are configured so as to be able to execute a mirror effect that makes the display contents visible from the front side of the gaming machine via a mirror (mirror) 298. Thereby, since the decoration surface (523b1, 523b2) of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 and the display surface (523a1, 523a2) which is the back side can be used at the same time, it is possible to increase the variation of the production. Can improve the interest of the player.

  In the third control example, the mirror 298 arranged to execute the mirror effect is a half mirror (so-called magic mirror). When viewed from the bright side, the light is reflected and becomes a mirror (mirror), but when viewed from the dark side, the light is transmitted and looks like a window. A mirror front LED 296 is provided on the front side of the mirror 298, and a mirror back LED is provided on the back side of the mirror 298. Therefore, by turning on the mirror front side LED 296, the front side of the mirror 298 is brightened, and the mirror 298 functions as a mirror. On the other hand, by turning on the mirror back side LED 297, the back side of the mirror 298 is brightened, and the mirror 298 becomes a simple window (glass). Thus, by controlling the lighting of the LED, it is possible to vary whether the mirror 298 functions as a mirror or a window.

  In the case of functioning as a window, by providing a pattern, a pattern, or the like on the back side of the mirror 298 so as to be visible, an effect that is integrated with the sub liquid crystal display device 523 can be obtained. Moreover, it is good also as arrangement | positioning of LED for the production | presentation of a back side, and changing the lighting pattern of the LED, and changing the pattern and design which can be visually recognized when the mirror 298 is functioned as a window. Thereby, since the variation of production can be increased, the interest of a player can be improved.

  In the third control example, in the mirror effect, after the display surface (523a1, 523a2) that is inverted and turned to the back side is ready (after the display content is inverted), the mirror front side LED 297 is turned on. The mirror 298 is configured to function as a mirror. Thereby, since the display surface (523a1, 523a2) before preparation for display is not seen by the player, a suitable effect can be provided.

  Note that the degree of expectation that is a big hit may be indicated (notified) depending on whether or not the mirror 298 functions as a mirror in the mirror effect. Thus, in the mirror effect, the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are slid from the separated position to the adjacent position, and the upper display surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are reversed at the adjacent position, and then the upper display is performed. Since it can be noted whether or not the display contents of the surface 523a1 and the lower display surface 523a2 are displayed via the mirror 298, the interest of the player can be improved.

<Modification of third control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 146, a modification example of the mirror effect described in FIG. 139 will be described. In the present control example, when the mirror effect for allowing the player to visually recognize the back side of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is executed, the left back mirror member 299a is interposed between the third symbol display device 81 and the sub liquid crystal display device 523. The right rear mirror member 299b is moved and projected (reflected) on the left mirror 298a and the right mirror 298b. With this configuration, the player can visually recognize the back side of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 even if the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is completely reversed to a position facing the third symbol display device 81 in parallel. Therefore, the player can visually recognize the upper decorative surface 523b1 and the lower decorative surface 523b2 in the sub liquid crystal display mode in a state where the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is completely flattened.

<Modification of the first control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 148 to FIG. 150, a modification example of the effect display in the first control example described above will be described. FIGS. 148 to 150 are different from the effects shown in FIGS. 63 to 65 in the first control example in the order in which each symbol (upper symbol, middle symbol, lower symbol) overlaps. After displaying that the symbol wins the jackpot in the third symbol, it is used for technology (so-called probabilistic promotion effect) that uses the effect display to notify whether the current jackpot is a normal jackpot or a probable bonus jackpot is there.

  In this case, when the probable promotion effect is started, as shown in FIG. 148 (a), the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is slid so that the third symbol display device 81 is completely covered (upper display surface 523a1 and The lower display surface 523a2 is slid so that the lower display surface 523a2 comes into contact therewith, and a message indicating that the “probability promotion effect” is started is displayed on the display surface of the sub liquid crystal display device 523.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 148 (a), one symbol for promotion effect is enlarged and displayed. In this case, the promotion effect symbol displayed is a character symbol from which the number indicating the number is deleted, unlike the third symbol displayed corresponding to the normal game (special symbol variation game). When the character design displayed in this state is the same mode (character) as the “probability variation” (designation with specific numbers such as “3” and “7”) used in normal games , “Probability promotion effect” is an effect display indicating that the promising jackpot is won.

  On the other hand, if the character symbol displayed in this state is the same mode (character) as the symbol other than the “probable variation symbol” used in the normal game, the “probable variation promotion” is performed without notifying that the winning symbol has been won. "Direction" continues.

  As shown in FIGS. 148 (b) to 150 (b), the display area is gradually expanded by sliding the sub liquid crystal display device 523, and the display area is expanded to the state shown in FIG. 150 (b). When enlarged, among the character symbols displayed side by side in the vertical direction, some character symbols (for example, the character symbol displayed at the center) are given a mode indicating numbers.

  If the number given in this case is a number (for example, “3”, “7”) attached to the “probability change symbol” used in normal games, it was won by the “probable change promotion effect”. An effect display indicating that. In other words, the character symbol used for this “probability promotion effect” is the same character as the third symbol used in normal games, and a plurality of numbers (at least “probability variation”) are attached to the character symbol. And a number indicating a number other than the “probability pattern”).

  According to the “probability promotion effect” described above, the timing at which the character symbol is displayed to the player (see FIG. 148 (a)), and the timing at which the character symbol is given a mode (FIG. 150 (b)). It is possible to notify that the winning jackpot has been won at two timings (see)). Therefore, from the start to the end of the "probability promotion effect" until the game ends, the player will watch the effect while expecting to be promoted to a probable jackpot, which can improve the interest of the game effective.

  Further, in the above-mentioned “probability promotion effect”, a mode is shown in which each of the three character symbols displayed in the vertical direction is shown with a number, and the number assigned to each character symbol is determined according to a predetermined law (the number is added). In such a case, it is possible to notify that the probability winning jackpot has been won when it becomes an odd number or a number satisfies a predetermined rule (for example, “341”). As a result, it is possible to more effectively use enlargement of the display area for production.

  In addition, the timing of adding a mode indicating a number to a character symbol displayed in the vertical direction is shifted, or the mode of the character symbol displayed in the vertical direction is switched in the middle of the “probability promotion effect”. You may do it.

<Regarding the fourth control example>
Next, a fourth control example of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 151 to 156. In the fourth control example, after the opening command indicating the start of the jackpot game is transmitted as a command indicating the timing of the jackpot game, only the closing command indicating the closing of the specific winning opening 65a is transmitted to the first control example described above. Is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113. The sound lamp control device 113 is configured to determine the timing in the jackpot game according to the elapsed time after receiving the closing command. Thereby, the number of commands transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 can be reduced, so that the processing load can be reduced.

  First, the contents of the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. The RAM 223 in this control example is different from the first control example in that a specific winning opening state 223p, a jackpot flag 223t, and a time counter 223u are added, and the other points are the same. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The specific winning opening state 223p stores information indicating whether or not a game ball can enter the specific winning opening 65a. When the specific winning opening state 223p is in the open state, it indicates that the open / close door 65f1 of the variable winning device 65 is in the open state, and that the game ball can enter the specific winning opening 65a. When the winning opening state 223p is in the closed state, the open / close door 65f1 of the variable winning device 65 is in the closed state, and a game ball cannot enter (or is difficult to enter) the specific winning opening 65a. Indicates. The special prize opening state 223p is set to an open state when the jackpot game timing process (see FIG. 156) is determined to be the round start timing (see S5306 in FIG. 156), and the open / close door 65f1 of the specific prize opening 65a. When the closing command based on the closing is received, the closed state is set (see S2074 in FIG. 136). The set special winning opening state 223p is referred to when a winning number command is received from the main controller 110 (see S2072 in FIG. 156), and the received winning number command is a command based on a normal winning or Whether the command is based on over winning or not is determined.

  The jackpot flag 223t is a flag for determining whether or not the jackpot game is being executed. When the jackpot game is on, the jackpot game is being executed. When the jackpot game is off, the jackpot game is being executed. Indicates no. The big hit flag 223t is set to ON when an opening command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (S2071). Then, in the jackpot timing process (see FIG. 156), it is referred to to determine whether or not the jackpot game is being executed (see S5301 in FIG. 156), and when it is determined that it is the ending start timing of the jackpot game. Is set to OFF (see S5310 in FIG. 156).

<Control processing executed by main controller 110 in the fourth control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 152 and 153, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 in the fourth control example will be described. In the present control example, in contrast to the first control example described above, a big hit operation setting process 4 (S1105) in which a part of the processing is changed instead of the big hit action setting process (see FIG. 95) is executed. The difference is that the ending process 4 (S1110) in which a part of the process is changed instead of the process (see FIG. 96) is executed, and the other points are the same. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  First, details of the jackpot operation setting process 4 (S1105) will be described with reference to FIG. The jackpot operation setting process 4 (S1105) is different from the jackpot operation setting process (see FIG. 95) in the first control example in that a round number command is not set and the other points are the same. The detailed explanation is omitted.

  As will be described in detail later, the audio lamp control device 113 determines the start of the round by measuring the elapsed time after receiving the closing command indicating the end of the round. Thereby, the round number command indicating the start of the round in the jackpot game from the main control device 110 can be made unnecessary, and the processing load can be reduced.

  Next, the details of the ending process 4 (S1110) will be described with reference to FIG. The ending process 4 (S1110) is different from the ending process (FIG. 96) in the first control example in that an ending command is not set, and the other points are the same, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted.

  Although details will be described later, the audio lamp control device 113 determines the start of ending by counting the elapsed time since the reception of the closing command indicating the end of the round and the number of rounds executed. Yes. Thereby, the ending command indicating the start of ending in the jackpot game from the main controller 110 can be made unnecessary, and the processing load can be reduced.

<Regarding the control process executed by the sound lamp control device 113 in the fourth control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 154 to 156, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 in the fourth control example will be described. In this control example, the jackpot-related process 4 (S1912) in which a part of the processing is changed instead of the jackpot-related process (see FIG. 103) is executed with respect to the first control example described above, and the jackpot timing process (See FIG. 156) is different from the newly executed point, and the other points are the same. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  First, the main process 4 executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 in this control example will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In the main process 4, similarly to the main process (see FIG. 101) in the first control example described above, the processes of S1801 to S1811 are executed.

  When the process of S1811 is completed, the jackpot timing process is executed (S1831), and the process proceeds to S1812. After S1812, the processing of S1812 to S1818 is executed in the same manner as in the first control example described above. Details of the jackpot timing process (S1831) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 155, details of the jackpot related process 4 (S1912) executed in the command determination process (S1812) will be described. In the jackpot related process 4 (S1912), in response to the first control example, when the opening command indicating the start of the jackpot is received, the jackpot flag 223t is set to ON, and the specific winning during the jackpot game Based on the fact that the closing command indicating that the mouth 65a is closed is received, the elapsed time since the closing command is received, and the round number command and the ending command are received. The difference is that the processing is deleted, and the other points are the same. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  In jackpot related processing 4 (S1912), first, it is determined whether or not an opening command has been received (S2001). If it is determined that an opening command has been received (S2001: Yes), a display opening command is set. (S2002), the big hit flag is set to ON (S2071), and this process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2001 that the opening command has not been received (S2001: No), it is then determined whether or not a winning number command has been received (S2006). If it is determined in the process of S2006 that a winning command has been received (S2006: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the specific winning opening state 223p is closed (S2072).

  If it is determined in the processing of S2072 that the specific winning opening state 223p is in the closed state (S2072: Yes), since the received winning number command is a command based on over winning, the over winning process is executed. (S2009), this process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2072 that the specific prize opening state 223p is in the open state (S2072: No), the received winning number command is a command based on a normal winning, and therefore the normal winning command is changed. After setting (S2010), the process is terminated.

  In the process of S2006, if it is determined that the winning command has not been received (S2006: No), it is determined whether or not a close command has been received (S2073).

  If it is determined in the processing of S2073 that the closing command has been received (S2073: Yes), the specific winning opening state 223p is set to the closed state (S2074), and the time counter 223u is set to 0 (S2075). ), This process is terminated.

  By the process of S2075, the time counter 223u is initialized to 0 every time the specific winning opening 65a is closed. Thereby, the elapsed time after the specific winning opening 65a is closed can be measured.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2073 that the close command has not been received (S2073: No), the process from S2014 to S2015 is executed as in the first control example, and this process ends.

  Next, details of the jackpot timing process (S1831) executed in the main process 4 (see FIG. 154) of the sound lamp control device 113 in this control example will be described. The jackpot timing process (S1831) is a process that is executed every 1 ms in the main process 4 (see FIG. 154), and is a process that performs timing to determine the round start timing and the ending timing in the jackpot game.

  In the jackpot timing process (S1831), it is first determined whether or not the jackpot flag 223t is on (S5301). If it is determined that the jackpot flag 223t is off (S5301: No), the jackpot game is not being played and it is not necessary to keep time, so this processing is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the process of S5301, if it is determined that the big hit flag 223t is on (S5301: Yes), the value of the time counter 223u is incremented by 1 (S5302), and the value of the added time counter 223u is obtained. Based on this, it is determined whether or not it is a round start timing (S5303).

  Specifically, if the value of the time counter 223u is 4000, it is determined that it is a round start timing since 4 seconds have elapsed since the round ended.

  If it is determined in the process of S5303 that it is the round start timing (S5303: Yes), the value of the round number counter 223g is incremented by 1 (S5304), a display round number command is set (S5305), and a specific prize is awarded. The mouth state 223p is set to the open state (S5306), and this process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5303 that it is not the round start timing (S5303: No), it is then determined whether it is the ending start timing (S5307).

  Specifically, when the value of the round number counter 223g is 16 and the value of the time counter 223u is smaller than 400, the value of the time counter 223u is set to 0 by receiving the closing command in the final round. It is determined that it is a case, and it is determined that it is the ending start timing.

  In the final round, when the ending effect is started after a predetermined period after the specific winning opening 65a is closed, it is only necessary to wait until the time counter 223u reaches the predetermined period.

  If it is determined in the process of S5307 that it is the ending start timing (S5307), the same ending setting process (see FIG. 105) as in the first control example is executed (S5308), and the round number counter is set to 0. (S5309), the big hit medium flag 223t is set to OFF (S5310), and this processing is terminated.

  As described above, in the fourth control example, after transmitting the opening command indicating the start of the jackpot game as the command indicating the timing in the jackpot game, only the closing command indicating the closing of the specific winning opening 65a is mainly used. The control device 110 is configured to transmit to the sound lamp control device 113. The sound lamp control device 113 is configured to determine the timing in the jackpot game according to the elapsed time after receiving the closing command. Thereby, the number of commands transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 can be reduced, so that the processing load can be reduced.

<Modification 2 in the first control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 157 to 158, a modified example of the opening / closing display effect in the first control example will be described.

  FIG. 157 is a diagram showing a display mode when the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is slid up and down. FIG. 157 (a) is a diagram showing a state in which the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is disposed on the front side of the third symbol display device 81. FIG. Thus, at the position where the third symbol display device 81 is overlapped by the sub liquid crystal display device 523, the display mode of the third symbol (special symbol) displayed on the sub liquid crystal display device 523 by the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. Is done. In the lower right portion of the lower display surface 523a2, the decorative symbol Z is displayed blinking. It shows that the middle symbol that is the reach display mode is changing.

  FIG. 158 (b) is a diagram showing a display mode when the sub liquid crystal display devices 523 start sliding up and down. The reach symbol is moved to the upper right and displayed, and the middle symbol is moved to the exposed area of the third symbol display device 81 and displayed. A school of fish production (production in which a school of fish is displayed in a variable manner) is displayed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 158 (c), when the slide amount of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 increases, the school of fish moves to the sub liquid crystal display device 523 side and is displayed. As described above, the display of the school of fish is configured such that the area where the middle symbol is displayed is a small school of fish, and the area where the middle symbol is not displayed is moved and displayed. Yes. By configuring in this way, it is possible to display the fluctuation of the school of fish according to the sliding direction of the sub liquid crystal display device 523, and the school moves by effectively utilizing the display area that is expanded by sliding. The area to be made can be widened.

  FIG. 158 is a diagram showing a display mode when sub liquid crystal display device 523 is slid to the left and right (slides to the outside in the left and right direction). FIG. 158 (a) is a diagram showing a state in which the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is disposed on the front side of the third symbol display device 81. FIG. Thus, at the position where the third symbol display device 81 is overlapped by the sub liquid crystal display device 523, the display mode of the third symbol (special symbol) displayed on the sub liquid crystal display device 523 by the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. Is done. In the lower right portion of the lower display surface 523a2, the decorative symbol Z is displayed blinking. It shows that the middle symbol that is the reach display mode is changing.

  FIG. 158 (b) is a diagram showing a display mode when the sub liquid crystal display devices 523 start sliding outward. The reach symbol is moved to the upper right and displayed, and the middle symbol is moved to the exposed area of the third symbol display device 81 and displayed. A school of fish production (production in which a school of fish is displayed in a variable manner) is displayed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 158 (c), when the slide amount of the sub liquid crystal display device 523 increases, the school of fish moves to the sub liquid crystal display device 523 side and is displayed. As described above, the display of the school of fish is configured such that the area where the middle symbol is displayed is a small school of fish, and the area where the middle symbol is not displayed is moved and displayed. Yes. By configuring in this way, it is possible to display the fluctuation of the school of fish according to the sliding direction of the sub liquid crystal display device 523, and the school moves by effectively utilizing the display area that is expanded by sliding. The area to be made can be widened.

  When the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is rotated in the state shown in FIGS. 157 to 158, the display coordinates of the display data of the same fish school effect display data are corrected and set, respectively. It is configured to be. Thereby, it is not necessary to separately store the fish data when the sub liquid crystal display device 523 is rotated, and the data amount can be suppressed.

  In addition, you may implement this invention in the pachinko machine etc. of a different type from the said each control example or each control example. For example, once a big hit, a pachinko machine that raises the expected value of the big hit until a big hit state occurs (for example, two times or three times) including that (for example, a two-time right item, a three-time right item) May also be implemented. Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine that has a special area such as a V-zone and has a special gaming state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, the game machine may be implemented as various game machines such as an alepatchi, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a game machine in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating a control lever in a state where a symbol effective line is determined by inserting coins, and a symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating a stop button. Is. Accordingly, the basic concept of the slot machine is that it is provided with a display device for confirming and displaying the identification information after variably displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and resulting from the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variation display of the identification information is started, and the variation display of the identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific condition. In this case, the game medium is typically a coin, medal, etc. Take as an example.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device is provided that displays a symbol after a symbol string composed of a plurality of symbols is variably displayed, and has a handle for launching a ball. What is not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of spheres based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the change of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or With the passage of time, the variation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player is generated on the condition that the determined symbol at the time of stoppage is a so-called jackpot symbol. In this case, a large amount of balls are paid out to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only a ball can be handled as a gaming value in the gaming hall. Therefore, the gaming value seen in the current gaming hall in which pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed is used. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the location of the gaming machine can be solved.

  Although the present invention has been described based on the above control example, the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and various modifications can be easily made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be guessed.

  The concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention is shown below.

<About the concept of the invention, taking as an example the slide member 520 in which the rail-side member 521a and the liquid crystal-side member 521b of the one-side guided member 521 are connected to be relatively displaceable>
In a gaming machine comprising: one side member; another side member disposed opposite to the one side member; and a slide member that is slid and displaced while being guided by the one side member and the other side member, respectively. The slide member includes a one-side guided member guided by the one-side member, an other-side guided member guided by the other-side member, and the one-side guided portion and the other-side guided portion. A rotating member that is pivotally supported on the one side member, and an allowable state of relative displacement of the one side guided member relative to the one side member is allowable relative displacement of the other side guided member relative to the other side member. A gaming machine A1 that is different from the state.

  Here, the one-side member, the other-side member disposed to face the one-side member, and the slide member that is slid and displaced while being guided by the one-side member and the other-side member, respectively. A gaming machine is known (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2014-014602).

  The applicant of the present application is that the slide member includes one side guided member guided by the one side member, another side guided member guided by the other side member, and the one side guided portion and the other side guided portion. The present invention devised a structure formed by a rotating member that is rotatably supported between them (not known at the time of filing this application). According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase the variation of the rendering operation by allowing the rotating member to be rotated as well as sliding. Further, by the rotation of the rotating member, for example, not only the front side of the rotating member but also the back side can be visually recognized by the player.

  However, in such a configuration, when the rotating member is rotated, there is a problem that the sliding member is slid and displaced with respect to the one side member and the other side member due to the inertial force accompanying the start or stop of the rotation. . That is, it is difficult to rotate only the rotating member while stopping the slide member at a predetermined position with respect to the one side member and the other side member.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, the allowable state of relative displacement of the one side guided member with respect to the one side member is different from the allowable state of relative displacement of the other side guided member with respect to the other side member. When an inertial force accompanying the start of rotation or the stop of rotation is applied to the slide member, the slide member can have a displacement component in a direction orthogonal to the direction of the slide displacement. Therefore, the displacement component in the direction orthogonal to the direction of the slide displacement can be a force (braking force) pressing the slide member against the one side member or the other side member, and the slide member is the one side member and the other side member. It is possible to suppress sliding displacement with respect to. That is, it is possible to easily rotate only the rotating member while stopping the slide member at a predetermined position with respect to the one side member and the other side member.

  In addition, as a structure which forms the relative displacement of the one side guided member or the other side guided member with respect to the one side member or the other side member, for example, a gap is formed between the two, and the relative displacement is equivalent to the gap. Possible forms and forms in which an elastic body (for example, a flexible material such as rubber or urethane, a metal spring, etc.) is interposed between the two, and relative displacement is possible due to elastic deformation of the elastic body Or the form etc. with which these were combined are illustrated.

  In addition, for example, the allowable states are different from each other, for example, when the allowable amount of relative displacement is different, the ease of relative displacement (force required to form unit relative displacement), or a combination thereof. The case is shown as an example.

  The gaming machine A1 includes a rotational drive unit for rotationally driving the rotational member, and the relative displacement of the one-side guided member relative to the one-side member is relative to the other-side guided member. The gaming machine A2 is characterized in that it is more easily tolerated and the rotational driving means is disposed on the one-side guided member.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine A1, the relative displacement of the one side guided member with respect to the one side member is more easily tolerated than the relative displacement of the other side guided member with respect to the other side member. Since the rotational drive means is disposed on the one-side guided member in a form in which relative displacement is likely to be allowed, the displacement component in the direction orthogonal to the direction of the slide displacement can be converted into the one-side member or the other-side member. In the case of a force to be pressed (braking force), the pressing force can be increased by utilizing the rotational inertia of the rotation driving means. As a result, only the rotating member can be easily rotated while stopping the slide member at a predetermined position with respect to the one side member and the other side member.

  In addition, as a form in which the relative displacement is easily allowed, for example, when the allowable amount of the relative displacement is increased, the force required to form the unit relative displacement is decreased, or when these are combined, etc. Illustrated.

  In the gaming machine A2, the rotation driving means is disposed on the outer surface side of the one-side guided member that is opposite to the other-side guided member.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A2, the rotation driving means is disposed on the outer surface side of the one side guided member that is opposite to the other side guided member. On the other hand, when the one side guided member is relatively displaced, the rotation driving means can be displaced along a locus farther from the other side displaced member. Thereby, when the displacement component in the direction orthogonal to the direction of the slide displacement is used as a force (braking force) for pressing the slide member against the one side member or the other side member, it is easier to use the rotational inertia of the rotation driving means. Thus, the pressing force can be increased. As a result, only the rotating member can be easily rotated while stopping the slide member at a predetermined position with respect to the one side member and the other side member.

  In the gaming machine A2 or A3, a pair of the slide members are arranged to face each other along the direction of the slide displacement, and when the slide members are slid in a direction in which they are close to each other, The side guided member is disposed opposite to the other guided member of the other slide member, and the other guided member of one slide member is disposed opposite to the one guided member of the other slide member. Characteristic gaming machine A4.

  Here, when the pair of slide members are arranged facing each other along the direction of the slide displacement and are slid to each other in a direction close to each other so that they are arranged opposite to each other at the center position, there is no gap at the center position. When abutting, the load on the driving means (motor) for slidably displacing the slide members becomes large, causing damage to the driving means and the driving force transmission mechanism (gear, etc.).

  On the other hand, in order to avoid such damage, allow for a position for stopping both in consideration of dimensional tolerance, assembly tolerance, or control tolerance (set a sufficient gap between the two at the center position). Then, the back side is visually recognized by the player from the gap, and the appearance (effect effect) is deteriorated.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A2 or A3, the pair of slide members are arranged in opposite directions so that they are slid and displaced in the direction in which they are close to each other. When the slide members are brought into contact with each other at the position, the one-side guided member of the one and the other slide members is retracted to accept the other-side guided member of the other (one and the other) slide members. (The pair of slide members can be inclined with respect to the direction of the slide displacement based on the above-described difference between the relative displacement allowable states). That is, even when the pair of slide members abut on each other at the center position, damage to the driving means and the driving force transmission mechanism can be suppressed, so that the position where both are stopped can be set closer. As a result, at the center position, the pair of slide members can be brought close to each other with a smaller gap between each other, and the appearance (effect effect) can be improved.

  In any of the gaming machines A2 to A4, a base member on which the one side member and the other side member are disposed, a sensor device disposed on the base member, and a detected member detected by the sensor device, A gaming machine A5, wherein the detected member is disposed on the other guided member.

  According to the gaming machine A5, the relative displacement of the other guided member with respect to the other member is less acceptable than the relative displacement of the one guided member with respect to the one member. Since the member to be detected is provided, even when the posture of the slide member changes, it is possible to suppress the displacement of the member to be detected with respect to the base member (sensor device). As a result, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines A2 to A4, the position of the slide member relative to the base member (one side member and the other side member) can be detected more accurately.

<About the concept of the invention taking as an example the slide mechanism 2500 in which the one-side guided members 521 are arranged to face each other>
A gaming machine comprising a base, a base member rotatably supported by the base, and a displacement member disposed to be displaceable on the base member, wherein the inertial force accompanying the displacement of the displacement member The gaming machine B1 is characterized by comprising suppression means for suppressing the base member from rotating relative to the base.

  Here, a gaming machine including a member formed to be displaceable is known (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2014-014602).

  In this case, for example, in a structure in which such a configuration (displacement member) is disposed on the base member and the base member is rotatably supported by the base (unknown at the time of filing this application), the start or displacement of the displacement member is displaced. There is a problem that the base member is rotated with respect to the base by the inertial force accompanying the stop of the rotation. That is, it is difficult to displace the displacement member while stopping the base member at a predetermined rotational position with respect to the base.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, since the base member is prevented from rotating with respect to the base by the inertial force accompanying the displacement of the displacement member, the rotation of the displacement member is started or stopped. When the inertial force associated with is applied to the base member, the base member can be prevented from rotating with respect to the base. That is, it is possible to easily rotate or rotate the slide member while stopping the base member at a predetermined rotational position with respect to the base.

  Note that the mode of displacement is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include rotational displacement, swing displacement, slide displacement, and a combination of these. The slide displacement trajectory may be a straight line, a curved line, or a combination of these. Further, the direction of displacement may be indefinite. For example, the displacement member may be elastically supported by the base member via an elastic body, and the displacement member may be displaced by elastic deformation of the elastic body.

  In the gaming machine B1, the displacement member is slid and displaced by one side member, the other side member disposed opposite to the one side member, and one side and the other side guided by the one side member and the other side member, respectively. A sliding member, the one side guided member guided by the one side member, the other side guided member guided by the other side member, the one side guided portion, and A rotating member that is rotatably supported between the other side guided portions, and an allowable state of relative displacement of the one side guided member with respect to the one side member is the other side covered with respect to the other side member. Unlike the allowable displacement state of the guide member, the pair of slide members includes one side guided member and the other side guided member of one of the slide members, and one side guided member and the other of the other slide member. Side guided member Gaming machine B2, characterized in that disposed in a posture respectively opposed.

  Here, the one-side member, the other-side member disposed to face the one-side member, and the slide member that is slid and displaced while being guided by the one-side member and the other-side member, respectively. A gaming machine is known (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2014-014602).

  The applicant of the present application is that the slide member includes one side guided member guided by the one side member, another side guided member guided by the other side member, and the one side guided portion and the other side guided portion. A rotating member that is rotatably supported in between, and the allowable state of relative displacement of the one guided member with respect to the one side member is different from the allowable state of relative displacement of the other guided member with respect to the other member A devised structure was devised (not known at the time of filing this application). According to this configuration, when an inertial force accompanying the start or stop of rotation of the rotation member is applied to the slide member, the slide member can have a displacement component in a direction perpendicular to the direction of the slide displacement. Therefore, the displacement component in the direction orthogonal to the direction of the slide displacement can be a force (braking force) for pressing the slide member against the one side member or the other side member. As a result, the slide member becomes the one side member. Further, it is possible to suppress sliding displacement with respect to the other side member. That is, it is possible to easily rotate only the rotating member while stopping the slide member at a predetermined position with respect to the one side member and the other side member.

  In this case, the applicant of the present application has devised a configuration in which the above-described one side member and the other side member are disposed on the base member, and the base member is rotatably supported by the base (not known at the time of filing this application). According to this configuration, the direction of the slide displacement of the slide member and the direction of the rotation axis of the rotation member can be changed according to the rotation position of the base member, and accordingly, variations in the rendering operation can be increased accordingly. .

  However, in such a configuration, when the slide members having the same configuration are arranged facing each other, one of the slides is applied when an inertial force is applied to the slide member when rotation of the rotation member starts or stops. The displacement component orthogonal to the direction of the slide displacement in the member and the displacement component orthogonal to the direction of the slide displacement in the other slide member are staggered directions (point-symmetrical directions that give rotational inertia to the base member) Therefore, there is a problem that the base member is rotated with respect to the base. That is, it is difficult to rotate the rotating member while stopping the base member at a predetermined rotational position with respect to the base.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B1, a pair of slide members are connected to one side guided member and the other side guided member of one slide member and the other slide member. Since the one-side guided member and the other-side guided member are arranged to face each other, when the inertia force accompanying the start or stop of rotation of the rotating member is applied to the slide member, The displacement component orthogonal to the slide displacement direction of the slide member and the displacement component orthogonal to the slide displacement direction of the other slide member can be set to the same direction (axisymmetric direction), and the base member is the base It can suppress that it rotates with respect to. That is, it is possible to easily rotate or rotate the slide member while stopping the base member at a predetermined rotational position with respect to the base.

  In addition, as a structure which forms the relative displacement of the one side guided member or the other side guided member with respect to the one side member or the other side member, for example, a gap is formed between the two, and the relative displacement is equivalent to the gap. Possible forms and forms in which an elastic body (for example, a flexible material such as rubber or urethane, a metal spring, etc.) is interposed between the two, and relative displacement is possible due to elastic deformation of the elastic body Or the form etc. with which these were combined are illustrated.

  In addition, for example, the allowable states are different from each other, for example, when the allowable amount of relative displacement is different, the ease of relative displacement (force required to form unit relative displacement), or a combination thereof. The case is shown as an example.

  In the gaming machine B2, the relative displacement of the one-side guided member with respect to the one-side member is more easily tolerated than the relative displacement of the other-side guided member with respect to the other-side member, and the slide member is substantially horizontal. When the slide member is displaced in the direction, the base member rotates relative to the base so that the slide member forms a posture in which the one-side guided member is positioned substantially above the other-side guided member. A gaming machine B3 characterized in that a position is set.

  According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B2, the relative displacement of the one-side guided member with respect to the one-side member is more easily tolerated than the relative displacement of the other-side guided member with respect to the other-side member. When sliding the slide member in a substantially horizontal direction, the base member relative to the base is formed so that the slide member forms a posture in which the one side guided member is positioned substantially above the other side guided member in the vertical direction. Since the rotation position is set, the displacement component in the direction perpendicular to the direction of the slide displacement (when the slide member is moved to one side when the inertia force accompanying the start or stop of the rotation of the rotation member is applied to the slide member. The displacement component that causes a force (braking force) to be pressed against the member or the other member can be set to be vertically downward (gravity direction). Thereby, when rotating a rotation member, it can suppress that a slide member floats, and the rotation can be stabilized.

  In addition, as a form in which the relative displacement is easily allowed, for example, when the allowable amount of the relative displacement is increased, the force required to form the unit relative displacement is decreased, or when these are combined, etc. Illustrated.

  In the gaming machine B2, the relative displacement of the one-side guided member with respect to the one-side member is more easily tolerated than the relative displacement of the other-side guided member with respect to the other-side member, and the slide member is substantially horizontal. When the slide member is slid in the direction, the base member relative to the base is formed such that the slide member forms a posture in which the one side guided member is positioned substantially below the other side guided member. A gaming machine B4, wherein a rotational position is set.

  According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine B2, the relative displacement of the one-side guided member with respect to the one-side member is more easily tolerated than the relative displacement of the other-side guided member with respect to the other-side member. When the slide member is slid in a substantially horizontal direction, the base member with respect to the base is formed so that the slide member forms a posture in which the one side guided member is positioned substantially below the other side guided member. Therefore, when the inertia force accompanying the start of the slide displacement of the slide member or the stop of the slide displacement is applied to the slide member, the displacement component in the direction orthogonal to the direction of the slide displacement (the slide member The displacement component that applies a force (braking force) that presses against the one side member or the other side member can be set upward in the vertical direction (the direction opposite to the gravity direction). Thereby, when the slide member is slid, the resistance due to the action of gravity can be reduced, and the driving force required for the slide displacement can be suppressed. Moreover, the wear of the sliding part accompanying the slide displacement can be suppressed.

  In addition, as a form in which the relative displacement is easily allowed, for example, when the allowable amount of the relative displacement is increased, the force required to form the unit relative displacement is decreased, or when these are combined, etc. Illustrated.

  The gaming machine B3 is provided with a rotation driving means for driving the rotation member to rotate, and the rotation driving means is disposed on the one-side guided member.

  According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B3, the rotational driving means is disposed on the one side guided member in which relative displacement is more easily allowed compared to the other side guided member. When the displacement component in the direction orthogonal to the direction of the displacement is a force (braking force) that presses the slide member against the one side member or the other side member, the pressing force is increased using the rotational inertia of the rotation drive means. can do. As a result, when the rotating member is rotated, the slide member can be easily prevented from being lifted, and the rotation can be stabilized.

  In the gaming machine B4, a gaming machine B6 is provided with a rotational driving means for rotationally driving the rotational member, and the rotational driving means is disposed on the other-side guided member.

  According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B4, the displacement component in the direction orthogonal to the direction of the slide displacement can be set vertically upward (opposite to the gravity direction). Since the rotational drive means is disposed on the other guided member in a form in which relative displacement is difficult to be allowed as compared with the guide member, the rotational drive means moves in a direction perpendicular to the direction of the slide displacement due to the rotational inertia of the rotational drive means. It can suppress that the displacement component of becomes too large. As a result, when rotating the rotating member, it is possible to suppress the sliding displacement of the sliding member, and when sliding the sliding member, the driving force necessary for the sliding displacement can be suppressed and the sliding Wear of the sliding part accompanying displacement can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine B5, the rotation driving means is disposed on an outer surface side of the one-side guided member that is opposite to the other-side guided member.

  According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B5, the rotation driving means is disposed on the outer surface side of the one side guided member on the opposite side to the other side guided member. On the other hand, when the one side guided member is relatively displaced, the rotation driving means can be displaced along a locus farther from the other side displaced member. Thereby, when the displacement component in the direction orthogonal to the direction of the slide displacement is used as a force (braking force) for pressing the slide member against the one side member or the other side member, it is easier to use the rotational inertia of the rotation driving means. Thus, the pressing force can be increased. As a result, when the rotating member is rotated, the slide member can be easily prevented from being lifted, and the rotation can be stabilized.

  In the gaming machine B6, the rotation driving means is disposed on the outer surface side of the other guided member that is opposite to the other member.

  According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B6, the rotation driving means is disposed on the outer surface side of the other guided member on the side opposite to the other side member. When the one-side guided member and the other-side guided member are relatively displaced with respect to the member, the rotation driving means can be positioned in a portion where the relative displacement amount is smaller. Thereby, it can be suppressed that the displacement component in the direction orthogonal to the direction of the slide displacement becomes too large due to the rotational inertia of the rotation driving means. As a result, when rotating the rotating member, it is possible to suppress the sliding displacement of the sliding member, and when sliding the sliding member, the driving force necessary for the sliding displacement can be suppressed and the sliding Wear of the sliding part accompanying displacement can be suppressed.

<About the concept of the invention, taking as an example the slide member 4520 in which the position of the rotation shaft 4523c is eccentric>
In a gaming machine including a slide member formed so as to be slidable between a first position and a second position, the game machine is disposed to face the slide member arranged at the first position from the opposite side to the second position. And an effect means for producing an effect between the opposing member and the slide member, and the slide member is formed to be rotatable by a rotation shaft that is eccentrically positioned along the direction of the slide displacement. A gaming machine C1 characterized by that.

  Here, a gaming machine including a slide member formed so as to be slidable between a first position and a second position is known (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2014-014602).

  The applicant of the present application includes a facing member arranged to face the slide member arranged at the first position from the opposite side to the second position, and a rendering means for producing an effect between the opposed member and the slide member. A gaming machine was devised (not known at the time of filing this application). However, in the configuration described above, if the interval between the slide member disposed at the first position and the facing member is narrow, the rendering by the rendering means cannot be sufficiently performed (for example, the movable member for rendering is movable). Space cannot be secured, or an area for visually recognizing members cannot be secured). On the other hand, when the first position of the slide member is shifted to the second position side in order to secure such an interval, the slide member projects to the second position side, so that it is positioned on the slide displacement locus of the slide member. The visible region of the member (for example, a liquid crystal display device) is reduced. If the opposing member is shifted to the side opposite to the second position, the distance from the second position to the opposing member increases, leading to an increase in the size of the entire apparatus.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, the slide member is formed to be rotatable by a rotational shaft that is eccentrically positioned along the direction of the slide displacement, and therefore, between the opposing members according to the rotational position. Can be increased or decreased. In other words, by rotating the slide member to the rotational position where the facing interval with the facing member is increased, the effect by the effect means can be sufficiently performed, while the sliding member is moved to the rotating position where the facing distance with the facing member is reduced. By rotating, the amount of protrusion of the slide member to the second position side can be reduced, and accordingly, a visible area of other members can be secured. Further, since it is not necessary to shift the opposing member to the side opposite to the second position, the distance from the second position to the opposing member can be reduced, and the entire apparatus can be miniaturized.

  In addition, as the production means, for example, a member formed so as to be displaceable is displaced using the space between the facing member and the slide member, and the space between the facing member and the sliding member is opposed to the facing member. Examples include those that use displacement, those that allow the display and decoration on the back side to be visually recognized from between the opposing members and the sliding member, those that irradiate light between the opposing member and the sliding member, and combinations thereof. The

  In the gaming machine C1, the rendering means includes an irradiating means for irradiating light between the facing member and the slide member.

  Here, for example, in a configuration in which the facing member irradiates light toward the facing portion with the slide member, the player can visually recognize the light reflected by the sliding member from between the facing portion of the sliding member and the facing member. It can be carried out.

  In this case, in the above-described configuration, the light reflected by the slide member cannot be made sufficiently visible to the player if the distance between the slide member disposed at the first position and the facing member is narrow. On the other hand, when the first position of the slide member is shifted to the second position side in order to secure such an interval, the slide member projects to the second position side, so that it is positioned on the slide displacement locus of the slide member. The visible region of the member (for example, a liquid crystal display device) is reduced. If the opposing member is shifted to the side opposite to the second position, the distance from the second position to the opposing member increases, leading to an increase in the size of the entire apparatus.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C1, the slide member is formed to be rotatable by a rotating shaft that is eccentrically positioned along the direction of the slide displacement. Accordingly, the interval between the facing member and the facing member can be increased or decreased. That is, by rotating the slide member to the rotation position where the facing interval with the facing member is increased, the light emitted from the irradiating means can be made fully visible to the player, while the sliding member is opposed to the facing member. By rotating to a rotational position where the interval is reduced, the amount of protrusion of the slide member toward the second position can be reduced, and accordingly, a visible region of other members can be secured. Further, since it is not necessary to shift the opposing member to the side opposite to the second position, the distance from the second position to the opposing member can be reduced, and the entire apparatus can be miniaturized.

  In addition, as an arrangement | positioning position of an irradiation means, the aspect arrange | positioned in an opposing member so that irradiation to a slide member is possible, the aspect arrange | positioned in a slide member so that irradiation to an opposing member is possible, and between a slide member and opposing of an opposing member The aspect arrange | positioned in the back side between the opposition so that irradiation is possible, and the aspect which combined these are illustrated.

  The gaming machine C3 or C2 includes a base and a base member rotatably supported on the base, and the slide member is disposed on the base member.

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C1 or C2, the position of the center of gravity can be changed by rotating the slide member. That is, the position of the center of gravity can be adjusted to a position suitable for the rotation of the base member relative to the base while maintaining the slide member at the first position or the second position. As a result, for example, the rotation of the base member can be stabilized. Alternatively, the driving force required for the rotation of the base member can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine C3, the pair of slide members are arranged to face each other along the direction of the slide displacement.

  According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine C3, a pair of slide members are arranged facing each other along the direction of slide displacement, that is, the pair of slide members can be arranged symmetrically. Therefore, the position of the center of gravity as a whole can be brought close to the center of rotation of the base member with respect to the base. Thereby, even if the change in the position of the center of gravity due to the rotation of the slide member is small, the change in the position of the center of gravity can be made effective.

  In the gaming machine C3 or C4, when the rotation direction of the base member with respect to the base is rotation in a direction of lowering the position of the center of gravity, the position of the center of gravity is determined by the rotation of the slide member. A gaming machine C5, characterized in that it is kept away from the center of rotation of the base member.

  According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C3 or C4, when the rotation direction of the base member relative to the base is rotation in the direction of lowering the position of the center of gravity, Since the position of the center of gravity is moved away from the center of rotation of the base member with respect to the base, the base member can be easily rotated with respect to the base by the change in the position of the center of gravity. Thereby, the driving force required for rotation of the base member can be suppressed.

  In any of the gaming machines C3 to C5, when the rotation direction of the base member with respect to the base is rotation in a direction to raise the position of the center of gravity, the position of the center of gravity is determined by the rotation of the slide member. A gaming machine C6, which is close to the center of rotation of the base member with respect to the base.

  According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines C3 to C5, when the rotation direction of the base member relative to the base is rotation in the direction of raising the position of the center of gravity, Since the position of the center of gravity is brought closer to the center of rotation of the base member with respect to the base by the rotation, the base member can be easily rotated with respect to the base by the change in the position of the center of gravity. Thereby, the driving force required for rotation of the base member can be suppressed.

<About the concept of the invention taking the overhanging wall portion 5640 in which the opening portion 5541 is formed as an example>
In a gaming machine including a passage member that surrounds a spherical object and is formed as a passage through which the object passes, the passage member includes an opening formed in a side surface thereof, and the object is a part of the passage member. The gaming machine D1 is formed so as to be able to pass through in a state of protruding from the opening to the outside.

  Here, there is known a gaming machine including a passage member that surrounds a spherical object and is formed as a passage through which the object passes (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013-192836). According to such a passage member, for example, a game ball passing through the game area can be introduced from one end side, passed through the back side of the game area, and then discharged from the other end side to the game area. However, in the case of such a configuration, there is a problem in that the movable range of the effect member disposed so as to be displaceable on the back side of the game area is limited due to the extension of the passage member.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, the passage member is provided with an opening formed in the side surface thereof, and the object is formed so as to be able to pass in a state in which a part projects from the opening to the outside. Therefore, compared with the case of the form which surrounds the whole target object to the inner peripheral side, the protrusion of a channel | path member can be suppressed. Therefore, the arrangement space of other members and the movable range of other members can be ensured accordingly.

  In addition, the cross-sectional shape of a channel | path member is arbitrary, For example, a cross-sectional circle, a cross-sectional ellipse, a cross-sectional polygon, or the shape which combined these is illustrated.

  In the gaming machine D1, a pair of the openings are disposed to face the passage member.

  According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D1, the passage member is provided with a pair of opening portions facing each other, so that the facing distance between the side surfaces where the pair of opening portions are formed is reduced. Accordingly, the space for disposing other members and the movable range of the other members can be efficiently secured.

  In the gaming machine D1 or D2, a gaming machine D3, wherein the passage member is formed with an inclined surface on an inner surface side at a peripheral edge of the opening.

  According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D1 or D2, the passage member is formed with an inclined surface on the inner surface side at the peripheral edge of the opening, so that the object is equivalent to the inclined surface. Enlarging the amount of protrusion that allows the portion to protrude from the opening to the outside, suppressing the overhang of the passage member, and securing the thickness dimension of the passage member at the peripheral edge of the opening, thereby improving the rigidity of the passage member be able to.

  In the gaming machine D3, the passage member is set such that the distance between the base ends of the inclined surfaces in a direction orthogonal to the direction of passage of the object is at least smaller than the diameter of the object. A gaming machine D4.

  According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D3, the passage member has a dimension in which the distance between the base ends of the inclined surfaces in the direction orthogonal to the direction of passage of the object is at least smaller than the diameter of the object. Therefore, when a part of the object protrudes from the opening to the outside, the object can be suppressed from being received only by the tip (inner peripheral side end) of the inclined surface. That is, since the sphere can be received by the portion where the inclined surface is not formed, the breakage of the passage member (periphery of the opening) can be suppressed.

  In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D4, the passage member is formed in a rectangular cross section from four wall portions, and the opening is formed in at least one of the four wall portions. A gaming machine D5 characterized by this.

  According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines D1 to D4, the passage member is formed in a rectangular cross section from the four wall portions, and is formed on at least one of the four wall portions. Since the opening is formed as an opening, the section modulus of the passage member can be secured and the rigidity thereof can be improved.

  In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D4, the passage member is formed in a cross-sectional circle shape having an inner diameter substantially equal to or slightly larger than the diameter of the object, and a line segment connecting the two points on the curve of the cross-sectional circle shape The gaming machine D6 is characterized in that the opening is formed by cutting by the above.

  According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines D1 to D4, the passage member is formed in a cross-sectional circular shape having an inner diameter substantially equal to or slightly larger than the diameter of the object, Since the opening is formed by cutting the two points in a straight line, the overhang of the passage member can be suppressed to a minimum. As a result, an arrangement space for other members and a movable range of other members can be efficiently secured.

  In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D6, the passage member is curved or bent in a passage path of the object, and the opening is a direction of a centrifugal force acting on the object by the curvature or bending of the passage path. A gaming machine D7, which is formed on a side surface of the passage member on the opposite side.

  According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines D1 to D6, the passage where the formation position of the opening is opposite to the direction of the centrifugal force acting on the object due to the bending or bending of the passage path Since the opening is formed on the side surface opposite to the side surface on which the object is pressed by the centrifugal force, it is possible to suppress the peripheral edge of the opening from being worn or damaged.

  In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D7, a displacement member formed so as to be displaceable is provided, and the displacement member extends to a range including at least a displacement locus of a part of the object protruding from the opening of the passage member. A gaming machine D8 formed so as to be displaceable.

  According to the gaming machine D8, any of the gaming machines D1 to D7 includes a displacement member formed so as to be displaceable, and the displacement member shows a displacement trajectory of a part of the object protruding from the opening of the passage member. Since it is formed to be displaceable to at least the range including it, the displacement region of the displacement member can be expanded by effectively utilizing the region where the protrusion of the passage member is reduced. Thereby, the effect by the displacement of a displacement member can be heightened.

  The displacement member may be formed so as to be displaceable from a part of the passage member to a position where the displacement member is inserted into the passage member. In this case, the displacement area of the displacement member can be expanded to the maximum, and the effect produced by the displacement of the displacement member can be further enhanced. For example, it is possible to displace the displacement member further forward, and force can be imparted by bringing it closer to the player.

  The gaming machine D8 includes detection means for detecting the presence or absence of an object in at least an area where the opening of the passage member is formed, and when the object is detected by the detection means, the displacement member is The gaming machine D9 is restricted from being displaced to a range including at least the displacement locus.

  According to the gaming machine D9, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D8, when the object is detected by the detecting means in at least the region where the opening of the passage member is formed, the displacement member is at least a displacement trajectory (passage member Therefore, it is possible to prevent the displacement member from interfering with the object.

  In the gaming machine D9, the detection means includes a first switch and a second switch that are disposed upstream and downstream of the opening of the passage member and detect the passage of the object at the respective positions. A gaming machine D10 characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine D10, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D9, the detection means are arranged upstream and downstream of the opening of the passage member, respectively, and detect the passage of the object at each of the arrangement positions. Since the first switch and the second switch are provided, it is possible to reliably detect the presence or absence of an object in a region where at least the opening of the passage member is formed. Therefore, it can avoid more reliably that a displacement member interferes with a target object.

<Characteristic E group> (Directed by over-winning game balls)
Based on the establishment of a specific condition and a variable member that can be varied between a ball entry means that allows a game ball to enter, a 1 state that restricts the entry of the game ball to the ball entry means, and a second state in which the restriction is released When the bonus game is executed by the bonus game executing means for executing the bonus game for changing the variable member from the first state to the second state and the bonus game executing means, the player enters the pitching means. A variable means for changing the variable member from the second state to the first state based on a counting means for counting the number of game balls played and a count value by the counting means reaching a predetermined upper limit value. An effect executing means for executing an effect based on the game ball entering the ball entering means and the effect executed by the effect executing means before being changed to the second state by the means and the variable means. Play The effect determination unit includes a determining unit, a is the gaming machine and wherein the when special conditions are satisfied, in which is configured to be able to determine the particular representation embodiment E1.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a game machine that shifts to a winning state when a specific lottery result is obtained in a lottery executed on the basis of a starting ball. In such a gaming machine, when a winning state is reached, the large opening provided in the board surface is set to an open state. By winning the game ball to the large opening, a prize ball is awarded to the player, so that it becomes advantageous to the player by entering the winning state. The large opening is set in a closed state in which it is difficult for a game ball to enter when a predetermined number of game balls are won after being set in the open state. Further, in such conventional gaming machines, a special effect (over winning effect) is executed when a winning of more than a specified number of game balls is detected in a single open state with respect to the large opening. There are some that are aimed at improving the interest of players.

  However, in such a conventional gaming machine, even if the over winning effect is executed, the player only recognizes that he has won a slightly larger number of prize balls than usual, and the player's interest is sufficiently In some cases, it could not be improved.

  On the other hand, the gaming machine E1 can be varied between a ball entry means that allows a game ball to enter, a 1 state in which entry of the game ball is restricted to the ball entry means, and a second state in which the restriction is released. A privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game for changing the variable member from the first state to the second state based on the establishment of a specific condition, and the privilege game executing means. In the case, the count member that counts the number of game balls that have entered the entrance means, and the count value by the count means has reached a predetermined upper limit, the variable member is The variable means for changing from the second state to the first state, and the effect for executing the effect based on the game ball entering the ball entering means before the variable means changes the second state. Execution means and production Anda effect determination means for determining an effect to be performed by the row unit, the effect determination unit, when special conditions are satisfied, and is configured to be able to determine the special effect mode.

  Thereby, there exists an effect that the interest with respect to a player's game can be improved more.

  Based on the establishment of the acquisition condition in the gaming machine E1, the acquisition means for acquiring information, the storage means for storing the information acquired by the acquisition means, and the storage means are stored based on the establishment of the determination condition. Determining means for determining information, and specific condition establishment means for satisfying the specific condition when the determination result by the determination means is a specific determination result, and the special condition is stored in the storage means by the determination means. It is set as at least one condition that the information discriminated as a specific discrimination result is stored as a gaming machine E2.

  According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E2, the following effects are produced. That is, an acquisition unit that acquires information based on the establishment of the acquisition condition, a storage unit that stores information acquired by the acquisition unit, and a storage unit that stores the information acquired based on the determination condition Determination means for determining information, and specific condition establishment means for establishing the specific condition when the determination result by the determination means is a specific determination result, and the special condition is stored in the storage means It is set as at least one condition that the information discriminated as a specific discrimination result by the means is stored.

  Thereby, by performing the effect of the special effect mode, it is possible to make the player recognize that the information that is the specific determination result is stored in the storage unit. Therefore, since the game can be performed in the hope that the effect of the special effect mode is executed, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game during the execution of the privilege game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine E2, the special condition is established with a predetermined probability when the storage unit stores the information determined as a specific determination result by the determination unit. Machine E3.

  According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine E2, the special condition is a predetermined probability when the storage unit stores the information determined as a specific determination result by the determination unit. Therefore, even if the special effect mode effect is not executed in the bonus game, there is a possibility that information that is a specific determination result is stored in the storage means. Therefore, even when the effect of the special effect mode is not executed, the player can play the game with the expectation that information as a specific determination result is stored. There is an effect that motivation can be maintained.

  In any of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the effect executing means executes the effect using the game ball after being counted by the counting means.

  According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the effect execution means executes the effect using the game ball counted by the counting means. There is an effect that the number of parts can be reduced as compared with the case where a configuration for performing an effect is provided separately from the game ball.

  In the gaming machine E4, the special effect mode includes a mode in which the game ball after being counted by the counting means is guided to a specific area configured to be visible to the player.

  According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine E4, the special effect mode is a mode in which the game ball after being counted by the counting means is guided to a specific area configured to be visible to the player. Therefore, it is possible to play a game while paying attention to a specific area. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  One of the gaming machines E1 to E5 has a sound output means for outputting a predetermined sound as one of the effects executed by the effect executing means.

  According to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines E1 to E5, the gaming machine E6 includes a voice output unit that outputs a predetermined sound as one of the presentations executed by the presentation execution unit. A realistic production can be realized. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be further improved.

  A gaming machine E7 having display means for displaying a predetermined display mode as one of the effects executed by the effect executing means in any of the gaming machines E1 to E6.

  According to the gaming machine E7, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines E1 to E6, the gaming machine E7 includes a display unit that displays a predetermined display mode as one of the effects executed by the effect executing unit. Because there is, it is possible to achieve a visual presentation. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be further improved.

  An end effect executing means for executing an end effect indicating the end of the privilege game executed by the privilege game executing means in any one of the gaming machines E1 to E7, and an aspect of the end effect executed by the end effect executing means. A gaming machine E8, comprising: an end effect mode determining means for determining.

  According to the gaming machine E8, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines E1 to E7, the following effects are produced. That is, the end effect execution means for executing the end effect indicating the end of the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means, and the end effect mode determination for determining the mode of the end effect executed by the end effect execution means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can easily understand the end of the privilege game.

<Characteristic F group> (form is formed by inversion of sub liquid crystal)
An effect executing means for executing an effect based on the discrimination information, a first display area in which a display mode is displayed as one of the effects executed by the effect executing means, and the effect on the back side of the first display area As one of the above, a display mode is displayed as one of the effects executed by the first display means having the first specific notification section for notifying the player of the specific notification mode and the effect execution means. Second display means having a second display area and a second specific notification section for notifying the specific notification mode on the back side of the second display area, the first display area, and the second display area At least in the first state in which the player can visually recognize the first specific notification unit and the second state in which the player can visually recognize the second specific notification unit and the second specific notification unit, respectively. 1 display means and the second display means Gaming machine F1 characterized by having a displacement means capable of displacing the.

  Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines include a display device such as an LGH display, a movable member that can be moved, and the like, and can perform various presentation operations by display effects and movable effects. Among the conventional gaming machines, there is a technology that ensures the visibility of the display effect even when the movable member moves to the front side of the display device, for example, during execution of the display effect. (For example, Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2015-134091).

  However, in such a conventional gaming machine, it has not been assumed that the orientation of the display device itself is variable. For this reason, if the display device itself is variably operated, an appropriate effect operation using a display effect may not be realized. That is, it may be difficult to increase the degree of freedom of production.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F1, the first display area in which the display mode is displayed as one of the effects executed by the effect executing means for executing effects based on the discrimination information and the effects executed by the effect executing means. And a first display means having a first specific notification section for notifying a player of a specific notification mode as one of the effects on the back side of the first display area, and the effect execution means As one of the effects, a second display having a second display area where a display mode is displayed and a second specific notification unit for notifying the specific notification mode on the back side of the second display area A player, a first state in which the player can visually recognize the first display area and the second display area, respectively, and the first specific notification section and the second specific notification section, respectively. Less in the second state that can be visually recognized Also has a displacement means capable of displacing said second display means and said first display means.

  As a result, a plurality of effects with different aspects can be realized using the first display means and the second display means. Therefore, there is an effect that the degree of freedom of production can be increased.

  In the gaming machine F1, in the second state, the specific notification mode is formed by combining the notification modes notified by the first specific notification unit and the second specific notification unit, respectively. Characteristic gaming machine F2.

  According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine F1, in the second state, the identification mode that is notified by the first identification notification unit and the second identification notification unit is combined to provide the identification. Since the notification mode is formed, there is an effect that the interest of the player can be improved.

  In the gaming machine F2, the specific notification mode is configured with a specific symbol, and a part of the specific symbol is displayed on the first specific notification unit, and the second specific notification unit includes Of the specific symbols, the remaining symbols not displayed by the first specific notification unit are displayed, and the first specific notification unit and the second specific notification unit are arranged in parallel at a predetermined position. The game machine F3, wherein the specific symbol is formed by combining.

  According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F2, the following effects are produced. That is, the specific notification mode is configured with a specific symbol, a part of the specific symbol is displayed on the first specific notification unit, and the second specific notification unit is displayed on the second specific notification unit. Among the specific symbols, the remaining symbols not displayed by the first specific notification unit are displayed, and the first specific notification unit and the second specific notification unit are arranged in parallel at a predetermined position. By combining, the specific symbol is formed.

  Thereby, since a specific symbol can be dynamically displayed using a 1st specific alerting | reporting part and a 2nd specific alerting | reporting part, there exists an effect that a specific symbol can be displayed more clearly.

  In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F3, the first display means and the second display means have third display means different from each other, and the effect execution means has the effect in the third display area of the third display means. In the first state, the first display area and the second display area are adjacent to each other in the vicinity of the third display area, or at least a part of them overlaps with each other. A gaming machine F4, which is arranged at a position.

  According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines F1 to F3, the following effects are produced. In other words, the first display means and the second display means have third display means different from each other, and the effect execution means has a predetermined display as one of the effects in a third display area of the third display means. The display mode is displayed, and in the first state, the first display area and the second display area are arranged close to each other in the vicinity of the third display area, or at least partially overlap each other. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to realize a production with a higher degree of freedom.

  In any of the gaming machines F1 to F4, when the specific effect is executed by the effect execution means, the game execution means includes a privilege game execution means that executes a special game that is advantageous to the player. The game machine F5 is characterized in that it is easy to execute the specific notification mode when performing the production.

  According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines F1 to F4, the following effects are produced. That is, when a specific effect is executed by the effect executing means, a special game executing means for executing a special game advantageous to a player is provided, and the effect executing means executes the specific effect. In addition, it is easy to execute the specific notification mode.

  Thereby, a game can be performed expecting that a specific alerting | reporting aspect will be performed. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  Based on the establishment of the determination condition in any of the gaming machines F1 to F5, the determination means for executing the determination and the effect determination means for determining the effect mode executed by the effect execution means based on the determination result of the determination means A gaming machine F6, characterized by comprising:

  According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines F1 to F5, the following effects are produced. That is, it has a discriminating unit for executing discrimination based on the establishment of the discriminating condition, and an effect determining unit for determining an effect mode executed by the effect executing unit based on the discrimination result of the discriminating unit.

  Thereby, there exists an effect that various production | generation aspects can be implement | achieved according to the determination result of a determination means.

<Characteristic G group> (Display by moving the main liquid crystal design while moving the sub liquid crystal)
First display means capable of displaying symbols, second display means different from the first display means, and at least the second display means at a position where the display area of the second display means overlaps the display area of the first display means A predetermined symbol is displayed at the position overlapping the display control means and the second display means for controlling display of the first movable means capable of moving the first display means and the second display means, respectively. In the state, when the first movable means is moved on the display area of the first display means, the first after being moved with respect to the display area of the first display means exposed by moving. A display mode setting unit that sets, in the display control unit, a movable display mode capable of forming one symbol in combination with the predetermined symbol displayed on the display unit. To play 1.

  Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines include a plurality of display devices such as LGH displays. In such a conventional gaming machine, by using a main display device that displays main effects related to the game and a sub display device that displays auxiliary effects, the degree of freedom of display effects is increased and the player's interest is improved. (For example, JP, 2014-117576, A).

  However, such conventional game machines still have room for improvement in terms of improving the degree of freedom of display effects.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine G1, first display means capable of displaying symbols, second display means different from the first display means, and the display area of the second display means is the display area of the first display means. First movable means capable of moving at least the second display means at a position overlapping with the display means, display control means for controlling display of the first display means and the second display means, respectively, and the second display means The display of the first display means exposed by moving when the first movable means is moved on the display area of the first display means in a state where a predetermined symbol is displayed at the overlapping position. A display mode setting that sets a movable display mode in the display control unit capable of forming one symbol in combination with the predetermined symbol displayed on the first display unit after moving with respect to an area. And means .

  Thereby, there is an effect that a display effect with a higher degree of freedom can be realized by using the first display means and the second display means.

  In the gaming machine G1, a third display means different from the first display means and the second display means and a display area of the third display means overlap the first display area, and one end of each of the second display means and the second display means Second display means that can move at least the third display means to a position that is the same position, and the display control means is configured such that each of the second display means and the third display means is When moving to the same position, based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, a specific display mode is displayed in which one symbol is displayed across each other display area with the one end as a boundary. Gaming machine G2.

  According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G1, the following effects are produced. That is, the third display means different from the first display means and the second display means, the display area of the third display means overlaps the first display area, and one end of each of the second display means is the same. Second movable means capable of moving at least the third display means at a position to be a position, and the display control means is configured such that each of the second display means and the third display means is When moving to the same position, based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, a specific display mode is displayed in which one symbol is displayed across the display areas with the one end as a boundary.

  Thereby, since one symbol can be displayed using the 2nd display means and the 3rd display means, there is an effect that a display with a higher degree of freedom can be realized.

  In the gaming machine G2, the display mode setting unit is configured to display the second display unit and the third display unit while the specific display mode is displayed on the second display unit and the third display unit by the display control unit. When at least one of the display means is movable in a direction away from the display means, the specific movable display mode is set.

  According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine G2, the display mode setting means displays the specific display mode by the display control means on the second display means and the third display means. In the state, when at least one of the second display means and the third display means is moved in a direction away from the second display means, a specific movable display mode is set. According to the arrangement with the three display means, it is possible to display appropriate display contents for each.

  In any of the gaming machines G1 to G3, the specific movable display mode is such that the first symbol displayed as the specific display mode is the first display unit, the second display unit, the first display unit, and the A gaming machine G4, which is set to be displayed on each of the third display means.

  According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines G1 to G3, the specific movable display mode includes the first symbol displayed as the specific display mode as the first display means and the Since it is set to be displayed on the second display means, the first display means, and the third display means respectively, it is more free to use the first display means, the second display means, and the third display means. There is an effect that it is possible to realize a high degree of display content.

<Characteristic H group> (Right-handed notification in a rotating display device)
An entry means capable of entering a game ball, an acquisition means for acquiring information based on the entry of the game ball into the entry means, and a storage means for storing the information acquired by the acquisition means Based on the establishment of the determination condition, the determination execution means for determining the information stored in the storage means, the display means for displaying the identification information based on the determination result by the determination means, and the display means When the identification information based on the determination result is displayed, a variable ball entry means capable of entering a game ball, and based on the player's operation in a gaming machine having a game ball launch intensity The first launching strength is different from the launching means capable of launching with a variable and the first flow path through which the game ball launched at the first launching intensity by the launching means can flow down. Games fired at the second launch strength Suggests that the game ball is fired into the second flow path after the identification information based on the second flow path in which the variable pitching means is arranged and the specific determination result is displayed. And a suggestion unit that displays the suggestion mode to be displayed on the display unit.

  Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines include a display device such as an LGH display, a movable member that can be moved, and the like, and can perform various presentation operations by display effects and movable effects. Some of these conventional game machines can display a suggestion display image that suggests a direction in which a game ball is launched on a display device. The conventional gaming machine employs a technique for ensuring the visibility of the suggestion display image even when the movable member is moved to the front side of the display device during the display of the suggestion display image (for example, JP, 2015-134091, A).

  However, in such a conventional gaming machine, it has not been assumed that the orientation of the display device is variable. For this reason, when the direction of the display device is changed, there is a possibility that the direction in which the game ball is launched cannot be properly notified.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine H1, a ball entry means capable of entering a game ball, an acquisition means for obtaining information based on the game ball entering the ball entry means, and the acquisition means. Based on the determination result by the determination means, the determination means for executing the determination of the information stored in the storage means based on the establishment of the determination condition Display means for displaying identification information, and variable entry means for allowing a game ball to enter when the identification information based on the specific discrimination result is displayed on the display means. The launching means capable of changing the launch intensity of the game ball based on the player's operation and launching the game ball with the first launch intensity may flow down. Possible first flow path and said first firing strength After the game ball launched at a second launch intensity different from the flow down, the second flow path in which the variable pitching means is arranged, and the identification information based on the specific discrimination result are displayed, Suggesting means for causing the display means to display a suggesting mode that suggests that a game ball is to be fired into the second flow path.

  As a result, a player who has confirmed the suggestion can launch a game ball with the second launch strength, so even a beginner can easily enter the game ball into the variable ball entry means. Can be balled. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to realize a gaming machine in which the gaming method is easier to understand.

  In the gaming machine H1, in the state where the display area of the display unit faces the front side, the suggestion mode includes a rotation unit that can rotate the display unit based on the establishment of a rotation condition. A gaming machine H2 having at least a part of a ring shape and including a direction suggesting mode indicating a direction of the second flow path.

  According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine H1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the display means has a turning means capable of turning the display means based on the establishment of the turning condition in a state where the display area faces the front side. It includes at least a part of the shape, and includes a direction suggesting aspect indicating the direction of the second flow path.

  Thereby, even if the display means is rotated, there is an effect that the direction of the second flow path can be accurately suggested by the direction suggesting aspect having at least a part of the ring shape.

  The gaming machine H3 is characterized in that the direction suggestion mode in the gaming machine H2 is dynamically displayed by rotating in a direction in which the gaming ball flies to the second flow path.

  According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine H2, the direction suggestion mode is dynamically displayed by rotating in the direction in which the gaming ball flies to the second flow path, so that the player On the other hand, there is an effect that the direction in which the game ball is fired can be notified more easily.

  The gaming machine H4 is characterized in that character information indicating that a gaming ball is launched into the second flow path in the gaming machine H2 or H3 is displayed as a part of the direction suggestion mode.

  According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine H2 or H3, the character information indicating that the game ball is launched into the second flow path is displayed as a part of the direction suggestion mode, so the direction suggestion There is an effect that the player who visually recognizes the aspect can more clearly understand the direction in which the game ball is fired.

  The gaming machine H5, wherein in any of the gaming machines H2 to H4, the direction suggestion mode is displayed with a symbol indicating the direction of the second flow path.

  According to the gaming machine H5, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines H2 to H4, the direction suggestion mode is displayed as a symbol indicating the direction of the second flow path, so that From this impression, it is possible to intuitively understand the direction in which the game ball is fired.

  In any one of the gaming machines H1 to H5, there is a reversing unit that reverses the display unit so that the back side of the display unit is located on the player side. On the back side of the display unit, a decorative portion that indicates the direction of the second flow path Is a game machine H6 characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine H6, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines H1 to H5, the following effects are achieved. That is, there is a reversing means for reversing so that the back side of the display means is located on the player side, and a decorative portion indicating the direction of the second flow path is arranged on the back side of the display means. Even if the display means is reversed by the reversing means, there is an effect that the player can accurately understand the direction in which the game ball is fired.

  In the gaming machine H6, the decoration portion has light emitting means arranged in order toward the direction of the second flow path, and the light emitting means is controlled to be turned on in order toward the direction of the second flow path. A gaming machine H7 characterized by being.

  According to the gaming machine H7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H6, the decorative portion has light emitting means arranged in order toward the direction of the second flow path, and the light emitting means is the second flow Since lighting control is sequentially performed in the direction of the road, there is an effect that the player can understand the direction in which the game ball is fired more easily.

<Feature I group> (Sub liquid crystal is used as the main liquid crystal.)
Based on the establishment of the determination condition, a determination unit that performs determination, a display unit that displays identification information based on a determination result by the determination unit, and a dynamic display unit that dynamically displays the identification information on the display unit When the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, an effect execution means for causing the display means to display an effect mode associated with the identification information based on the determination result, A privilege granting unit that grants a privilege that is advantageous to the player when identification information is displayed based on the determination result, and the display unit in the gaming machine that has the main display unit and the first display unit A sub-table comprising at least a first position parallel to the display area and sub-display means movable at least in a second position overlapping the front side of the display area of the main display means; In the case where the movable display means is movable to the first position and the second position, and the sub display means is moved to the first position, the identification information is displayed on the main display means. If the sub display means is set to be switched to the first state where at least a part of the effect mode is displayed, the sub display means is moved to the second position, and the specific condition is satisfied. And a switching means capable of switching and setting a second state in which the identification information is displayed on the sub display means.

  Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines include a plurality of display devices such as LGH displays. In such a conventional gaming machine, by using a main display device that displays main effects related to the game and a sub display device that displays auxiliary effects, the degree of freedom of display effects is increased and the player's interest is improved. I am trying. Further, some of these conventional gaming machines can move the sub display device to the front side of the main display device and execute a composite display effect on the main display device and the sub display device (for example, JP, 2015-029606, A).

  However, such conventional game machines still have room for improvement in terms of improving the degree of freedom of display effects.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine I1, based on the establishment of the determination condition, a determination unit that performs determination, a display unit that displays identification information based on a determination result by the determination unit, and a display unit that displays the identification information Dynamic display means for dynamically displaying information, and when the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, the display means displays an effect mode associated with the identification information based on the determination result. An effect execution means to be executed; and a privilege granting means for granting a privilege that is advantageous to the player when identification information is displayed on the display means based on the specific discrimination result, the display means The means includes a main display means, a first position parallel to the display area of the main display means, and a sub-display movable at least in a second position overlapping the front side of the display area of the main display means. A movable means capable of moving the sub display means to the first position and the second position, and the sub display means being moved to the first position. Is switched to the first state in which the identification information is displayed on the main display means, and at least a part of the effect mode is displayed on the sub display means, and the sub display means is movable to the second position. And a switching means capable of switching and setting the second state in which the identification information is displayed on the sub-display means when the specific condition is satisfied.

  Thereby, since the first state and the second state can be appropriately switched according to the position of the sub display means, there is an effect that a display effect with a higher degree of freedom can be realized.

  In the gaming machine I1, the sub display means includes at least a first display means disposed on one end side of the main display means and a second display means disposed on the other end side of the main display means. In one position, the first display means and the second display means are positions facing the main display means in between.

  According to the gaming machine I2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine I1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the sub display means is at least composed of a first display means disposed on one end side of the main display means and a second display means disposed on the other end side of the main display means. In the position, the first display means and the second display means are in positions facing the main display means in between.

  Thereby, there exists an effect that the freedom degree of the production | presentation aspect displayed with respect to a 1st display means and a 2nd display means in a 1st position can be raised more.

  In the gaming machine I2, at the second position, the first display means and the second display means make one end side contact with each other to cover the display area of the main display means with difficulty in visual recognition. A gaming machine I3.

  According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine I2, in the second position, the first display means and the second display means are brought into contact with each other at one end side, thereby displaying the main display means. Since the region is covered with difficulty in visual recognition, a compact display using only the sub display means can be realized at the second position. Therefore, there is an effect that an appropriate display area can be set according to the display content.

  A gaming machine I4 characterized in that in the gaming machine I2 or I3, the first display means and the second display means each have a turning means for turning around the main display means.

  According to the gaming machine I4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine I2 or I3, the gaming machine I4 has a rotating means for rotating the first display means and the second display means around the main display means. There is an effect that a display effect with a higher degree of freedom using the display means can be realized.

  In the gaming machine I4, the rotating means rotates the first display means and the second display means so that the first display means and the second display means are arranged in the vertical direction of the main display means. A gaming machine I5, wherein the gaming machine I5 is varied between a vertically positioned position and a left and right position where the first display means and the second display means are positioned in the left-right direction of the main display means.

  According to the gaming machine I5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine I4, the turning means turns the first display means and the second display means to move the first display means in the vertical direction of the main display means. The first display means and the second display means are changed to a vertical position where the first display means and the second display means are located, and a left-right position where the first display means and the second display means are located in the left-right direction of the main display means. Therefore, there is an effect that a display effect with a higher degree of freedom using the sub display means can be realized.

  In the gaming machine I5, when the first display means and the second display means are moved from the vertical position to the second position and then moved to the vertical position, the sub display means and the main display means A first fusion display mode displayed in a merged manner, and the sub display when the first display means and the second display means are moved from the left-right position to the second position and then moved to the left-right position. A gaming machine I6, comprising: a fusion display mode setting means for switching and setting a second fusion display mode that is displayed by being fused with the display means and the main display means.

  According to the gaming machine I6, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine I5, when the first display means and the second display means are moved from the vertical position to the second position and then moved to the vertical position The first display means and the second display means are moved from the left and right positions to the second position. Since it has fusion display mode setting means for switching and setting the second fusion display mode that is fused and displayed by the sub display means and the main display means when moved to the left and right positions later, There is an effect that an appropriate display effect can be realized depending on whether there is a left or right position.

<Characteristic J group> (Display mode of sub liquid crystal to be inverted is displayed by mirror)
When the discriminating means for executing discrimination based on the establishment of the discriminating condition, the display means for displaying the effect mode based on the discrimination result by the discriminating unit, and the effect mode based on the specific discrimination result are displayed on the display unit In addition, in the gaming machine having a privilege granting means for granting a privilege that is advantageous to the player, the display means includes at least a first display means and a second display means, and the first display means and the first display means Rotating means capable of rotating two display means to a front position where the display area faces the front side and a second position where the display area faces the back side, and the first display means are rotated to the back position When the first projection means for projecting the effect mode displayed on the first display means to the front side and the second display means are rotated to the rear position, the second display means displays the effect. Said performance Gaming machine J1, wherein those having a second projection means for projecting a manner on the front side.

  Here, some game machines such as pachinko machines include a projection device such as a mirror in its configuration. In such a conventional gaming machine, when a predetermined entertainment effect is selected, it is possible to realize an impact entertainment effect that makes the projection device visible and projects the player's face etc. on the projection device. (For example, JP-A-2005-329159).

  However, in such a conventional gaming machine, the projection device is simply set in a state that can be visually recognized by the player, and therefore, the target to be projected onto the projection device is limited. Therefore, the player's interests may not be sufficiently improved using the projection device.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine J1, the determination means for executing the determination based on the establishment of the determination condition, the display means for displaying the effect mode based on the determination result by the determination means, and the display means And a privilege granting unit for granting a privilege that is advantageous to the player when an effect mode based on the determination result is displayed. The display unit includes a first display unit and a second display unit. Rotating means capable of rotating the first display means and the second display means to a front position where the display area faces the front side and a second position where the display area faces the back side, respectively. First projecting means for projecting the effect mode displayed on the first display means to the front side when the first display means is rotated to the back position; and the second display means is the back position. Rotated to To have a second projection means for projecting on the front side of the representation embodiment to be displayed on the second display means.

  Thereby, even when the first display unit and the second display unit are rotated to the back position, the player can visually recognize the effect modes displayed on each. That is, since it is possible to realize a novel effect operation that can rotate the first display means and the second display means while the effect mode is visible, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game. effective.

  In the gaming machine J1, the first projecting unit and the second projecting unit have a mirror part capable of projecting the effect mode displayed on the first display unit and the second display unit. A gaming machine J2.

  According to the gaming machine J2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine J1, the first projecting means and the second projecting means project the effect mode displayed on the first display means and the second display means. Since the mirror surface portion is provided, even when the first display means and the second display means are rotated to the back position, the player can clearly see the effect mode displayed on each of them through the mirror surface portion. There is an effect that can be.

  In the gaming machine J2, the rotating means is such that the first display means and the second display means are rotated to a position where each of the first display means and the second display means is V-shaped on the front side of the gaming machine. Game machine J3.

  According to the gaming machine J3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine J2, the rotating means has the first display means and the second display means V-shaped on the front side of the gaming machine as the back position. Since it is rotated to a position, it can be made to look very different from the front position by becoming the back position. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In any one of the gaming machines J1 to J3, the first projecting unit and the second projecting unit are configured such that when the first display unit and the second display unit are respectively rotated to the back position, A gaming machine J4 having a projection plane that can face the display area of the display means or the display area of the second display means.

  According to the gaming machine J4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines J1 to J3, the first projecting means and the second projecting means include the first display means and the second display means, respectively. Since it has a projection plane that can face the display area of the first display means or the display area of the second display means when rotated to the back position, the display area of the first display means and the second display Since the effect mode displayed in the display area of the means can be directly projected, there is an effect that the first projecting means and the second projecting means can be made compact.

  In the gaming machine J1, it is arranged at a position facing the first display area of the first display means rotated to the back position, and the effect mode displayed on the first display means is diffracted to the first projection means. The first diffracting means is arranged at a position facing the second display area of the second display means rotated to the back position, and the effect mode displayed on the second display means is diffracted to the second projection means. And a second diffracting means for making the gaming machine J5 characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine J5, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine J1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the first diffracting means is arranged at a position facing the display area of the first display means rotated to the back position and diffracts the effect mode displayed on the first display means to the first projecting means. And a second diffracting means that is arranged at a position facing the second display area of the display means rotated to the back position and diffracts the effect mode displayed on the second display means to the second projecting means. And having.

  Thereby, the arrangement of the first projecting unit and the second projecting unit can be freely determined within a range that can be diffracted by the first diffracting unit and the second diffracting unit, respectively. Therefore, there is an effect that the degree of freedom of arrangement of the first projection unit and the second projection unit can be increased.

  In the gaming machine J5, the first diffracting means and the second diffracting means are half mirrors.

  According to the gaming machine J6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine J5, the first diffracting means and the second diffracting means are constituted by half mirrors, so that the display area of the first display means and the second It is possible to vary whether or not the effect mode displayed in the display area of the display means is diffracted. Therefore, there is an effect that the degree of freedom of production can be increased.

  In the gaming machine J5 or J6, when the first diffractive means and the second diffractive means are respectively rotated at least one of the first display means and the second display means to the back position, A gaming machine J7 having display means or movable means that can be moved to a position facing the second display means.

  According to the gaming machine J7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine J5 or J6, the first diffracting means and the second diffracting means are respectively connected to at least one of the first display means and the second display means. When it is rotated to the back position, it has a movable means that can be moved to a position facing the first display means or the second display means, so that the display mode displayed on the first display means and the second display means Can be diffracted more accurately.

<Characteristic K group> (Over winning using the closing command)
The main control means for executing the game control, the slave control means for executing the game control based on the control signal from the main control means, the open state in which the game ball can enter, and the entrance of the game ball are restricted. A variable pitching means that can be changed to a restricted state, wherein the main control means is configured to execute a determination based on the determination result by the determination means and a determination means that executes determination based on establishment of the determination condition. Based on the fact that the discrimination result by the effect information determining means for determining the effect information and the discrimination means is a specific discrimination result, the variable pitching means is varied from the restricted state to the open state until a predetermined condition is satisfied. A bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game, a establishment signal output means for outputting a establishment signal based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, and an entry signal is output based on a game ball entering the variable entry means Do Privilege providing means for granting a privilege advantageous to a player based on a game ball entering the ball signal output means and the variable entry means, and the sub control means is provided by the effect information determining means. After receiving the effect signal determining means for determining the effect aspect, the effect executing means for executing the effect aspect determined by the effect aspect determining means, and the establishment signal based on the determined effect information, the predetermined condition is satisfied. A gaming machine K1 comprising: a specific effect execution means for executing a specific effect when the incoming signal is received in a period until it is established.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a game machine that shifts to a winning state when a specific lottery result is obtained in a lottery executed on the basis of a starting ball. In such a gaming machine, when a winning state is reached, the large opening provided in the board surface is set to an open state. By winning the game ball to the large opening, a prize ball is awarded to the player, so that it becomes advantageous to the player by entering the winning state. The large opening is set in a closed state in which it is difficult for a game ball to enter when a predetermined number of game balls are won after being set in the open state. Further, in such conventional gaming machines, a special effect (over winning effect) is executed when a winning of more than a specified number of game balls is detected in a single open state with respect to the large opening. Thus, there are those that aim to improve the interest of the player (for example, JP-A-2015-112239).

  In such a conventional gaming machine, it is necessary to count the number of game balls won in the large opening in order to determine whether or not the over winning effect is executed. The number of balls entered until the mouth was closed was generally different. Therefore, because it is necessary to reset the conditions for whether or not to execute the over-winning effect according to the model, there is a case where the program adopted for one model cannot be transferred to another gaming machine as it is. It was. That is, there is a problem that the workload of the developer increases.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine K1, the main control means for executing the game control, the slave control means for executing the game control based on the control signal from the main control means, and the opening where the game ball can enter. Variable entry means that can be varied between a state and a restricted state in which entry of game balls is restricted, the main control means, a determination means for performing determination based on the establishment of the determination condition, An effect information determining means for determining effect information for executing an effect based on a determination result by the determining means, and a result of the determination by the determining means being a specific determination result. A privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game that is varied from a restricted state to the released state until a predetermined condition is satisfied, a formation signal output means for outputting a formation signal based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, and the variable pitching means Game balls Entry signal output means for outputting a sphere signal based on having entered the game, and Privilege grant means for providing a privilege advantageous to the player based on the game sphere entering the variable entry means The sub control means has an effect mode determining means for determining an effect mode based on the effect information determined by the effect information determining means, and the effect determined by the effect mode determining means. And an effect execution means for executing an aspect and a specific effect execution means for executing a specific effect when the incoming signal is received in a period until the predetermined condition is satisfied after receiving the establishment signal.

  As a result, the sub control means can determine whether to execute the specific effect according to whether or not the establishment signal is simply received from the main control means, so whether or not the predetermined condition is established directly on the sub control means side. There is no need to determine. Therefore, it is possible to facilitate diversion of the control program set in the slave control means, and there is an effect that the workload of the developer can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine K1, the predetermined condition is satisfied when a predetermined number of gaming balls enter the variable ball entry means or when a predetermined period of time elapses. .

  According to the gaming machine K2, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine K1, the predetermined condition is established when a predetermined number of gaming balls enter the variable ball entry means or when a predetermined period of time elapses. Therefore, after the specific effect is executed, after the predetermined number of game balls have entered the variable ball entry means, or after the predetermined time has elapsed, the variable ball is further changed. It can be recognized that a game ball has entered the means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player who has confirmed the specific performance can be pleased.

  In the gaming machine K1 or K2, when the sub control means receives the establishment signal output by the establishment signal output means based on the elapse of a predetermined period as the predetermined condition, the specific effect The game machine K3 is provided with avoidance means for avoiding execution of the game machine.

  According to the gaming machine K3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine K1 or K2, the slave control means is output as the predetermined condition by the establishment signal output means based on the fact that a predetermined period has elapsed. When the establishment signal is received, the avoidance means for avoiding the execution of the specific effect is provided. Therefore, when the specific effect is executed, a number of game balls exceeding a predetermined number are given to the player. Can be notified that the ball has entered the variable ball entry means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player who has confirmed the specific performance can be more pleased.

  In any one of the gaming machines K1 to K3, the main control unit acquires the information determined by the determination unit based on the establishment of the acquisition condition, and the determination condition satisfies the information acquired by the acquisition unit. A prior signal indicating prior information based on a prior determination result by the prior determination unit and the prior determination unit that determines the information stored in the storage unit before the determination condition is satisfied A prior signal output means for outputting to the slave control means, the slave control means has a prior information storage means for storing the advance information indicated by the advance signal, and the specific effect mode is The gaming machine K4 is characterized by indicating the contents of the prior information stored in the prior information storage means.

  According to the gaming machine K4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines K1 to K3, the following effects are produced. That is, the main control unit acquires at least the information acquired by the determination unit based on the establishment of the acquisition condition and the information acquired by the acquisition unit until the determination condition is satisfied. A storage unit, a prior determination unit for determining the information stored in the storage unit before the determination condition is satisfied, and a prior signal indicating a prior information based on a preliminary determination result by the prior determination unit; Pre-signal output means for outputting to the control means, the sub-control means has a pre-information storage means for storing the pre-information indicated by the pre-signal, the specific effect mode, It shows the contents of the prior information stored in the prior information storage means.

  Thereby, in order to confirm the contents of the prior information, the player can actively enter the game ball to the player during the execution of the special game in order to enter the game ball into the variable ball entry means after the predetermined condition is established. Can be launched. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's willingness to participate in the game can be improved.

  In any of the gaming machines in the above embodiments or control examples, the gaming machine is a slot machine. Above all, the basic configuration of the slot machine is “equipped with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and for operating the starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. The game machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, examples of the game media include coins and medals.

  In any one of the game machines in each of the above embodiments or control examples, the game machine is a pachinko game machine. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and a ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in an operation port disposed at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is determined and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner so that a ball can be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is obtained. Examples include those to which values (including data written on magnetic cards as well as premium balls) are given.

  In any one of the game machines in each of the above embodiments or control examples, the game machine is a combination of a pachinko game machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the merged gaming machine includes “a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to the operation of the identification information, the change of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. Special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stoppage is specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, and the identification information The game machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when the special gaming state occurs.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
64 First prize opening (entrance means)
81 3rd symbol display device (display means)

Claims (3)

Main control means for executing control of the game;
Sub control means for executing control of the game based on a control signal from the main control means;
Variable entry means that can be varied between an open state in which a game ball can enter and a restricted state in which game ball entry is restricted,
The main control means includes
Discrimination means for executing discrimination based on establishment of the discrimination condition;
Effect information determining means for determining effect information for executing an effect based on the determination result by the determining means;
Based on the determination result by the determination means being a specific determination result, a privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game for changing the variable pitching means from the restricted state to the released state until a predetermined condition is satisfied; ,
Establishment signal output means for outputting an establishment signal based on establishment of the predetermined condition;
Based on the fact that a game ball has entered the variable entry means, an entry signal output means for outputting an entry signal;
Privilege granting means for granting a privilege advantageous to the player based on the game ball entering the variable pitching means,
The slave control means includes
Based on the effect information determined by the effect information determining means, an effect aspect determining means for determining an effect aspect;
Effect execution means for executing the effect mode determined by the effect mode determination means;
A game machine comprising: a specific effect executing means for executing a specific effect when the entrance signal is received in a period until a predetermined condition is satisfied after receiving the establishment signal. .   2. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the predetermined condition is satisfied when a predetermined number of game balls enter the variable pitching means or when a predetermined period of time elapses. . The slave control means includes
As the predetermined condition, an avoiding means for avoiding the execution of the specific effect when the establishment signal output by the establishment signal output means is received based on the elapse of a predetermined period. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the gaming machine is provided.

Images